co.

Table of Contents

s.

Summary

s.­1

The Long Explanation of the Noble Perfection of Wisdom in One Hundred Thousand, Twenty-Five Thousand, and Eighteen Thousand Lines is a detailed explanation of the Long Perfection of Wisdom sūtras, presenting a structural framework for them that is relatively easy to understand in comparison to most other commentaries based on Maitreya-Asaṅga’s Ornament for the Clear Realizations. After a detailed, word-by-word explanation of the introductory chapter common to all three sūtras, it explains the structure they also all share in terms of the three approaches or “gateways”‍—brief, intermediate, and detailed‍—ending with an explanation of the passage known as the “Maitreya chapter” found only in the Eighteen Thousand Line and Twenty-Five Thousand Line sūtras. It goes by many different titles, and its authorship has never been conclusively determined, some Tibetans believing it to be by Vasubandhu, and others that it is by Daṃṣṭrāsena.

ac.

Acknowledgements

ac.­1

This commentary was translated by Gareth Sparham under the patronage and supervision of 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha.

The Translator’s Acknowledgments

ac.­2

I thank the late Gene Smith, who initially encouraged me to undertake this work, and I thank all of those at 84000‍—Dzongsar Khyentse Rinpoche, the sponsors, and the scholars, translators, editors, and technicians‍—and all the other indispensable people whose work has made this translation possible.

I thank all the faculty and graduate students in the Group in Buddhist Studies at Berkeley, and Jan Nattier, whose seminars on the Perfection of Wisdom were particularly helpful. At an early stage, Paul Harrison and Ulrich Pagel arranged for me to see a copy of an unpublished Sanskrit manuscript of a sūtra cited in Bṭ3. I thank them for that assistance.

I also take this opportunity to thank the abbot of Drepung Gomang monastery, Losang Gyaltsen, and the retired director of the Institute of Buddhist Dialectics, Kalsang Damdul, for listening to some of my questions and giving learned and insightful responses.

Finally, I acknowledge the kindness of my mother, Ann Sparham, who recently passed away in her one hundredth year, and my wife Janet Seding.

Acknowledgement of Sponsorhip

ac.­3

We gratefully acknowledge the generous sponsorship of Kelvin Lee, Doris Lim, Chang Chen Hsien, Lim Cheng Cheng, Ng Ah Chon and family, Lee Hoi Lang and family, the late Lee Tiang Chuan, and the late Chang Koo Cheng. Their support has helped make the work on this translation possible.

Text Body

The Translation
The Long Explanation of the Noble Perfection of Wisdom in One Hundred Thousand, Twenty-Five Thousand, and Eighteen Thousand Lines
c.

Colophon

c.­1

Revised and finalized by the Indian preceptor Surendrabodhi and the chief editor-translator monk Yeshé Dé.

ab.

Abbreviations

AAV Āryavimuktisena (’phags pa rnam grol sde). ’phags pa shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa stong phrag nyi shu lnga pa’i man ngag gi bstan bcos mngon par rtogs pa’i rgyan gyi tshig le’ur byas pa’i ’grel pa (Ārya­pañca­viṃśati­sāhasrikā­prajñā-pāramitopadeśa­śāstrābhisamayālaṃkāra­kārikā­vārttika). Toh 3787, Degé Tengyur vol. 80 (shes phyin, ka), folios 14b–212a.
AAVN Āryavimuktisena. Abhi­samayālamkāra­vrtti (mistakenly titled Abhi­samayālaṅkāra­vyākhyā). Nepal German Manuscript Preservation Project A 37/9, National Archives Kathmandu Accession Number 5/55. The numbers follow the page numbering of my own undated, unpublished transliteration of the part of the manuscript not included in Pensa 1967.
AAVārt Bhadanta Vimuktisena (btsun pa grol sde). ’phags pa shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa stong phrag nyi shu lnga pa’i man ngag gi bstan bcos mngon par rtogs pa’i rgyan gyi tshig le’ur byas pa’i rnam par ’grel pa (*Ārya­pañca­viṃśati­sāhasrikā­prajñā-pāramitopadeśa­śāstrābhisamayālaṃkāra­kārikā­vārttika). Toh 3788, Degé Tengyur vol. 81 (shes phyin, kha), folios 1b–181a.
AAtib shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa’i man ngag gi bstan bcos mngon par rtogs pa’i rgyan zhes bya ba tshig le’le’urur byas pa (Abhi­samayālaṃkāra-nāma-prajñā­pāramitopadeśa­śāstra­kārikā) [Ornament for the Clear Realizations]. Toh 3786, Degé Tengyur (shes phyin, ka), folios 1b–13a.
Abhisamayālaṃkāra Abhi­samayālaṃkāra-nāma-prajñā­pāramitopadeśa­śāstra. Numbering of the verses as in Unrai Wogihara edition. Abhisamayālaṃkārālokā Prajñāpāramitā Vyākhyā: The Work of Haribhadra. Tokyo: The Toyo Bunko, 1932–5; reprint ed., Tokyo: Sankibo Buddhist Book Store, 1973.
Amano Amano, Koei H. Abhisamayālaṃkāra-kārikā-śāstra-vivṛti: Haribhadra’s Commentary on the Abhisamayālaṃkāra-kārikā-śāstra edited for the first time from a Sanskrit Manuscript. Kyoto: Heirakuji Shoten, 2000.
Aṣṭa Aṣṭa­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā. Page numbers are Wogihara (1973) that includes the edition of Mitra (1888).
BPS ’phags pa byang chub sems dpa’i sde snod ces bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Ārya­bodhi­sattva­piṭaka­nāma­mahā­yāna­sūtra) [The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva]. Toh 56, Degé Kangyur vols. 40–41 (dkon brtsegs, kha, ga), folios 255b1–294a7, 1b1–205b1. English translation in Norwegian Institute of Palaeography and Historical Philology 2023.
Bod rgya tshig mdzod chen mo Zhang, Yisun, ed. Bod rgya tshig mdzod chen mo. Pe-cing: Mi rigs dpe skrun khang 2000.
Buddhaśrī shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa sdud pa’i tshig su byas pa’i dka’ ’grel (Prajñā­pāramitā­saṃcaya­gāthā­pañjikā). Toh 3798, Degé Tengyur vol. 87 (shes phyin, nya), folios 116a–189b.
Bṭ1 Anonymous/Daṃṣṭrāsena. shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa ’bum gyi rgya cher ’grel (Śata­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā­bṛhaṭṭīkā) [Bṛhaṭṭīkā]. Toh 3807, Degé Tengyur vols. 91–92 (shes phyin, na, pa).
Bṭ3 Vasubandhu/Daṃṣṭrāsena. ’phags pa shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa ’bum dang / nyi khri lnga sgong pa dang / khri brgyad stong pa rgya cher bshad pa (Ārya­śata­sāhasrikā­pañca­viṃśati­sāhasrikāṣṭā­daśa-sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitābṭhaṭṭīkā) [Bṛhaṭṭīkā]. Degé Tengyur vol. 93 (shes phyin, pha), folios 1b–292b.
C Choné (co ne) Kangyur and Tengyur.
D Degé (sde dge) Kangyur and Tengyur.
DMDic Dan Martin Dictionary. Part of The Tibetan to English Translation Tool, version 3.3.0, compiled by Andrés Montano Pellegrini. Available from https://www.bdrc.io/blog/2020/12/21/dan-martins-tibetan-histories/.
Edg Edgerton, Franklin. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Dictionary. New Haven, 1953.
Eight Thousand Conze, Edward. The Perfection of Wisdom in Eight Thousand Lines & Its Verse Summary. Bolinas, Calif.: Four Seasons Foundation, 1973.
GRETIL Göttingen Register of Electronic Texts in Indian Languages.
Ghoṣa Ghoṣa, Pratāpachandra, ed. Śata­sāhasrikā Prajñā­pāramitā. Asiatic Society of Bengal. Calcutta, 1902–14.
Gilgit Gilgit Buddhist Manuscripts (revised and enlarged compact facsimile edition). Vol. 1. by Raghu Vira and Lokesh Chandra. Bibliotheca Indo-Buddhica Series No. 150. Delhi 110007: Sri Satguru Publications, a division of Indian Books Center, 1995.
GilgitC Conze, Edward, ed. and trans. The Gilgit Manuscript of the Aṣṭādaśasāhasrikāprajñāpāramitā: Chapters 55 to 70 Corresponding to the 5th Abhisamaya. Roma: Istituto Italiano per il Medio ed Estremo Oriente, 1962.
Golden snar thang gser bri ma. Golden Tengyur/Ganden Tengyur. Produced between 1731 and 1741 by Polhane Sonam Tobgyal for the Qing court, published in Tianjing 1988. BDRC W23702.
H Lhasa (zhol) Kangyur and Tengyur
Haribhadra (Amano) Abhi­samayālaṃkāra­kārikā­śāstra­vivṛti. Amano edition.
Haribhadra (Wogihara) Abhi­samayālaṃkārālokā Prajñā­pāramitā­vyākhyā. Wogihara edition.
LC Candra, Lokesh. Tibetan Sanskrit Dictionary. Śata-piṭaka Series Indo-Asian Literature, Vol. 3. International Academy of Indian Culture (1959–61) third reprint edition 2001.
LSPW Conze, Edward. The Large Sutra on Perfection Wisdom. Berkeley and Los Angeles, California: University of California Press, 1975. First paperback printing, 1984.
MDPL Conze, Edward. Materials for a Dictionary of the Prajñāpāramitā Literature. Tokyo: Suzuki Research Foundation, 1973.
MQ Conze, Edward and Shotaro Iida. “ ‘Maitreya’s Questions’ in the Prajñāpāramitā.” In Mélanges d’India a la Mémoire de Louis Renou, 229–42. Paris: Éditions E. de Boccard, 1968.
MSAvy Asaṅga / Vasubandhu. Sūtrālaṃkāra­vyākhyā.
MSAvyT Asaṅga / Vasubandhu. mdo sde’i rgyan gyi bshad pa (Sūtrālaṃkāra­vyākhyā). Toh 4026, Degé Tengyur vol. 225 (sems tsam, phi), folios 129b–260a.
MW Monier-Williams, Monier. A Sanskrit-English dictionary: Etymologically and Philologically Arranged with Special Reference to Cognate Indo-European Languages. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1899.
Mppś Lamotte, Étienne. Le Traité de la Grande Vertu de Sagesse de Nāgārjuna (Mahāprajñā-pāramitā-śāstra). Vol. I and II: Bibliothèque du Muséon, 18. Louvain: Institut Orientaliste, 1949; reprinted 1967. Vol III, IV and V: Publications de l’Institut Orientaliste de Louvain, 2, 12 and 24. Louvain: Institut Orientaliste, 1970, 1976 and 1980.
Mppś English Gelongma Karma Migme Chodron. The Treatise on the Great Virtue of Wisdom of Nāgārjuna. Gampo Abbey Nova Scotia, 2001. English translation of Étienne Lamotte (1949–80).
Mvy Mahāvyutpatti (bye brag tu rtogs par byed pa chen po. Toh. 4346, Degé Tengyur vol. 306 (bstan bcos sna tshogs, co), folios 1b-131a.
N Narthang (snar thang) Kangyur and Tengyur.
NAK National Archives Kathmandu.
NGMPP Nepal German Manuscript Preservation Project.
PSP Pañca­viṃśati­sāhasrikā Prajñāpāramitā. Edited by Takayasu Kimura. Tokyo: Sankibo Busshorin 2007–9 (1-1, 1-2), 1986 (2-3), 1990 (4), 1992 (5), 2006 (6-8). Available online (input by Klaus Wille, Göttingen) at GRETIL.
RecA Skt and Tib editions of Recension A in Yuyama 1976.
RecAs Sanskrit Recension A in Yuyama 1976.
RecAt Tibetan Recension A in Yuyama 1976.
Rgs Ratna­guṇa­saṃcaya­gāthā.
S Stok Palace (stog pho brang bris ma) Kangyur.
Skt Sanskrit.
Subodhinī Attributed to Haribhadra. bcom ldan ’das yon tan rin po che sdud pa’i tshig su byas pa’i dka’ ’grel shes bya ba (Bhagavadratna­guṇa­saṃcaya­gāthā-pañjikā­nāma) [A Commentary on the Difficult Points of the “Verses that Summarize the Perfection of Wisdom”]. Toh 3792, Degé Tengyur vol. 86 (shes phyin, ja), folios 1b–78a.
TGN de bshin gshegs pa’i gsang ba bsam gyis mi khyab pa’i bstan pa (Tathāgatācintya­guhyaka­nirdeśa) [The Secrets of the Realized Ones]. Toh 47, Degé Kangyur vol. 39 (dkon brtsegs, ka), folios 100a7–203a. English translation in Fiordalis, David. and Dharmachakra Translation Committee 2023.
TMN de bzhin gshegs pa’i snying po chen po nges par bstan pa (Tathāgata­mahā­karuṇā­nirdeśa­sūtra) [“The Teaching on the Great Compassion of the Tathāgata”]. Toh 147, Degé Kangyur vol. 57 (mdo sde, pa), folios 42a1–242b7. English translation in Burchardi 2020.
Tempangma bka’ ’gyur rgyal rtse’i them spang ma. The Gyaltse Tempangma manuscript of the Kangyur preserved at National Library of Mongolia, Ulaanbaatar, Mongolia.
Tib Tibetan.
Toh Tōhoku Imperial University A Complete Catalogue of the Tibetan Buddhist Canons. (bkaḥ-ḥgyur and bstan-ḥgyur). Edited by Ui, Hakuju; Suzuki, Munetada; Kanakura, Yenshō; and Taka, Tōkan. Tohoku Imperial University, Sendai, 1934.
Vetter Vetter, Tilmann. “Compounds in the Prologue of the Pañca­viṃśati­sāhasrikā,” Wiener Zeitschrift für die Kunde Südasiens, Band XXXVII, 1993: 45–92.
Wogihara Wogihara, Unrai. Abhisamayālaṃkārālokā Prajñāpāramitā Vyākhyā: The Work of Haribhadra. Tokyo: The Toyo Bunko, 1932–5; reprint ed., Tokyo: Sankibo Buddhist Book Store, 1973.
Z Zacchetti, Stefano. In Praise of the Light. Bibliotheca Philologica et Philosophica Buddhica, Vol. 8. The International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology. Tokyo: Soka University, 2005.
brgyad stong pa shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa bryad stong pa (Aṣṭa­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā) [“Eight Thousand”]. Toh 12, Degé Kangyur vol. 33 (shes phyin, brgyad stong pa, ka), folios 1a–286a.
khri brgyad shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa khri brgyad stong pa (Aṣṭā­daśa­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā) [“Perfection of Wisdom in Eighteen Thousand Lines”]. Toh 10, Degé Kangyur vols. 29–31 (shes phyin, khri brgyad, ka, kha, and in ga folios 1b–206a). English translation in Sparham 2022.
khri pa shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa khri pa (Daśa­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā) [“Perfection of Wisdom in Ten Thousand Lines”]. Toh 11, Degé Kangyur vols. 31–32 (shes phyin, khri brgyad, ga folios 1b–91a (second repetition of numbering), and in shes phyin, khrid pa, nga, folios 92b-397a). English translation in Dorje 2018.
le’u brgyad ma shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa stong phrag nyi shu lnga pa (Pañca­viṃśati­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā) [Haribhadra’s “Eight Chapters”]. Toh 3790, vols. 82–84 (shes phyin, ga, nga, ca). Citations are from the 1976–79 Karmapae chodhey gyalwae sungrab partun khang edition, first the Tib. vol. letter in italics, followed by the folio and line number.
nyi khri shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa stong phrag nyi shu lnga pa (Pañca­viṃśati­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā) [Perfection of Wisdom in Twenty-Five Thousand Lines]. Toh 9, Degé Kangyur vols. 26–28 (shes phyin, nyi khri, ka–ga). Citations are from the 1976–79 Karmapae chodhey gyalwae sungrab partun khang edition. English Translation in Padmakara 2023.
rgyan snang Haribhadra. shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa brgyad stong pa’i bshad pa mngon par rtogs pa’i rgyan gyi snang ba, (Aṣṭa­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā-vyākhyānābhi­samayālaṃkārālokā) [“Illumination of the Abhisamayālaṃkāra”]. Toh 3791, Degé Tengyur vol. 85 (shes phyin, cha), folios 1b–341a.
sa bcu pa sangs rgyas phal po che zhes bya ba las, sa bcu’i le’u ste, sum cu rtsa gcig pa’o (sa bcu pa’i mdo) (Daśa­bhūmika­sūtra) [“The Ten Bhūmis”]. Toh 44-31, Degé Kangyur vol. 36 (phal chen, kha), folios 166.a–283.a. English translation in Roberts 2021.
snying po mchog Ratnākaraśānti. ’phags pa shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa brgyad stong pa’i dka’ ’grel snying po mchog. (Sāratamā) [“Quintessence”]. Toh 3803, Degé Tengyur vol. 89 (shes phyin, tha), folios 1b–230a.
ŚsPK Śata­sāhasrikā­prajña­paramitā. Edited by Takayasu Kimura. Tokyo: Sankibo Busshorin 2009 (II-1), 2010 (II-2, II-3), 2014 (II-4). Available online (input by Klaus Wille, Göttingen) at GRETIL.
ŚsPN3 Śata­sāhasrikā­prajña­paramitā NGMPP A 115/3, NAK Accession Number 3/632. Numbering of the scanned pages.
ŚsPN4 Śata­sāhasrikā­prajña­paramitā NGMPP B 91/3, NAK Accession Number 3/633. Numbering of the scanned pages.
ŚsPN4/2 Śata­sāhasrikā­prajña­paramitā NGMPP B 91/3, NAK Accession Number 3/633 (part two). Numbering of the scanned pages.
’bum shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa stong phrag brgya pa (Śata­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā) [Perfection of Wisdom in One Hundred Thousand Lines]. Toh 8, Degé Kangyur vols. 14–25 (shes phyin, ’bum, ka–a). Citations are from the 1976–79 Karmapae chodhey gyalwae sungrab partun khang edition, first the Tib. vol. letter in italics, followed by the folio and line number. English translation in Sparham 2024.
n.

Notes

n.­1
Degé Tengyur vol. 213 (dkar chag, shrI), F.432b–433a. The four great “pathbreaker” traditions of interpretation (shing rta chen po’i srol bzhi or shing rta’i srol ’byed bzhi) are: (1) the Ornament for the Clear Realizations and all the commentaries based on it, (2) the Madhyamaka “corpus based on reasoning” (dbu ma rig pa’i tshogs, i.e. Nāgārjuna’s writings categorized as the Yuktikāya and by extension the Madhyamaka treatises in general), (3) the two Bṛhaṭṭīka commentaries discussed here, and (4) Dignāga’s Prajñāpāramitā­saṃgraha­kārikā (Toh 3809, also known as the Piṇḍārtha­saṃgraha), said to be characterized by its thirty-two topics, and its subcommentary the Prajñāpāramitā­saṃgraha­kārikā­vivaraṇa (Toh 3810).
n.­2
Denkarma, folio 305.a.6; see also Herrmann-Pfandt, pp. 293-294, no. 515. Phangthangma 2003, p. 35. The only substantial difference in the titles, as with so many canonical texts, is that “noble” is added as an honorific in present editions of the Tibetan canon.
n.­3
Among modern writers, Lama Chimpa and Alaka Chattopadhyaya (1997), Kazuo Kano and Xuezhu Li (2012, 2014), and Karl Brunnhölzl (2011b) use the title Bṛhaṭṭīkā.
n.­4
Abhisamayālaṅkārāloka (Toh 3791), Degé Tengyur vol. 85 F.2.a.
n.­5
Bhagavaty­āmnāyānusāriṇī­nāma­vyākhyā (bcom ldan ’das ma’i man ngag gi rjes su ’brang ba zhes bya ba’i rnam par bshad pa), Toh 3811.
n.­6
shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa ’bum pa rgya cher ’grel pa.
n.­7
’di yi gzhung ’grel gnod ’joms bya bar ’dod.
n.­8
One may understand the verse as follows: “Having reverently (gus par, ādārāt) bowed (phyag ’tshal te, namaskṛ) to the Mother of Victors (rgyal ba’i yum, jinajananī), the foremost perfection (pha rol phyin pa’i gtso, pāramitāgrā) in the form of wisdom (shes rab bdag nyid, prajñātmakā), I want to make (bya bar ’dod, cikīrṣitā) a Path (gzhung ’grel, paddhati) there on which the Thorns Have Been Trodden Down (gnod ’joms, marditakaṇṭakā) so the later scriptures (bla ma’i lung, uttarāgama) will be of benefit to me (bdag la phan pa’i phyir, ātmahitāya).” Alternative translation of the last part: “because the tradition of the gurus (bla ma’i lung, gurvāgama) has been of benefit to me (bdag la phan pa’i phyir, ātmahitāt).”
n.­9
In their translation of Tāranātha’s History, Lama Chimpa and Alaka Chattopadhyaya (1997: p. 268) say, “Daṃstrāsena (mche ba’i sde) lived during the time of Devapāla [i.e. late eighth, early ninth century],” and in an additional note (1997: p. 417, n. 54) say he is the author of both Bṭ3 and Bṭ1 and that his “name occurs in various forms: ācārya Diṣṭasena, Daṃṣṭasena, Daṃṣṭasyana, etc.”
n.­10
See Skilling 2000 pp. 297–299.
n.­11
Abhisamayālaṅkārāloka (Toh 3791), Degé Tengyur vol. 85 F.2.a.
n.­12
Denkarma, folio 305.a, and Phangthangma 2003, p. 35 (for Bṭ3) and 54 (for Bṭ1); see also Herrmann-Pfandt, pp. 293-294, nos. 514 (Bṭ1) and 515 (Bṭ3).
n.­13
mngon rtogs rgyan gyi ’grel pa rnam ’byed, 294; 300.
n.­14
’grel bshad shes rab mchog gi rgyan, 1–2.
n.­15
bstan pa rgyas pa rgyan gyi nyi ’od, 24a3–4: ’bum nyi khri brgyad [sic] stong pa’i rgya cher bshad pa slob dpon dbyig gnyen gyis mdzad pa; 72a6–72b1: nyi khri gzhung ’grel dang… bod kyis rgya gar ba la kha ’phangs pa yod; 75a1: dpal lha btsan po khri srong lde btsan gyis ’bum gyi rgya cher ’grel pa. See also Schaeffer and Van der Kuijp, 2009, pp 154, 258, and 263 respectively.
n.­16
38b: “rgyal ba’i yum stong phrag brgya pa’i ’grel pa chen po slob dpon mche ba’i sdes mdzad par grags pa… rgyal ba’i yum stong phrag brgya pa dang/ nyi khri lnga stong pa dang/ khri brgyad stong pa rnams kyi gzhung gi ’grel pa slob dpon chen po dbyig gnyen gyis mdzad pa.”
n.­17
Butön History of Buddhism 156a7: “’di daM STa se nas byas zer ba mang mod kyi ’di ni dbyig gnyen gyi gzhung ’grel yin te thub pa dgongs rgyan la sogs par nyi khri gzhung ’grel las drangs pa’i tshig rnams der ji lta ba bzhin snang ba’i phyir dang / dbur yang / ’di yig gzhung ’grel gnod ’joms bya bar ’dod/ ces ’byung ba’i phyir ro.”
n.­18
Muni­matālaṃkāra, Degé Tengyur vol. 109 (dbu ma, a), 184a2–4 slob dpon dbyig gnyen gyis kyang gzhung ’grel du go cha chen po bgos pa zhes pa ni sems dang po bskyed pa nas bzung nas bsam pa rgya che bar bstan pa’o. The words cited and then glossed by Abhayākaragupta are found at khri brgyad 13.­2.
n.­19
Muni­matālaṃkāra, Degé Tengyur vol. 109 (dbu ma, a), 216a
n.­20
Kano and Li 2014, 130–31 [15–16] et passim.
n.­21
Bhagavaty­āmnāyānusāriṇī­nāma­vyākhyā (bcom ldan ’das ma’i man ngag gi rjes su ’brang ba zhes bya ba’i rnam par bshad pa), Toh 3811, 316b–317b.
n.­22
shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa’i don mngon par rtogs pa’i rgyan gyi tshig le’ur byas pa’i ’grel pa mdo lugs ma, 2011 vol. 4, 2–3 rgyal ba byams pa’i dngos slob shing rta chen po slob dpon dbu ma pa dbyig gnyen gyi zhal snga nas kyang / ’bum pa dang / nyi khri lnga stong pa dang / khri brgyad stong pa ste /yum rgyas ’bring bsdus pa gsum gyi gzhung ’grel gnod ’joms; 20, mdo sde rgyan gyi ’grel par slob dpon dbu ma pa chen po dbyig gnyen.
n.­23
bzhed tshul rba rlabs kyi phreng ba, 167.3–168.3, spyir bshad pa dang / byed brag bstan bcos ’di ji ltar bkrol ba’i tshul gnyis las/ dang po la/ bod lnga rabs kyi dge ba’i bshes gnyen phal mo che ni/ dngos bstan stong nyid kyi rim pa gsal bar ston pa dbu ma rigs pa’i tshogs/ sbas don mngon rtogs kyi rim pa gsal bar ston pa mngon par rtogs pa’i rgyan/ sgo gsum rnam grangs bcu gcig gi sgo nas yum gyi don ston pa gnod ’joms/ yang gtso bo’i don sum cu rtsa gnyis su brgyad stong pa’i don bsdus nas ston pa brgyad stong don bsdus te/ shing rta’i srol ’byed chen po bzhi yin zer to // chos rje thams cad mkhyen pas ni/ bzhi yin zhes smra ba ni mi ’thad de/ snga ma gnyis las srol ’byed gzhan min pa’i phyir zhes gsung / gsung ’di la brten nas gung TIk tu/ ’grel byed gzhan gnyis kyang de gnyis kyi rjes su ’brang ba’i phyir/ zhes bris pa ni rtsing po ste/ snga ma gnyis kyis dbu mar bkrol la/ phyi ma gnyis kyis sems tsam du bkrol ba’i phyir ro // ’di la bu ston rin po che na re/ stong phrag brgyad pa’i bshad pa bam po bdun cu rtsa brgyad pa ’di/ ’phang thang ka me dkar [emend chug to] chag tu khri srong lde btsan gyis byas par bris mod/ ’ching phu’i dkar chag dang / pho brang stong thang ldan dkar gyi dkar chag dang gnyis su/ rgya gar mar bshad pas dpa’ sdes mdzad pa yin no/ yum gsum ga’i gnod ’joms su grags pa bam po nyi shu rtsa bdun pa ’di la dpa’ bos byas par bris mod/ ’di ni dbyig gnyen gyis mdzad pa’i gzhung ’grel yin te/ thub dgongs su/ gzhung ’grel gyi lung drangs pa rnams ji lta ba bzhin ’dir snang ba’i phyir dang / ’di’i gzhung ’grel gnod ’joms bya bar ’dod/ ces brtoms par dam bca’ mdzad pa’i phyir/ ’di la yum gsum gnod ’joms su grags kyang / rgyas ’bring gnyis dang / khri brgyad stong pa’i bshad pa yin no zhes gsung.
n.­24
Nattier 1999; see also Yuyama 1992 and Harrison 2006, p. 144, n. 40. The passage is found at khri brgyad 39.­77, ’bum ta 58a6, and nyi khri 30.­65.
n.­25
In a note, Jens Braarvig (vol. 2, 587–89) cites the passage from Vasubandhu’s Akṣaya­mati­nirdeśa­ṭīkā, ’phags pa blo gros mi zad pas bstan pa rgya cher ’grel pa, Degé Tengyur (mdo ’grel, ci), 268r4–269r3 and provides an excellent translation.
n.­26
Degé Tengyur dkar chag 432.a: ’di la kun mkhyen bus kha cig daM StrA se nas mdzad zer mod kyi/ slob dpon dbyig gnyen gyis mdzad pa’i gzhung gi ’grel par bzhed pa nyid ’thad par rtogs. Note also that this passage was not only present in the other seventeenth and eighteenth century Tengyurs but had been witnessed in the original, early Narthang (fourteenth century).
n.­27
For example, Tāranātha’s History notes the existence of an Abhidharma scholar named Vasubandhu, a contemporary of Līlāvajra during the Pāla period (Lama Chimpa and Alaka Chattopadhyaya 1997: p. 271).
n.­28
For more detail and further references, see Ruegg 1969 La Théorie p. 325 et seq.; Hookham 1991 pp. 149–54; and Brunnhölzl 2010 pp. 692–4 n99.
n.­29
See outline of Bṭ3 in the appendix.
n.­30
See Peter Alan Roberts, trans., The Ten Bhumis Toh 44-31, (84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2021).
n.­31
See Peter Alan Roberts, trans., The White Lotus of the Good Dharma Toh 113, (84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2018).
n.­32
See Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans., The Questions of Sāgaramati, Toh 152, (84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2020).
n.­33
khri brgyad 83.­1 and nyi khri 72.­1.
n.­34
Here “nature” renders the Skt svabhāva.
n.­35
David Fiordalis and Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans., The Secrets of the Realized Ones , Toh 47 (84000: Translating the Words of the
 Buddha, 2023).
n.­36
These are the three questions at 19.­2 in the Eighteen Thousand and the first paragraph of chapter 11 in the Twenty-Five Thousand and One Hundred Thousand.
n.­38
We first began translating Bṭ3, making notes of the differences with The Long Commentary on the One Hundred Thousand (Bṭ1), with the idea of possibly identifying an early Tibetan version of a Long Perfection of Wisdom scripture. We mistakenly thought that by carefully comparing the citations in Bṭ3 with the late Stefano Zacchetti’s Sanskrit edition of the beginning of a Long Perfection of Wisdom scripture, we would find a more authentic original version to translate. We came to realize that the Degé edition was as authentic as any other.
n.­39
The translators have inserted into the text here the notation bam po dang po (the “first bam po,” or bundle of pages equal to about 300 lines of original text), together with their own homage.
n.­40
Alternatively, bdag la phan pa’i phyir could be rendered “In order that the tradition of the gurus will be of benefit to me.”
n.­41
Alternatively, chos kyi tshogs renders dharmakāya (“dharma body”).
n.­42
Below, Bṭ3 4.­1184 cites the work from which this is an extract as de bzhin gshegs pa’i gsang ba’i mdo (Tathāgata­guhyaka­sūtra) [Secrets of the Tathāgatas Sūtra]. This would appear to be Toh 47, de bzhin gshegs pa’i gsang ba bsam gyis mi khyab pa bstan pa (Tathāgatācintya­guhya­nirdeśa) [The Secrets of the Realized Ones]. This citation is found in the Degé Kangyur (dkon brtsegs, ka), F.142.a–142.b.
n.­43
I have used “recite” in place of the Tib yang dag par sdud pa (“gather”) in order to convey the meaning of gīti in the Skt saṃgīti.
n.­44
Tathāgatācintya­guhya­nirdeśa, Degé Kangyur (dkon brtsegs, ka), F.132.b–133.a.
n.­45
By design or accident, the subsequent few sentences in the Tathāgatācintya­guhya­nirdeśa, Degé Kangyur (dkon brtsegs, ka), F.133.a, have been omitted from this citation: “They think, ‘We have comprehended the doctrine of the Tathāgata.’ In regard to that, furthermore, the Tathāgata is without thought construction and remains in a state of equanimity. Śāntamati, sounds are not produced from the Tathāgata’s teeth, lips, palate, or tongue and yet sounds sound forth.” bdag cag ni de bzhin gshegs pa’i chos bstan pa kun shes so snyam mo/ /de la yang de bzhin gshegs pa ni rnam par mi rtog cing btang snyoms su mdzad do// zhi ba’i blo gros/ de bzhin gshegs pa’i tshems dang / sgros dang / zhal gyi rkan dang / ljags dang / zhal gyi sgo nas sgra ’byung ba yang med la/ ’byung bar yang grag go.
n.­46
That is, in what, to them, appear different places and different periods of time.
n.­47
That is, he remains deep in meditation while yet pervading the scene with his benevolent presence.
n.­48
Again, chos kyi tshogs may be rendered dharmakāya (“dharma body”).
n.­49
Alternatively, this might be from ara (“spoke”) and han, where the spokes are the twelve links of dependent origination that constitute the beginning and end of suffering existence (Ñāṇamoli, VII,23).
n.­50
nyon mongs (kleśa) is rendered “affliction” and “afflictive emotion”; kun nas nyon mongs pa (saṃkliṣṭa) “defilement.” Both are from the root kliś, “to cause pain.” The categories taught by a tathāgata that together make up an exhaustive and complete explanation of suffering and the release from suffering are called dharmas. The list of good and bad dharmas starting with form is divided up into saṃkliṣṭa (“defilement”) and vyavadāna (“purification”). The defilement dharmas are here divided into four: karma, affliction, aggregates, and birth.
n.­51
These are the twelve links of dependent origination that constitute the beginning and end of suffering existence.
n.­52
Either “when feeling stops, craving and appropriation stop” is obvious, or else a line has dropped out of the text here.
n.­53
That is, volitional factors.
n.­54
That is, ignorance.
n.­55
That is, the five aggregates.
n.­56
That is, appropriation and existence.
n.­57
That is, the absence of volitional factors.
n.­58
That is, the absence of afflictions.
n.­59
That is, nirvāṇa.
n.­60
That is, the absence of aggregates.
n.­61
D bzhugs pa (perhaps a play on the similarity between the roots vaś (“to control”) and vas (“to dwell”)); K, N zhugs pa.
n.­62
If understood as a passive this should be rendered “they are controlled by wisdom.”
n.­63
The emendation of srid pa to sred pa is corroborated by Haribhadra (Wogihara 9.13).
n.­64
This is in the Tib translation of Ratnākaraśānti’s Sāratamā (Seton, Appendix II, 24.23) but not in Jaini (1972).
n.­65
Emend ’tshe to ’tsho.
n.­66
Mvy, s.v. shes pa brda sprod par byed pa, ājñāvyākāraṇa.
n.­67
They have gained one of the stages in the development of calm abiding and special insight.
n.­68
The same gloss is in both Haribhadra (Wogihara, 9.24) and Ratnākaraśānti (Seton, Appendix I, 34).
n.­69
The Abhidharmakośa 4.41–45 explains the nine fetters (samyojana).
n.­70
This translation is taken from MDPL 415, s.v. samyagājñāsuvimukta­citta. More literally yang dag par (samyak), “perfect”; (kun) shes pa (ājñā), “fully understand”; and sems (citta), “thought” or “mind.”
n.­71
Ratnākaraśānti’s Sāratamā, Degé Tengyur (shes phyin, tha), 10b3 (cf. Seton, Appendix I, 36) takes cetovaśin as the mind through which there is mastery of all meditative stabilizations; sarvacetovaśin as a karmadhāriya compound, “all minds through which there is mastery of all meditative stabilizations”; paramapāram (dam pa’i pha rol, “the farther shore that is the farthest,” “perfection”) as their limit; and the i [in itā] as “gone”; hence paramapāramitā: “because they have gone and are in a state that has gone to the limit of mental mastery.”
n.­72
These are the four concentrations (dhyāna) and four formless absorptions (ārūpya­samāpatti), and the cessation of perception and feeling (saṃjñāvedayita­nirodha).
n.­73
Emend D sems can to K, N sems.
n.­74
The translation “object” for dmigs pa and “factor” for yan lag is taken from the Path of Purification (Ñāṇamoli, XII, 2–12).
n.­75
This is a summary of meditative states. The branches of the concentrations are given below (khri brgyad 16.­71), as well as the objects of the formless absorptions (khri brgyad 16.­76), and the siṃha­vijṛṃbhita and viṣkandaka meditative stabilizations (khri brgyad 3.­75, cf. n.­79). Abhidharmakośa 6.42a ff. Pruden (975 ff.) gives the non-Great Vehicle explanation of combination meditation. Abhi­samayālaṃkāra 5.22–23 (Amano, pp. 92–93) gives the Great Vehicle explanation. Sparham (2008–13, vol. 4, pp. 81–92) provides a detailed investigation of both. The word for “combination” here, spel ma (miśraka), renders ākīryate at Abhidharmakośa 6.42a.
n.­76
Emend D sems can to K, N sems.
n.­77
This division of bodhisattvas is also in Daśabalaśrīmitra’s Saṃskṛtāsaṃskṛta­viniścaya, Degé Tengyur (dbu ma, ha), 166b7.
n.­78
These are the bodhisattvas on the niyata­caryābhūmi (“course of conduct level of those who are destined or certain [to be awakened]”) explained below (1.­98). Lamotte (Mppś English, III, p. 1230 n. 584) gives a number of references to its usage. In general, the niyata (“certain,” “of those who are destined”) level means assured of awakening, but etymologically it is also where the bodhisattva enters into the niyāma/nyāma (skyon med pa, literally “faultlessness”), “the fixed state of a bodhisattva”; MDPL “bodhisattva’s distinctive way of salvation.”
n.­79
The gzhi here probably renders ādhāra, as below as a dual ādhāraṇī (perhaps referencing wisdom and method), providing a creative explanation, a traditional etymology for dhāraṇī.
n.­80
There is a passage similar to this in Mañjuśrīkīrti’s Samādhi­rāja­sūtra­ṭīkā­kīrti­mālā, Degé Tengyur (mdo ’grel, nyi), 3b3 ff. Tāranātha (Chimpa and Chattopadhyaya, p. 268) says Mañjuśrīkīrti and Daṃṣṭrāsena were contemporaries during the time of Dharmapāla; Régamey (1990, p. 22) says Mañjuśrīkīrti embraces the trisvabhāva (“three natures”) doctrine, a doctrine evident in the Bṭ3.
n.­81
Here “purification” renders yongs su sbyong ba; MDPL, s.v. parikarma (“preparation”). The Ten Bhūmis systematically renders pariśodhana by yongs su sbyong ba.
n.­82
dran pa is sometimes, for example in “applications of mindfulness,” rendered “mindfulness.”
n.­83
Akṣaya­mati­nirdeśa (Braarvig, chapter 5 ff.) The title below (Bṭ3 4.­101) is blo gros mi zad pa’i mdo (Akṣaya­mati­sūtra). See Jens Braarvig and David Welsh, trans., The Teaching of Akṣayamati, Toh 175 (84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2020). It is also called the Akṣaya­mati­paripṛcchā (“The Questions of Akṣayamati”).
n.­84
Gilgit 351.1–2 tatra katamāni dhāraṇīmukhāni yad utākṣarasamatā bhāṣyasamatā akṣaramukham akṣarapraveśaḥ. “What are the dhāraṇī doors, that is to say, the sameness of syllables, the sameness of spoken words, a syllable door, and a syllable entrance?” ’bum 9.­70 (Ghoṣa 1450); nyi khri 9.­44; khri brgyad 16.­98 differs slightly as does PSP 1-2:85; LSPW pp. 211–12. Cf. the explanation below (Bṭ3 4.­1034).
n.­85
Alternatively, byin gyis rlob pa’i shes pa de nyid… means “just [those letters] over which the sustaining power of the knowledge has been exerted are secret mantra dhāraṇī. ”
n.­86
Cf. the Ornament for the Mahāyāna Sūtras (Mahā­yāna­sūtrālaṃkāra) 18.71–73, “Dhāraṇī is from result, habituation to listening, and also meditative stabilization. It is limited and big, and the big is of three sorts.”
n.­87
Emend D bstan to brtan. This elliptical statement is probably based on the Mahā­yāna­sūtrā­laṃkāra’s subdivision of dhāraṇīs contingent on small, middling, and big meditative stabilization.
n.­88
See Roberts 2021b, i.­38.
n.­89
Cf. Distinguishing the Middle from the Extremes (Madhyānta­vibhāga) 2.14–16 (Obermiller 1932–33, p. 53; Sparham 2008–13, vol. 1, pp. 438–40).
n.­90
“Elaboration” (spros pa, prapañca) does not have a single meaning. Nāgārjuna’s Treatise on the Middle Way (Mūla­madhyamaka­kārikā) (de Jong edition), verse 18.5, is helpful: karma­kleśa­kṣayān mokṣaḥ karmakleśā vikalpataḥ / te prapañcāt prapañcas tu śūnyatāyāṃ nirudhyate: “Freedom is from the karma and afflictive emotion coming to an end; karma and afflictive emotion are from thought construction; that is from elaboration. As for elaboration, it is stopped in emptiness.”)
n.­91
The Ten Bhūmis, 1.­439 (Roberts 2021b); “The bodhisattva who has completed the path of the fifth bodhisattva bhūmi enters the sixth bodhisattva bhūmi. He enters it through the ten kinds of sameness of phenomena. What are these ten? He enters the sixth bhūmi through these ten kinds of sameness: (1) the sameness of all phenomena in being without features; (2) the sameness of all phenomena in being without characteristics; (3) the sameness of all phenomena in being without birth; (4) the sameness of all phenomena in being without production; (5) the sameness of all phenomena in being isolated; (6) the sameness of all phenomena in being primordially pure; (7) the sameness of all phenomena in being without elaboration; (8) the sameness of all phenomena being without adoption and without rejection; (9) the sameness of all phenomena in being like illusions, dreams, hallucinations, echoes, the moon on water, reflections, and apparitions; and (10) the sameness of all phenomena being without the duality of existence and nonexistence.” (see also Rahder, p. 46; Honda, p. 186.) This is explained in Vasubandhu’s Explanation of The Ten Bhūmis (Ārya­daśa­bhūmi­vyākhyāna) ’phags pa sa bcu pa’i rnam par bshad pa, 196a7 ff. The Level of a Bodhisattva (Bodhi­sattva­bhūmi) rnal ’byor spyod pa’i sa las byang chub sems dpa’i sa, 178a4 ff. has dngos po yod pa dang dngos po med pa gnyis su med pa for the tenth sameness. Sthiramati in his Explanation of the Commentary on the Ornament for the Mahāyāna Sūtras (Sūtrālaṃkāra­vṛtti­bhāṣya), mdo sde rgyan gyi ’grel bshad, tsi, 249a7 ff. has chos thams cad dngos po yod pa dang dngos po med pa dang gnyi ga ma yin pa for the last of the ten, “[not] existent, nonexistent, [both, or neither].”
n.­92
That is, all are the same insofar as they are without causal signs that make them known.
n.­93
pariniṣpanna (“thoroughly established”) also has the sense of “the final outcome.” All phenomena, seen from the perspective of their final outcome, are the same insofar as they are not produced and have no origin.
n.­94
That is to say, all phenomena are the same insofar as they are isolated from, or do not have, a causal sign that makes them the object of afflictions like greed and so on, the actions motivated by those, or the birth that comes about because of those.
n.­95
Alternatively, “Those imaginaries are not in their intrinsic nature in the form of the two basic [dependent and thoroughly established] natures.”
n.­96
Explanation of The Ten Bhūmis, 205a2–206a4.
n.­97
Explanation of The Ten Bhūmis, 196a7 ff.
n.­98
Explanation of The Ten Bhūmis, 197a1–2: rjes su mthun pa zhes bya ba ni de ma thob bo zhes bya ba’i tshig gis na mi skye ba’i chos la bzod pa’i sgo dang mthun pa ste. The point here is that at the sixth bodhisattva level the knowledge is not yet the forbearance for dharmas that are not produced, which is developed at the eighth level.
n.­99
See Mppś English, IV, 1486 ff. for a detailed explanation of the clairvoyances.
n.­100
Emend khyab to ’khyam (“[the wind] blowing here and there”)?
n.­101
This translation of gzugs thams cad lus kyi nang du zhugs pa is a conjecture. Alternatively, “swallowing anything of any size or shape,” “[become so big] all physical things end up inside the body.”
n.­102
On vaiḍūrya (bai ḍūrya), variously rendered as “beryl,” “lapis,” or “crystal,” see under entry “Crystal, rock” in Encyclopaedia Iranica.
n.­103
The order of epithets here follows khri brgyad 1.­2, and the le’u brgyad ma. This epithet (akṣaya­nirdeśa­pratisaṃvinnaya­pratividdhaiḥ mahābhijñāvikrīḍitair) is omitted from Z, nyi khri, and ’bum.
n.­104
gzung ba’i tshig dang ldan, ādeyavacana. This is also rendered in Tib as mnyan par ’os pa’i tshig dang ldan. Besides “acceptable speech” (LSPW), other translations (listed by Z) are “their words were gentle,” “were necessarily to be believed,” and “pleasing, agreeable speech.”
n.­105
Our author here does not give any explanation of akusīda (“not lazy”), which is not in khri brgyad but in nyi khri 1.­3 (ka 2a4–5): le lo med cing brtson ’grus brtsam pa.
n.­106
The perfection of morality is a defining second bodhisattva (Vimalā) level practice.
n.­107
The Level of a Bodhisattva, vihārapatala, 180a3 ff. reads: “In this seventh state they cause all distinct attributes of a buddha to come forth and complete the branches of awakening because this state incorporates the completion of the bodhisattva’s preparation deeds, and leads gradually into the purity of knowledge, clairvoyance, and deeds in the eighth state. Thus, this bodhisattva enters immediately after this state into the eighth purified state. This state is absolutely purified. Those seven, however, are mixed. [This seventh] is said to be unafflicted because it precedes the purified state, and they are said to have fallen into a mass of affliction because they have not reached it. Therefore, in this state all afflictions, lust and so on, are eliminated. You should know that [this seventh] is neither with affliction nor without affliction. But because it is not fully arisen, it is intent on buddha knowledge.” āsmin punaḥ saptame vihāre sarva­buddha­dharma­samutthāpanatayā bodhaṅgāni paripūryante bodhi­sattva­prāyogika-caryā­paripūri­saṁgrahādasya vihārasya jñānābhijñācaryā­viśuddhāṣṭama-vihārākramaṇācca| tathā hi sa bodhisattvo’sya vihārasyānantaramaṣṭamaṁ viśuddhaṁ vihāraṁ praviśati| sa ca vihāra ekāntaviśuddhaḥ | ime tu sapta vihārā vyāmiśrāḥ| viśuddha­vihāra­pūrvaṅgamatvādasaṁkliṣṭaḥ | tada­saṁprāptatvātsaṁkliṣṭa­caya­patitā vaktavyāḥ | tasmādasmin vihāre sarve rāgādipramukhāḥ kleśāḥ prahīyante| sa ca na saṁkleśo na niḥkleśo veditavyaḥ asamudācārād buddha­jñānābhilāṣāc ca. Cf. Sāgaramegha’s Commentary (Bodhi­sattva­bhūmi­vyākhyā) byang chub sems dpa’i sa’i rnam par bshad pa, 293a3 ff.
n.­108
Āryavimuktisena’s Commentary (Sparham 2006–12, vol. 1, p. 23 ff.) has an excellent explanation of “hypocrisy, fawning, hinting, and pressuring,” which are four ways monks pursue a wrong livelihood.
n.­109
khe (phala, lābha) means a profit, but shes kyi khe (jñāna?), which I have understood to mean “reputation(?),” is also the reading at khri brgyad 1.­2 (ka 2a3). However, PSP 1-1:1 apagata­jñātralābha­citta and Z (citing Vetter) jñātilābha (“profit for their kinsmen”) suggest shes should be emended to bshes (“friend”): “no thought of profit and gain for their kinsmen.” Cf. Mvy shes kyi khe ’dod pa for jñānakāma(?) and the more straightforward reading grags pa dang / khe dang bkur sti’i sems pa med pa (“without thoughts of fame, reputation, or respect”) at this point in ’bum, nyi khri, le’u brgyad ma, and Bṭ1.
n.­110
Emend zang zing med pa’i phyir sems kyis chos ston pa to zang zing med pa’i sems kyis chos ston pa (’bum ka 2a4, nyi khri ka 2a5, le’u brgyad ma ga 2b3, and Bṭ1); PSP 1-1:1 nirāmiṣa­dharma­deśakair.
n.­111
The Ten Bhūmis, 1.­608–1.­609 (Roberts 2021b); Rahder, 8 B–C; Honda, pp. 217–18.
n.­112
Explanation of The Ten Bhūmis, 219b1, says that the eighth level has seven deep stations. The first three are zab mo ring ba’i ye shes (because it is far from the earlier levels), tha mi dad pa (with the purity of all the levels above it), and without causal signs (because it is without subject-object duality). Emend dga’ ba to dka’ ba (The Ten Bhūmis, S [mdo sde, ga], 104b1).
n.­113
The four fearlessnesses (mi ’jigs pa, vaiśaradhya) are the confidence to make the declaration, “I am a buddha”; the declaration that “greed and so on are obstacles to awakening”; the confidence to explain “bodhisattvas go forth on the paths of all-knowledge and so on”; and the declaration, “the outflows are extinguished.”
n.­114
K ’dzem pa med pa.
n.­115
khri brgyad 1.­2 (ka 2a4), a literal rendering of PSP dharma­pravicaya­vibhakti­nirdeśa­kuśala. ’bum, nyi khri, and le’u brgyad ma have chos rab tu rtogs pas rnam par dbye zhing bstan pa la mkhas pa (“having realized it well, skillful in sorting out and teaching the Dharma”), which makes better sense. Missing here from the list of epithets are ’bum and nyi khri’s las dang nyon mongs ba dang/ phyir rgol ba rab tu bcom pa/ pha rol po’i rgol ba thams cad kyis zil gyis mi non pa/ nyan thos dang rang sangs rgyas thams cad kyis rtogs par dka’ ba.
n.­116
’chags pa is an alternative form, or misprint, for ’jags pa; bod rgya tshigs mdzod chen mo 683, s.v ’jags pa, 3 ’pho ’gyur med pa.
n.­117
Here rnam par dbye ba renders vibhakti. It means both “analysis” and “category.”
n.­118
The levels of those who are destined (nges pa’i sa, niyatabhūmi) locate the fourth of the five-part division of bodhisattvas given earlier (Bṭ3 1.­42).
n.­119
Z: “for innumerable kalpas, they had been carrying out they (sic) vows with energy”; LSPW: “who had formed their vows incalculable aeons ago”; Vetter, p. 71: “their vows well activated during innumerable Kalpas.”
n.­120
“Name and form” (nāmarūpa) is another way of saying “five aggregates.” The “form” aggregate is “form” and the other four aggregates are “name.” Therefore, “body of names” refers collectively to the four “name” aggregates.
n.­121
A “maturation” (vipāka) here is the result, that is to say, the life they otherwise would not take up because they have entered nirvāṇa.
n.­122
The maturation (vipāka) here is the ordinary forms of life they appear to be living.
n.­123
This is the fourth of the earlier (1.­42) five-part division of bodhisattvas.
n.­124
K, N.
n.­125
On the number asaṃkhyeya (“incalculable”) see Abhidharmakośa 3.93; asaṃkhyeya and other specific, extremely large numbers that have separate values and are not actually synonymous with “infinite” are left untranslated in contexts where the difference between them is a salient factor.
n.­126
Emend bsdu ba to bsu ba, corroborated by Bṭ1, na 11a7.
n.­127
Honda, p. 227 O, does not have the eleventh control, and indeed, it is likely not separate, but rather understood as qualifying all ten.
n.­128
The Ten Bhūmis, 1.­720–1.­721 (Roberts 2021b); Honda, pp. 244–45. ma ’dres pa (“unbroken”) renders asaṃbhinna. saṃbhinna­pralapa is “babbling on” or “having a loose mouth,” one of the ten unwholesome actions.
n.­129
Rahder, p. 9 Y asaṁkhyeya­śata­sahasrānugatenaiva svarāṅga-kauśalyena tāvad apramāṇānugatenaiva pratibhānavibhaktimukhena dharmaṁ deśayati; Honda, p. 248; cp. The Ten Bhūmis, 1.­723–1.­730 (Roberts 2021b).
n.­130
Z p. 249, n. 46, “assemblies [attended by] innumerable [people],” makes good sense; Vetter, p. 72, has “an endless assembly.”
n.­131
See previous notes n.­128 and n.­129.
n.­132
K.
n.­133
Reading K, N grang in place of D grags. The sense is that one will work for some, and another for others.
n.­134
Alternatively, “because some are driven by eight doubts.” The translators have used brtsal both as a form related to ’tshol, “to seek for” (Mvy vyavasāya, utkāśana), and as a form related to sel (Mvy paryudasta).
n.­135
Vetter and Z have sarva­sattva­citta­gati­sūkṣma­jñāna­caryādhimuktyavatāra­kuśala, “skilled in comprehending the states of mind, subtle knowledge, behavior, and attachment of all beings.”
n.­136
The sarva­sattva­citta­caritānugata means “subsequent realization of the minds and conduct of all beings” and dharma­dhātu­praveśa means “entry into the dharma-constituent,” (Rahder dharma­dhātu­vibhakti­praveśa; Honda, p. 259 10 B “entrance into the variety of the realm of ideas”).
n.­137
“Various” (nāna, sna tshogs) is part of the epithet in PSP and LSPW.
n.­138
This is not a literal translation. It utilizes Honda, p. 265 10 F; The Ten Bhūmis, 1.­819–1.­820 (Roberts 2021b); and Explanation of The Ten Bhūmis, 251a6 ff. to make the passage more accessible to the English-speaking reader.
n.­139
ye shes phra ba. The Ten Bhūmis 266a has phra ba la ’jug pa’i mkhyen pa, “knowledge that enters into the subtle”; Honda “knowledge entering into subtlety.”
n.­140
That is, in the Tuṣita heaven.
n.­141
That is, as Siddhārtha.
n.­142
The The Ten Bhūmis and Explanation of The Ten Bhūmis both have bltams pa. Its absence here in Bṭ3 is a copyist’s error.
n.­143
phra ba la ’jug pa’i mkhyen pa literally means “knowledge that enters into the subtle.” K, The Ten Bhūmis omit.
n.­144
That is, to live for eighty years.
n.­145
That is, by leaving relics to be enshrined in caityas.
n.­146
The two knowledges of the sarvasattvacittacaritānugata and dharmadhātupraveśa meditative stabilizations.
n.­147
Below it says, “that the Sūtra has described” (mdo las bshad pa’i stobs). The passage mirrors The Ten Bhūmis, 1.­650 (Roberts 2021b); Explanation of The Ten Bhūmis, 229a3; Rahder, p. 70; and Honda, pp. 28–29 8 P, though with significant differences. Abhayākaragupta’s Muni­matālaṃkāra, Degé Tengyur (dbu ma, a), 254b, and his Moonlight (Marmakaumudī), Degé Tengyur (shes phyin, da), 224b have almost exactly the same list, with reasons for each power. Both have yang dag par ’byor ba/yang dag par ’phel ba in place of mngon par shes pa (abhijñā) but give the same reason. Our author says there are ten powers even though he gives thirteen, adding ting nge ’dzin (samādhi), dbang po (indriya), and chos nyid (dharmatā) to The Ten Bhūmis list.
n.­148
This follows K, N sbyangs; D sa’i ye shes yongs su spyad pa’i phyir. Honda, p. 228, n. 86 renders mārgāvipravāsitatvāt as “because he does not part from the path,” but notes the different readings.
n.­149
The name means “endowed with the special consecration into the knowledge of omniscience.”
n.­150
This summarizes The Ten Bhūmis, 1.­811 ff. and 1.­795 (Roberts 2021b); Honda, p. 260 10 CD.
n.­151
This is a conjectural rendering of dar las chod pa tsam, “just a cut from the silk cloth.” If dar means “spread,” “just cut from the spreading.” Alternatively, it might mean “the mere being cut off [from anything that blocks omniscience] is greater than the increase [in anything that blocks it].”
n.­152
LSPW “skillful in teaching others the true character of reality.”
n.­153
The Ten Bhūmis, 1.­822 ff. (Roberts 2021b); Explanation of The Ten Bhūmis, 252a; Rahder p. 87, Honda p. 266 10 F.
n.­154
This is a literal translation. Rahder p. 87 F cintyācintya­loka­vijñeyāvijñeya; Honda p. 266 F “thinkable and unthinkable and cognizable and incognizable in the world.”
n.­155
K, N rnam pa thams cad mkhyen pa, “knowledge of all aspects.”
n.­156
LSPW “acquiring through their vows and their setting-out the endless harmonies of all the Buddha-fields”; Vetter “who had embraced the setting-out [in the Great Vehicle] by means of a vow [to contribute to] the marvellous arrangement of endless Buddhafields.”
n.­157
That is, a maturation as a tenth level bodhisattva.
n.­158
The ten powers (stobs, bala) are part of the list of purification dharmas (spelled out at khri brgyad 16.­81).
n.­159
The Ten Bhūmis, 1.­839–1.­848; Explanation of The Ten Bhūmis, 256a ff.; Rahder, pp. 90–91; Honda, pp. 270–71 10 I.
n.­160
D accidentally has this sentence twice.
n.­161
sems can gyi khams (The Ten Bhūmis, 270a7) is missing.
n.­162
Rahder has cittotpāde daśa­dikspharaṇam gacchati (sems bskyed pa re re la yang phyogs bcu khyab par ’gro ste). Honda renders this, “he goes to pervade the ten directions.” I think the idea is that the single production of the thought that begins the bodhisattva path is reduplicated an infinite number of times in the different directions; i.e., it is done for all, not just for one. With their production of the thought of awakening they make the ten directions vibrate.
n.­163
rlung gi dkyil ’khor; the “circle” of wind that underpins the unfolding of a new world system.
n.­164
That rides on the wind firmament, according to the traditional Buddhist cosmology referenced in this passage.
n.­165
Emend D ’jig to K ’jigs (uttrāsayati).
n.­166
This last sentence is slightly longer in Rahder’s edition.
n.­167
Edg, s.v. prajñapaya, “arrange” a seat; Jäschke s.v. shom, “prepare, arrange”; Z, citing Lamotte, says there is room for the interpretation “conjured up.”
n.­168
Bṭ1 “To teach that the Perfection of Wisdom is a unique discourse, to teach that it is rare, valuable, and worthy of worship and service, and to train the retinues.”
n.­169
gus par mdzad is a literal translation (tshig ’gyur) of ādṛ, which means both “to show respect” (as in ādāra) and “to focus the mind.”
n.­170
K, N don rnam pa gsum gyis, “three topics.”
n.­171
khri brgyad 1.­13; Z 371.3 punar yādṛśam bhagavataḥ prakṛtyātma­bhāvopadarśanaṃ tādṛśam iha trisāhasra­mahā­sāhasre lokadhātau upadarśayati sma. LSPW translates prakṛtyātma­bhāva as “his own natural body”; Z 267, n. 202 follows Lamotte’s translation “corps ordinaire,” which perfectly renders sku tha mal pa. The idea is that in his “ordinary” body as Śākyamuni he performs the following miracles.
n.­172
khri brgyad 1.­13.
n.­173
khri brgyad 1.­15. Z 372.8 has “Thereupon the Lord, seated on this very lion throne, again emitted light,” in place of “smiling.”
n.­174
This Tib is closer to, but not exactly the same as, nyi khri 1.­18. Here and elsewhere only the corresponding section in khri brgyad is noted.
n.­175
That is, through the remainder of the Introduction chapter, as the line that follows is the first line of the second chapter.
n.­176
Z 375; khri brgyad 2.­1.
n.­177
bkye is a future or result form of ’gyed (Bṭ1 dgyed), “to divide up, spread out.”
n.­178
A “creative explanation” (nirukti, nges tshig) derives a word not only in a strictly etymological way, but in a way that conveys the important points the speaker wants to convey.
n.­179
Abhidharmakośa 8.7–8, “In the first there are five branches (applied and sustained thought, joy, happiness, and meditative stabilization), in the second four (joy and so on, and serene confidence), in the third five (equanimity, recollection, introspection, happiness, and steadiness), and in the last four (neither happiness nor suffering, equanimity, recollection, and meditative stabilization).”
n.­180
Contra Mppś English, p. 350.
n.­181
The meaning is unclear. Bṭ1 na 17a6 says the first two of the four qualifications (“put, included, encompassed, and come to meet”) of the meditative stabilization convey that all meditative stabilizations are not different from the samādhirāja because they are nonconceptual and not moving, abiding as a one-pointed mind endowed with equanimity.
n.­182
It does so by saying that the light rays “pervaded the world systems in their entirety with a great illumination and lit them up,” and by saying that beings “saw that light” and were “touched by the illumination of those light rays.”
n.­183
The two types of work are illuminating world systems and helping beings.
n.­184
The corresponding passage here is, “Then the Lord, with the light from the natural splendor of a tathagata, pervaded the great billionfold world system with a great illumination.”
n.­185
The corresponding passage from the Sūtra (khri brgyad 1.­8) is, “Then the Lord, seated on that very lion throne, entered into the meditative stabilization called siṃhavikrīḍita. He enacted such a performance with his miraculous power that his performance of miraculous power shook the great billionfold world system in six ways: it shook, shook greatly, and shook violently; it quaked, quaked greatly, and quaked violently; it stirred, stirred greatly, and stirred violently; it became disturbed, greatly disturbed, and violently disturbed; it roared, roared greatly, and roared violently; and it resounded, resounded greatly, and resounded violently. At the edges it rose up and it sank down in the middle; in the middle it rose up and at the edges sank down. It became soft and oily, producing benefit and ease for all beings.”
n.­186
All the sūtras say six. I have retained the LSPW translations, based on Dutt, even if they do not quite fit Bṭ3’s glosses: kamp (g.yo), “shake”; cal (’gul), “stir”; vedh (ldeg), “quake.”
n.­187
As a gasp, for example.
n.­188
The author is playing on the meaning of udāna: “cries of delight” (ched du brjod pa, udāna); the upward-rising vital wind (rlung ched du ’byung ba, *udāna); caused to rise up (ched du ’byung ba, *udānayanti); and “cried out” (ched du brjod pa, udānayanti).
n.­189
That is, in the buddhafield.
n.­190
“Tīrthikas” renders mu stegs pa; khri brgyad “asura.”
n.­191
Both “ordinary” and “natural” render prakṛti.
n.­192
In the Mppś this is Chapter XV, Act XI.
n.­193
Alternatively, taking lhags as a verb of movement (Bṭ1 na 21b2 gshegs pa rnams), “take ‘at the very limit’ as the limit on account of those who travel to it.”
n.­194
In the English translation of khri brgyad, “stands, stays, and maintains” are abbreviated to “dwells and maintains.”
n.­195
This is the Degé reading; K omits ma: “because Ratnākara has passed into complete nirvāṇa.” The second part of the sentence literally says “he ‘stands’ on the life-faculty continuum.”
n.­196
LSPW, p. 42 “candidates to Buddhahood.”
n.­197
That is, why do they make offerings to and inquire about the health of other buddhas?
n.­198
That is, in the quality and integrity of beings.
n.­199
antaḥ/antara-kalpa. Edg, s.v. antara-kalpa, following la Vallée Poussin, says an antaḥkalpa makes up or defines a kalpa; it is not between two of them.
n.­200
That is, in which nothing can grow.
n.­201
K gos; D omits.
n.­202
The list of Tib words rendered into English as “respected” and so on is not consistent either here in Bṭ3 or in the different versions of the Sūtra. I have translated them consistently based on the assumption they render the same list of Skt verbs satkṛt, gurukṛt, mānaya, and pūjaya.
n.­203
Bṭ1 na 23a5 lists the conditions as clothing, merit from earlier good deeds, lodging, and medicine.
n.­204
This is the LSPW translation for laghūtthānatā rendered here by bskyod pa yang, and in Bṭ1 by zo mdog bde ba; D ’gres here is either an alternative spelling or mistake for the more usual bgres, “old age.”
n.­205
That is, the nine remaining directions from which bodhisattvas come to this world to see the Buddha Śākyamuni, as described in the remainder of the Sūtra’s first chapter.
n.­206
This translation takes brda phrad literally. Alternatively, “to understand what it is talking about” (brda sprod).
n.­207
This comes right after the Introduction chapter in khri brgyad. Our author includes it in his exposition of the Introduction chapter.
n.­208
Śāriputra, after all, is a śrāvaka, not a bodhisattva.
n.­209
Of reaching nirvāṇa.
n.­210
The welfare of all beings.
n.­211
The extract is either an abridgment or paraphrase of The White Lotus of the Good Dharma (Saddharma­puṇḍarika), Toh 113, 3.­29–3.­30 (Roberts 2018); Kern, 3.22.
n.­212
That is, from the start, either certain or not certain to reach awakening.
n.­213
Our author means that bodhisattvas in this lineage do not become worthy ones or pratyekabuddhas first; they have complete awakening in mind from the start, so it is not necessary to explain the different stages of attainment.
n.­214
The awakenings of śrāvakas, pratyekabuddhas, and bodhisattvas.
n.­215
Our author means that, unable to realize that all attainments are equally qualified as ultimately illusory, first they attain a nirvāṇa and with that the realization that it is not ultimately existent. It is the stream enterer level because it is the first attainment that is seen (dṛś) to be ultimately nonexistent, and hence to be transcended.
n.­216
The Skt Tanū means “slimmed down” or “refined.”
n.­217
Like the venerable Śāriputra.
n.­218
Again, like Śāriputra.
n.­219
This level is equivalent to the Pratyekabuddha level, the eighth in the scheme of ten levels that culminates in the Buddha level.
n.­220
The Skt for this is found in Abhayākaragupta’s Muni­matālaṃkāra (Kano and Li 2014, 130 [15]), te ca punarbhavāntara­grahaṇena bodhi­sattvacaryāṃ caranti | kathaṃ punarbhavaṃ gṛhṇanti | hetubalāt pratyayabalāc ca | tatra yā ’sāv aprahīṇa­kleśa­vāsanā sā pratyayaḥ | hetuḥ sāsrava­kuśala­mūla­hetukāni punarbhavagrāhakāṇy anāsravāṇi kuśalamūlāni.
n.­221
The Questions of Sāgaramati (Sāgara­mati­paripṛcchā), Toh 152, 10.­7–10.­9 (Dharmachakra 2020). Our author cites this same passage again in the conclusion (Bṭ3 6.­93), with slight changes. The Skt of the passage is found in Asaṅga’s Vyākhyā on Maitreya’s Mahā­yānottara­tantra­śāstra (Johnston 1950, 1.84); and in Abhayākaragupta’s Muni­matālaṃkāra (Kano and Li 2014, 130–131 [15–16]).
n.­222
Better is the reading below (6.­93): “in close contact with” (’dre, saṁśliṣyante) in place of “afflicted by” (nyon mongs pa, saṁkliṣyante) here.
n.­223
This follows K ’gre = D F.291.b4 ’dre; Skt “They connect (śleṣatayā, K) them to the three realms, but not because they afflict (kleṣatayā) their minds.” Here D khams gsum na nyon mongs pas, “They afflict (kśleṣatayā) the three realms.”
n.­224
Lion’s Roar of the Goddess Śrīmālā (Śrīmālā­devī­siṃha­nāda) ’phags pa lha mo dpal ’phreng gi seng ge’i sgra, Degé Kangyur (dkon brtsegs, cha), 266a. The Skt of the passage is found in Asaṅga’s Vyākhyā on Maitreya’s Mahā­yānottara­tantra­śāstra (Johnston 1950, 1.84).
n.­225
A “form of life” or “migration” (’gro ba, gati) is a state of rebirth while wandering in saṃsāra.
n.­226
Lion’s Roar of the Goddess Śrīmālā, 271b1. The Skt of the passage is found in Asaṅga’s Vyākhyā of Maitreya’s Mahā­yānottara­tantra­śāstra (Johnston 1950, 1.67).
n.­227
The Ten Dharmas (Daśa­dharmaka­sūtra) ’phags pa chos bcu pa zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo, (dkon brtsegs, kha), 287a1–287b4; cited in Jñānavajra’s Commentary (Ārya­laṅkāvatāra­nāma­mahā­yāna­sūtra­vṛtti­tathāgata-hṛdayālaṃkāra-nāma) on the The Sūtra on the Descent into Laṅkā (Laṅkāvatāra­sūtra) ’phags pa lang kar gshegs pa zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo, Degé Tengyur (mdo ’grel, pi), 123b5 ff.
n.­228
This response is missing from both the The Ten Dharmas and Jñānavajra’s Commentary.
n.­229
“Manifestation of a Bodhisattva’s Training,” or “Categorization of a Bodhisattva’s Training Chapter,” nyi khri 72.­63 and khri brgyad 83.­65. Below (Bṭ3 6.­84) glosses this same passage.
n.­230
This renders D skye ba ma mchis par ni bcom ldan ’das kyis nges par bka’ ma stsal to. There are many variants. Below 6.­89 (F.290.b) this line is cited in D as de’i skye ba lags pa ni bcom ldan ’das kyis bka’ ma stsal to, “The Lord has not said anything about that one’s rebirth.”
n.­231
yongs su gyur pa’o; khri brgyad ga 162b4–5 yongs su bsngos pa (“dedicated [to awakening]”); le’u brgyad ma ca 322b3 yongs su bsgyur pa. The Tib translators read nirmāṇa or nirmita and pariṇāmita in place of MQ p. 241, PSP 6-8: 157 nirvāṇa­pāragāminīm; LSPW “an unthinkable rebirth which allows him to advance to the beyond of Nirvana”; nyi khri 72.­64 (ga 353a2) bsam gyis mi khyab pa mya ngan las ’das par ’gyur pa, “becomes an inconceivable nirvāṇa.”
n.­232
khri brgyad 2.­3; ’bum 2.­3.
n.­233
khri brgyad 2.­4 has only “should cultivate… great love, and great compassion.”
n.­234
khri brgyad 2.­64; ’bum 2.­188 nye bar ston; LSPW pp. 35–37 “It is in such a spirit that a Bodhisattva, for the sake of maturing beings, lays hold of the five sense qualities.”
n.­235
khri brgyad 3.­1.
n.­236
khri brgyad 3.­20; Dutt 42.7 aṣṭāṅga-sanvāgatasya poṣadhasya; LSPW pp. 41–43 “Uposatha vows.” khri brgyad 3.­20 ff. omits the detailed list that includes “the four concentrations” found at nyi khri 2.­101, ’bum 2.­223–2.­225, LSPW pp. 41–45, and le’u brgyad ma ga 53a2 up to the sub-heading sgrub pa la gdams pa.
n.­237
khri brgyad 3.­21, ’bum 2.­226, nyi khri 2.­102, LSPW p. 45.
n.­238
khri brgyad 3.­54, nyi khri 2.­161, ’bum 2.­477, LSPW pp. 59–60.
n.­239
khri brgyad 6.­1, nyi khri 3.­1, ’bum 3.­1, LSPW pp. 98–99.
n.­240
khri brgyad 7.­1, nyi khri 4.­1, ’bum 4.­1, LSPW pp. 116–18 (LSPW pp. 107–19 abbreviates radically); Ghoṣa 473.
n.­241
khri brgyad 8.­1, nyi khri 5.­1, ’bum 5.­1, LSPW pp. 123–24.
n.­242
This reading sems dpa’ chen po is probably a mistake missed by an editor, but I have not emended it. K, nyi khri ka 178b5, ’bum ga 28a4, and LSPW p. 160 repeat byang chub sems dpa’. However khri brgyad ka 110a6–7, Tempangma ka 146b3 have byang chub sems dpa’ sems dpa’, and render padārtha by gzhi’i don (“basis in reality”), in place of the reading here tshig gi don (“meaning of the term”) corroborated by nyi khri ka 178b5 and ’bum ga 28a4, and LSPW p. 160.
n.­243
khri brgyad 22.­1, nyi khri 14.­1, ’bum 14.­2, LSPW p. 269.
n.­244
These are listed below 4.­678.
n.­246
The first of the twenty-eight (or twenty-nine) questions is about the padārtha of the word “bodhisattva.” The translators of different versions rendered padārtha in two ways: tshig gi don (“meaning of the word”) and gzhi’i don (“basis in reality”). In tshig gi don dang mtshan nyid, take the tshig gi don to be referencing the first question and then take the remaining questions to be included in conventional “characteristic marks” (mtshan nyid) Alternatively, this could be rendered “a two-part discussion about the basis in reality and the characteristic marks in the brief statement.”
n.­247
The eleven have been set forth based on a parallel passage at Bṭ1, 24a7, that says there is one discourse to Śāriputra, five to Subhūti, two to Śatakratu, two to Maitreya, and one relating the story of Sadāprarudita and entrusting the Sūtra to Ānanda. The following are tentative approximate locations in khri brgyad. The identification of exactly which sections in the scriptures our author has in mind requires further investigation. The first three rounds are (1) khri brgyad 2.­1–3.­145; (2) khri brgyad 6.­1–21.­96, the intermediate teaching‍—the first chapter of the Aṣṭa (Wogihara pp. 21–128); and (3) khri brgyad chapter 22. The two rounds to Maitreya are (4) khri brgyad 33.­1 ff. and (9) khri brgyad 83.­1–83.­70. The final section is (11) khri brgyad 85.­1–87.­6. The other rounds to Subhūti and Śatakratu are hard to identify with certainty.
n.­248
K yongs su gtad.
n.­249
The line is from the Tathāgata­garbha­sūtra (de bzhin gshegs pa’i snying po’i mdo, Degé Kangyur [mdo sde, za], 248b.2), cited in the Mahā­yānottara­tantra­śāstra­vyākhyā (theg pa chen po rgyud bla ma’i bstan bcos rnam par bshad pa, Degé Tengyur, [sems tsam, phi], 112a.6–7) on the Mahā­yānottara­tantra­śāstra (Johnston 1950, 1.152): eṣā kulaputra dharmāṇāṁ dharmatā | utpādād vā tathāgatānām anutpādād vā sadaivaite sattvās tathāgatagarbhā iti. Zimmermann (2002) translates this as, “Sons of good family, the essential law (dharmatā) of the dharmas is this: whether or not tathāgatas appear in the world, all these sentient beings at all times contain a tathāgata (tathāgata­garbha).”
n.­250
Below our author calls the work from which this is an extract (also cited in a longer form below 5.­598) the Three Hundred (sum brgya pa, = Triśatikā). This is a name for the Diamond Sūtra (Vajracchedikā) (Tucci 1951). The citation here (tathāgata iti subhūte bhūtatathatāyā etad adhivacanam; cp. Gilgit ms. Schopen edition, tathāgata iti subhūte tathatāyā etad adhivacanam translated by Harrison 2006, p. 152) is found at ’phags pa shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa rdo rje gcod pa, Degé Kangyur (sher phyin, sna tshogs, ka, 128b5–6). It is glossed in Vasubandhu’s Commentary (Ārya­bhagavatī­prajñā­pāramitā-vajracchedikā­saptārtha­ṭīkā) ’phags pa bcom ldan ’das ma shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa rdo rje gcod pa’i don bdun gyi rgya cher ’grel pa, Degé Tengyur (shes phyin, ma, 97b5–6).
n.­251
“Conventional” renders kun rdzob (saṃvṛti), “a cover up.”
n.­252
Emend pa’i to Bṭ1 26a3 pa.
n.­253
These characterizations of the understanding of ultimate reality (called the dharma-constituent) at higher and higher bodhisattva levels are set forth at Madhyānta­vibhāga 2.14–16.
n.­254
Emend rtog to Bṭ1 26a3 rtogs? If the D reading rtog is accepted, it means “surpassing thought construction.”
n.­255
Cp. Bṭ1 na 26a3 rnam par dag pa’i shas je che je cher gyur pas, “on account of the purified part located on level after level having become bigger and bigger.”
n.­256
Whitney (301c, p. 101) “by a pregnant construction, the locative is used to denote the place of rest or cessation of action or motion.” The Skt prajñā­pāramitāyāṃ yogaḥ karaṇīyaḥ puts the perfection of wisdom in the locative case (literally, “the effort is to be made in (or at) the perfection of wisdom.”) When you understand by the word prajñāpāramitā the result, a buddha’s knowledge of all aspects, take it as a dative of purpose.
n.­257
Bṭ3 rgyun du chud pa dang/ gus pa dang/ ’grus pa la sogs pas; Bṭ1 26b7 rgyun chad pa dang/ gus pa dang/ ’grub pa la sogs pas, “cutting the continuum, respecting, and accomplishment.”
n.­258
Vajracchedikā (Harrison and Watanabe, p. 113) sthātavyam… pratipattavyam… cittam pratigṛhītavyam, ’phags pa shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa rdo rje gcod pa, Degé Kangyur (sher phyin, sna tshogs, ka), 121b2–3. In his translation, Harrison (2006, p. 142) takes katham (ji ltar) as introducing freestanding questions rather than as comments on what the Lord has already taught in a Prajñāpāramitā scripture already known to the reader.
n.­259
nyi khri 2.­5, ’bum 2.­5; khri brgyad 2.­4 “should develop.”
n.­260
Vajracchedikā, cited just before in the brief teaching Bṭ3 3.­20.
n.­261
This understands rigs pa as nyāya. If rigs pa renders yukti this means, “It means ‘because of the logic of not taking a stand anywhere.’ ”
n.­262
“Practice through the force of habit” (yang dag par spyod pa, samudācāra), “the achieving” (sgrub pa, pratipatti).
n.­263
Mahā­yāna­saṃgraha, 3.7 (Chodron’s undated English translation of Lamotte 1938, p. 219), explains the four investigations (yongs su btsal ba, paryeṣaṇā) that are connected with the preparatory stage (prayoga) of the path before awakening. The first two investigations discover that the names for things and the things themselves are both just articulated in the mind; the third that there is no intrinsic nature or intrinsic identity to be found in the names and things, it is just labeled onto them; and finally that the particular features distinguishing the names and things are just labeled onto them too. The four comprehensions (yongs su shes pa, parijñāna; Chodron “knowledges”) are, in each case, coming to the realization of “representation only” (rnam par rig pa tsam, vijñapti­mātratā). In each case the comprehension is associated with a more and more refined meditative stabilization that finally merges into awakening or clear realization (mngon rtogs, abhisamaya).
n.­264
Golden pha 58a shes rab kyis yongs su sbyong bar byed pa; K, N shes rab kyis sbyong bar byed pa. D shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa yongs su sbyor bar byed pa, “When, after giving or after the giving of a gift, they investigate with the four ways of investigating and comprehend properly with the four comprehensions, they apply themselves to the perfection of wisdom.”
n.­265
This is explaining upādāya (phyir) in khri brgyad 2.­3: “because a gift, giver, or recipient are not apprehended.”
n.­266
Similar to khri brgyad 45.­11, nyi khri 35.­14, ’bum ta 55a1.
n.­267
This is the nyi khri and ’bum reading, and the reading below at khri brgyad 2.­30. Here khri brgyad has “there is no physical or mental effort expended.”
n.­268
rtsol ba, *vyavasāya. The idea is that a worthy one ends up in nirvāṇa because of a deficient path, but a bodhisattva models nirvāṇa intentionally.
n.­269
khri brgyad 54.­4, le’u brgyad ma ca 24b4, LSPW pp. 406–7.
n.­270
’bum 2.­4.
n.­271
4.­818–4.­886 explaining khri brgyad 16.­1–16.­25.
n.­272
Golden 62a5 thob.
n.­273
By saying bodhisattvas meditate on the emptiness meditative stabilization and so on, not on just emptiness and so on, the scripture indicates these three are being taught in the context of a bodhisattva’s practice.
n.­274
“And so on” includes, at khri brgyad 2.­4, the “four immeasurables, four formless absorptions, eight deliverances, nine serial absorptions,” and so on.
n.­275
’bum 2.­10; khri brgyad and nyi khri differ slightly.
n.­276
“Product,” rab tu skye ba (prabhava), is one of the four aspects of the truth of origination.
n.­277
This is a conjectural translation of kun mthun par mkhyen pa, perhaps an abbreviation of chos thams cad stong pa nyid du rjes su mthun par mkhyen pa, “the subsequent knowledge that all dharmas are in accord with emptiness” that occurs just below. It would then mean the knowledge that everything is in accord with the ultimate, which is to say, is ultimately the same. For a detailed investigation of the knowledges see Mppś English pp. 1200–18. In the basic scriptures, awakening knowledge is first of the suffering, origination, cessation, and path as it pertains to the world in which we find ourselves (the “desire realm”) and then subsequently as it pertains to the form and formless realms. Based on this kun mthun pa, “all in agreement,” would mean that the practitioner knows all three realms are “in agreement,” which is to say are the same as suffering, originating from affliction and karma and so on.
n.­278
Mppś English vol. 3, p. 1205, says this is knowledge that what has been extinguished will not arise again and is absent from a buddha.
n.­279
Lamotte (Mppś English vol. 3, p. 1204), in his otherwise exhaustive and masterly explanation of the knowledges, mistakenly explains paricaya/parijaya as only related to paracitta, “knowledge of the minds of others,” without fully explaining its use in the perfection of wisdom. Altruistic “mastery” is central to the perfection of wisdom.
n.­280
4.­41. It means they do not do so in the way taught in the fundamental scriptures.
n.­281
Emend rkyan to rkyen.
n.­282
khri brgyad 54.­4, with slight differences; cf. le’u brgyad ma ca 24b4, ŚsPN4 9817v8, LSPW pp. 406–7.
n.­283
Better is ŚsPN4 9817v8 that has evaṃ, “thus,” in place of eva (nyid du), “actual.”
n.­284
Lamotte (Mppś English vol. 3, pp. 1204 and 2018) suggests the reading yathābhūta in place of yathāruta but khri brgyad ka 12a sgra ji bzhin shes is corroborated by Z’s yathāvat. Our author understands the compound along the lines of “whatever the sound.” LSPW (reading yathāruta, sgra ji bzhin pa) “according to the letter.” sgra ji bzhin pa can also mean, depending on the context, “a statement taken at face value,” or “literally,” or even “a description in accord with the facts.”
n.­285
’bum 2.­14 (ka 41a3), khri brgyad 2.­4. The list of six is not in any of the extant versions of shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa stong phrag brgya pa. PSP 1-1:30, nyi khri 2.­5, Mppś, LSPW all omit.
n.­286
PSP 1-1:30 aṣṭau mahā­puruṣa­vitarkā(ḥ).
n.­287
AAVārt, Degé Tengyur (shes phyin, kha) 6b6 ff. The rnam ’grel (vārttika) “subcommentary” here is taken to be Bhadanta Vimuktisena’s *arya­pañca­viṃśati-sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitopadeśa­śāstrābhisamayālaṃkāra­kārikā­vārttika; cf. Sparham 2008–13, vol. 1, p. 8.
n.­288
Edg, s.v. sattvāvāsa. Vasubandhu (Abhidharmakośa 3.6cd) says the seven bases of consciousness (vijñānasthiti), along with the bhavāgra and unconscious (asaṃjñin) states, are the nine. The seven are (1) the bases of humans and gods in the desire realm, (2) of certain classes of gods in the retinue of Brahmā, (3) of the gods in the second concentration, (4) of the gods in the third concentration, and (5–7) of the gods in the first three formless absorptions. Cf. Sattāvāsasutta, Aṅguttaranikāya 9.24.
n.­289
It is unclear whether our author intends that some versions of the scripture read āyāsa? (gnod) in place of āvāsa (gnas) or whether this is simply a creative explanation of the nine sattvāvāsa.
n.­290
’bum 2.­15. khri brgyad 2.­5, nyi khri 2.­6 “of a knower of all aspects.”
n.­291
The fourth statement, “who want to perfect the knowledge of the aspects of the thought activity of all beings,” and the fifth statement, “who want to destroy all residual impressions, connections, and afflictions,” come after “all-knowledge.”
n.­292
nyi khri 2.­62, khri brgyad 2.­50 (with slight differences); Z 384.
n.­293
nyi khri 2.­80, khri brgyad 2.­64, reading yon tan rnams nye bar ’dzin to; Dutt 37.12 upādadāti; Z 387; LSPW p. 37.
n.­294
Cf. Braavig, Tib text vol. i, p. 15; translation vol. ii, p. 242.
n.­295
Lamotte (Mppś English vol. 5, p. 2029, n. 399) cites the term sarva­vāsanānusandhi­kleśa­prahāṇa from the Skt and Tib to support his observation that bodhisattvas are called tathāgatas at the tenth level when they eliminate the residual impressions (vāsanā). They only eliminate affliction (kleśa) at the eighth level, when they obtain the forbearance for the nonproduction of all dharmas. He does not explain connection (anusaṃdhi) separately.
n.­296
Closest is khri brgyad ka 12b4 sems kyi spyod pa’i rnam par shes pa; cf. ’bum ka 41b6, nyi khri ka 28b6 sems dang/spyod pa dang/shes pa’i rnam par shes pa.
n.­297
khri brgyad 2.­9, Z 377–78.
n.­298
khri brgyad 2.­19, Z 379.
n.­299
khri brgyad 2.­30, Z 382.
n.­300
khri brgyad 2.­50, Z 384, LSPW pp. 31–33.
n.­301
Cf. below at 4.­483. skyon med pa nyid (niyāmatā/nyāmatā) by itself is rendered “flawlessness”; when together with byang chub sems dpa’ (bodhi­sattvanyāma), skyon med pa (niyāma/nyāma) is “the secure state” or “flawlessness” (of bodhisattvas); when together with “dharmas” (dharmaniyāmatā/nyāmatā), skyon med pa nyid is “certification” (of dharmas).
n.­302
The antecedent of “that” is the nyāma (“flawlessness”) in the word bodhi­sattvanyāma (“secure state of a bodhisattva”) understood as the tathāgata­garbha, here understood as the buddha nature found in all beings.
n.­303
This is from the Vajracchedikā cited earlier at 3.­4.
n.­304
Our author means that the attribute (dharma) qualifying all phenomena is their shared thoroughly established nature. This nature is certified as being the attribute in the state of perfect, complete awakening.
n.­305
To sum up, our author is explaining the compound bodhi­sattvanyāma not as the nyāma (“secure state” or “flawlessness”) of a bodhisattva but the nyāma that is bodhi and sattva.
n.­306
This is likely a citation from or a paraphrase of The Ten Bhūmis but I have not been able to identify a specific passage so I have rendered it here as a general statement.
n.­307
khri brgyad 2.­9 says, “Moreover, Śāriputra, bodhisattva great beings who want to thoroughly establish a buddha’s body should train in the perfection of wisdom. If they want to acquire the thirty-two marks and the eighty minor signs of a great person, they should train in the perfection of wisdom.”
n.­308
The Ten Bhūmis, 1.­652 (Roberts 2021b); (Rahder, VIII Q, p. 71) kumārety ucyate ’navadyatvāt.
n.­309
khri brgyad 2.­12: “Moreover, Śāriputra, bodhisattva great beings who want to establish all beings in a world as vast as the dharma-constituent and as far-reaching as the space element in the perfection of giving, and who want to establish them in the perfection of morality, the perfection of patience, the perfection of perseverance, the perfection of concentration, and the perfection of wisdom, should train in the perfection of wisdom.”
n.­310
blo gros mi zad pa’i mdo. This is The Teaching of Akṣayamati (Akṣaya­mati­nirdeśa, blo gros mi zad pas bstan pa, Toh 175; Braarvig 2018).
n.­311
The “I am my own master” is a refrain in collection 23 (ātmavarga) of the Udānavarga (Bernhard edition): ātmā tv ihātmano nāthaḥ; ched du brjod pa’i tshoms, Degé Tengyur (mngon pa, tu), 21b7–22b1. The other two are similar to pāpakavarga 28; ched du brjod pa’i tshoms, 28b4–5; and prakirṇaka­varga 16.3 uttiṣṭhata vyāyam ata kurudhvaṃ dvīpam ātmanaḥ; ched du brjod pa’i tshoms, 15b6.
n.­312
khri brgyad ka 10.­63, LSPW pp. 158–60.
n.­313
khri brgyad 15.­11, LSPW pp. 189–91.
n.­314
“True dharmic nature eyes” (dharmatācakṣus, chos nyid kyi mig) are the eyes from the perspective of their ultimate attribute‍—nondual emptiness.
n.­315
This and below at 4.­541–4.­547 are important for understanding works discussing other-emptiness (gzhan stong) in fourteenth century Tibet.
n.­316
khri brgyad 10.­63.
n.­317
khri brgyad 14.­34.
n.­318
Golden pha 74b4 pas; D par.
n.­319
Here is a literal translation of this passage: “Like this, in someone who has seen the city of the gandharvas, an intellectually active awareness (blo) of the city is born. Then, afterward, when one has really explored and looked for just that city and does not see it, the intellectually active awareness of the city disappears (blo med par gyur). But it is not suitable to say, when intellectually active awareness of the empty is born, that there is some other, different entity‍—empty of the intellectually active awareness of the city‍—because intellectually active awareness of the empty was born in that one. Similarly, here as well, having seen a falsely imagined shape and so on as a shape, an intellectually active awareness of a dharma is born. Then, when a search has been made for it as it really is, because the knowledge of it as it really is does not see that dharma, it is simply that the intellectually active awareness of the dharma is not there and an intellectually active awareness of the empty is born. It is not suitable to say that because an intellectually active awareness of the empty is born there, there is some other, different dharma‍—‘the empty’‍—there.” Cited in Jagattalanivāsin’s Bhagavatyāmnāyānusāriṇī­nāma­vyākhyā, bcom ldan ’das ma’i man ngag gi rjes su brang ba zhes bya ba’i rnam par bshad pa, Degé Tengyur (shes phyin, ba), 286b3–6.
n.­320
K, N.
n.­321
Bhagavatyāmnāyānusāriṇī, Degé Tengyur (shes phyin, ba), 285b5–7 is a different translation of the same passage.
n.­322
D has “attain clairvoyance.”
n.­323
sgyu ma’i sngags gis… mig bslus. I take lta ba bcings, “having mesmerized,” (Bhagavatyāmnāyānusāriṇī, 286a1) as a gloss, not a different translation.
n.­324
khri brgyad 20.­80.
n.­325
D “one talks of their ‘lack of an intrinsic nature.’ ”
n.­326
Emend di ltar to de ci ltar (Bhagavatyāmnāyānusāriṇī, 287b4).
n.­327
K, N kyis; D kyi. Alternatively, rang nyid kyi gzung ba med du zin may mean “it is itself already not a grasped-object.”
n.­328
N has “nominal” (btags) existence.
n.­329
khri brgyad 16.­97.
n.­330
khri brgyad 3.­130.
n.­331
This is a tentative translation of nag pa (citrā) grong (gṛha) du phyin pa dang / grong nas byung ba yang gcig. I understand grong to mean one of the stations or mansions through which the sun or moon, understood as a celestial body, passes.
n.­332
Udānavarga 1.19 dīrgho bālasya saṃsāraḥ; ched du brjod pa’i tshoms, Degé Tengyur (mngon pa, tu), 2b4.
n.­333
Cited in Prajñāvarman’s Udāna­varga­vivaraṇa, ched du brjod pa’i tshoms kyi rnam par ’grel pa, Degé Tengyur (mngon pa, thu), 115b1 on Udānavārga 3.12–13.
n.­334
Cp. khri brgyad 24.­65 “you cannot apprehend a prior limit.”
n.­335
Udānavarga, ched du brjod pa’i tshoms, Degé Tengyur (mngon pa, tu), 25b7–28a2 differs slightly; Bernhard 1965 omits.
n.­336
Conze’s rendering of the distinctly Buddhist word anavakāra (Tib dor ba med pa) as “nonrepudiation” has been retained because of the -kāra ending, even though the explanation here suggests a better translation is “absence of the repudiated.”
n.­337
Prajñāvarman’s Udāna­varga­vivaraṇa, ched du brjod pa’i tshoms kyi rnam par ’grel pa, Degé Tengyur (mngon pa, thu), 71b3 sangs rgyas thams cad ni mnyam par yi ge dang tshig gcig nges par mi ston te/ ’od srungs kyi gsung rab la phung po nyid yod par ston to. Alternatively, de bzhin gshegs pa ’od srungs kyi gsung rab may mean the scriptures of the Kāśyapīya subschool of the Sarvāstivādins. Cf. Pūrṇavardana’s Abhi­dharma­kośa­ṭīkā, chos mngon par chos kyi ’grel bshad mtshan nyid kyi rjes su ’brang ba, Degé Tengyur (mngon pa, cu), 170b rnam par ’drid pa lnga zhes bya ba ni phun po lnga zhes bya ba’i don te/ de bzhin gshegs pa ’od srungs kyi gsung rab las phung po la rnam par ’drid pa zhes bya ba ming btags pa yin no; Karashima 2015, p. 117.
n.­338
“Now” means during the time of the Tathāgata Śākyamuni.
n.­339
Golden pha 82b5, D mi rtag pa omit.
n.­340
“Attributes” renders chos (dharma).
n.­341
“Special attributes of a buddha” renders sangs rgyas kyi chos (buddhadharma).
n.­342
“Things” renders chos (dharma).
n.­343
This means it is the ultimate attribute of those attribute possessors. The word chos (dharma) here has a number of overlapping meanings because any attribute (dharma) can be an attribute possessor (chos can, dharmin), but all attribute possessors can be understood as indivisible with their ultimate attribute and hence are called just things or phenomena or attributes (dharma). Put another way, everything can stand as a basis for an investigation that leads to its ultimate nature (=chos can), and this ultimate nature is in this sense its ultimate attribute (=chos).
n.­344
The explanations of the emptiness of dharmas and emptiness of marks here is similar to the analysis of marks (lakṣaṇa) in Nāgārjuna’s Mūla­madhyama­kakārikā chapter five.
n.­345
This, unlike the general characterizing mark “impermanent,” is a specific characterizing mark of the first of the five aggregates as distinct from the second aggregate, for example.
n.­346
khri brgyad 20.­76 et passim, where this is rendered “all dharmas are the nonexistence of an intrinsic nature.”
n.­347
dngos po med pa’i ngo bo nyid, abhāvasvabhāva. The Skt compound consists of three parts: a, a negative prefix; bhava, “existent thing”; and svabhāva, “intrinsic nature.” In what follows the parts of the compound are treated in different ways. Usually I have rendered abhāva­svabhāva­śūnyatā as “the emptiness that is the nonexistence of an intrinsic nature,” but there are many different ways of breaking the compound, some of which are explained here.
n.­348
As a bahuvrihi, abhāvasvabhāva means: “all dharmas have nonexistence (abhāva) as their intrinsic nature (svabhāva).”
n.­349
I have rendered dngos po (bhāva) “existent thing” here for consistency, but as our author explains immediately after this statement, it means the things in ordinary life that deluded people mistakenly take to be truly real.
n.­350
I have rendered dngos po (bhāva) “existent thing” here for consistency, but as our author explains immediately after this statement, it means the things in ordinary life that deluded people mistakenly take to be truly real.
n.­351
This is a different way of dissolving the compound dngos po med pa’i ngo bo nyid, abhāvasvabhāva. If our author intends not a bahuvrīhi here, but a tatpuruṣa compound, he is saying it is called “the intrinsic nature that is not an existent thing,” that which has no existent thing for its intrinsic nature
n.­352
Śūnyatā­nāma­mahā­śūtra, mdo chen po stong pa nyid (mdo sde, sha), 250b1, cited in Vasubandhu’s Madhyānta­vibhāgabhāṣya (Nagao edition, 18.4–7) evaṃ yad yatra nāsti tat tena śūnyam iti yathābhūtaṃ samanupaśyati yat punar atrāvaśiṣṭaṃ bhavati tat sad ihāstīti yathābhūtaṃ prajānātīty; dbus dang mtha’ rnam par ’byed pa’i ’grel pa, Degé Tengyur (sems tsam, bi), 2a2–3. Hopkins (1999, pp. 183–84 notes a and b) discusses the origin of the citation and supplies complete references to earlier Tib and modern interpretations of this passage. Here bcom ldan ’das supports the position that the citation is from a sūtra.
n.­353
This renders D shin tu rtogs pa ma yin. Golden pha 85a2 shin tu rtog pa yin, “is absolutely a thought construction.”
n.­354
khri brgyad 48.­94, 83.­61, and 54.­22; LSPW pp. 408–9, 476, 582.
n.­355
The Ten Bhūmis (Rahder, p. 87).
n.­356
These are included among the ten powers; cf. khri brgyad 16.­81.
n.­357
Z 312 n. 536 “interstitial dark place”; Edg, s.v. lokāntarikā, “world-interstitial-spheres.” It is noteworthy that lokāntarikā is not present in our author’s version of the Sūtra.
n.­358
The secrets of the body of a tathāgata are explained in the seventh chapter (sku’i gsang ba’i le’u) of the de bshin gshegs pa’i gsang ba bsam gyis mi khyab pa’i bstan pa (Tathāgatācintya­guhya­nirdeśa), Degé Kangyur (dkon brtsegs, ka), F.126.a–F.132.b.
n.­359
bskyed. kyer kyer / kye re, “upright”; skye, “become upright”; skyed, “make upright.”
n.­360
bzur, perfect form of ’dzur; cf. zur, the resultative form “on the side.”
n.­361
mjing pa bsgyur. Jāschke s.v. ’jing. There is a relation between gya gyu, “crooked”; ’gyur, “change”; sgyu, “deceit”; and sgyur, “change.” Lamotte and Conze take this as the meaning of “the elephant’s look” and connect it with the historical Buddha’s turning fully around to gaze on the world he is about to leave.
n.­362
Alternatively, ji ltar ’dug pa and ji ltar lta ba may mean “with their acts in perfect accord [with reality] and with eyes that see [all reality] just as it is.”
n.­363
khri brgyad 2.­55.
n.­364
khri brgyad 2.­63.
n.­365
The four ways of gathering a retinue are by means of: gifts (dāna), kind words (priyavacana), beneficial actions (arthacaryā/kriyā), and samānārthatā / samāna­sukha­duḥkhatā. Edg, s.v. samānārthatā renders the last “adopting of the same aims for himself which he preaches to others” and “having the same joys and sorrows.” It means practicing what you preach. Here it means adapting to the prevailing set of values.
n.­366
Lalitavistara. The Tib. translation here differs from rgya cher rol pa, Lhasa Kangyur 96 (mdo sde, kha), 115b6–116a5 (closest); Degé Kangyur (mdo sde, kha), 71b5–72a2. Cf. The Play in Full, 12.­3–12.­7 (Dharmachakra 2013).
n.­367
This renders ’chi (maraṇa); Kangyur ’thab mo (saraṇa): “conflict,” “violence.”
n.­368
’khrul ’khor (yantra); Kangyur dug gi lo ma (pātra).
n.­369
Kangyur ’dam dang lcag lcig khrod nas padma rnam par ’phel.
n.­370
amṛte; Kangyur ’chi med: “He leads trillions of beings to the deathless state.” aṃṛta means both “immortal” and “ambrosia, divine nectar.”
n.­371
Emend bsten to Kangyur bstan (darśita).
n.­372
It is noteworthy that this chapter title in khri brgyad is omitted from nyi khri 2.­82.
n.­373
khri brgyad 3.­2.
n.­374
K, N; D “the conceptualization of practice.”
n.­375
Alternatively, “therefore, that which is the emptiness that is a nonexistence does exist.”
n.­376
The punctuation at khri brgyad 3.­2 differs slightly.
n.­377
“It”‍—the statement‍—“does not have the fault” of saying bodhisattvas are absolutely existent.
n.­378
D. The translation based on K, N, and Golden pha 91b2 is “if they ultimately exist.” The idea is that if the ultimate emptiness is not just a name as a falsely imagined phenomena, all the other ordinary phenomena will not be either. D “if they ultimately do not exist.”
n.­379
D. The translation based on K, N, and Golden pha 92a5 is: “ ‘does not reside somewhere’ teaches that the illusion is marked as having form, because dharmas having form reside somewhere.”
n.­380
D rten cing ’brel ba’i chos; K, N rten cing rten pa’i chos; Golden pha 92b6 rten cing brten pa’i chos; khri brgyad ka 24a7 chos so so tha dad pa, prati­prati­dharma, “in the case of each of these different dharmas.” Kumārajīva’s translation of the corresponding section of the Śatasāhasrikā (translated Z 206, n. 45) is: “Designations are dharmas produced by the combination of causes and conditions.” LSPW pp. 38–39 “counter-dharma” (pp. 38–39, n. 5: “The passage may, however, be corrupt”). It may be that “those interdependent” was not in our author’s version of the Sūtra, but should be understood as an explanation of prati prati.
n.­381
These are the five aggregates onto which the bodhisattva is labeled.
n.­382
Cf. Edg, s.v. upaṇiśā, rendered in Tib by rgyu, “cause.” The idea is that the cause dictates the result, but it is impossible to describe a complex of causes big enough to give rise to this resultant perfection of wisdom.
n.­383
This is a conjectural rendering of shod dgod/god.
n.­384
This tautology in English is because our author is dissolving a Skt compound word into its component parts. The four are Jambu, Videha, Godānīya, and Kuru.
n.­385
This is the trisāhasra­mahā­sāhasra, Conze’s “trichiliocosm.”
n.­386
This wisdom is “detached from” or “isolated from” (vivikta) every possible defilement.
n.­387
Das, s.v. ’gre ba, is right to connect the word with peyāla (paryāya), a set of passages connected because they are explaining a single topic; Mvy has parivarta for ’gres pa.
n.­388
khri brgyad 3.­9.
n.­389
khri brgyad 3.­17.
n.­390
khri brgyad 3.­21.
n.­391
The word yuj includes within its range of meaning “yoking to,” “endeavoring at,” “joining with,” and “engaging in a correct practice of.”
n.­392
K, N “aggregates, sense fields, elements, truths, links of dependent origination, all dharmas, and the compounded and uncompounded.”
n.­393
This is not exactly the same as any of the extant versions of the Sūtra that all have med (“there is no”) in place of yang dag par rjes su ma mthong (“they do not see”); khri brgyad 3.­28.
n.­394
Mūla­madhyamaka­kārikā 1.1.
n.­395
Mūla­madhyamaka­kārikā 15.8; 16.8; 5.3.
n.­396
D yang gcig tu na; Golden pha 100b5 yang na, “alternatively.”
n.­397
One of the meanings of dharma is something that holds its own identity.
n.­398
khri brgyad 3.­23 lists the defining marks of each aggregate. Each dharma is a separate entity so if they were all to merge together like streams they would lose their identity, so it is not possible for them to have aggregated.
n.­399
Emend D ’khrul pa yod to Golden 101b2 ’khrul pa med.
n.­400
Alternatively, if a bahuvrihi compound, “they appear with emptiness as their mark.”
n.­401
This renders gzugs su yod pa as equivalent to gzugs su rung ba, the standard definition of rūpa (gzugs). Setting aside the various etymologies, Tib gzugs su yod pa, “that which occupies a place,” is a resultant form of ’dzugs.
n.­402
’dus nas shes is probably a different rendering of the same Skt rendered in khri brgyad 3.­23 (ka 29a) kun tu shes, explaining the saṃ in saṃjñā.
n.­403
K, N. D, where the editor has understood “spoken earlier” as the “emptiness” spoken earlier in the statement “form is itself emptiness, and emptiness is form,” and the “all aspects” as all phenomena understood from the perspective of their true dharmic nature, their ultimate attribute emptiness. The editor of Golden 102b6 reads kyi (“teaches all the aspects of emptiness spoken about earlier”), and understands the “earlier” to be a reference to the last section when our author said this passage in the Sūtra is broken down into four subsections.
n.­404
The eleven are the seven emptinesses (of aggregates, sense fields, elements, truths, dependent origination, all dharmas or dharmas taken as a totality, and compounded and uncompounded dharmas) together with the four (the intrinsic nature of each‍—form and so on separately‍—that cannot be apprehended, the intrinsic nature of them as a collection or confluence that cannot be apprehended, the defining mark of a particular dharma that cannot be apprehended, and the totality of dharmas that cannot be apprehended).
n.­405
“The endeavor” (yujyamāna, brtson pa); “engaged” (yukta, brtson).
n.­406
“Originating” (bhāva, ’byung ba); “perishing” (vibhāva, ’jigs pa).
n.­407
This is a conjectural translation of ’dres mar. Based on khri brgyad 3.­42–3.­43, it incorporates the four possibilities (practicing, not practicing, and so on), and practicing for the sake of the perfections and so on, up to the very limit of reality.
n.­408
khri brgyad 3.­29.
n.­409
This is the first of the three gateways to liberation.
n.­411
“Yogic practice” (yoga, rnal ’byor).
n.­412
“Cognitive dimension” renders rnam pa (ākāra).
n.­413
khri brgyad 3.­35 (ka 31a7) sbyor bar byed. The same yojaya (Ghoṣa 262, Dutt 57, and Z 398) is rendered variously into Tib by both sbyor and sbyor bar byed. Dorjé renders nyi khri 2.­129 (ka 52b) mi sbyor mi ’byed as “they neither associate with nor disassociate from physical forms.”
n.­414
Z follows Edg in rendering avatṝ (’jug) here as “comprehend.”
n.­415
“By way of apprehending consequences” renders las dang ’bras bu dmigs pa’i tshul gyis.
n.­416
A “maturation” means a form of life.
n.­417
’bum 2.­277, nyi khri 2.­132, Twenty-Five Thousand translation “owing to emptiness with respect to the sameness of the three times”) differ.
n.­418
khri brgyad 3.­40.
n.­419
The rest of the aggregates with origination and so on, and with pleasure, suffering, self, no self, calm, and not calm.
n.­420
’bum 2.­352, khri brgyad omit.
n.­421
A rnam par rtog pa (usually rendered “idea” or “conceptualization”) here means a “possibility” or “alternative.” The Tib versions of the Sūtra have all four conceptualizations of “practicing, not practicing, practicing and not practicing, and not practicing and not not practicing.” The last two are absent from the Skt versions.
n.­422
Cf. 2.­5.
n.­423
This renders de gnyis kyi las bstan to. Alternatively, this may just be a way of saying, like Bṭ1 na 64a6–7 phrad pa’am mi phrad pa zhes bya ba yang ’du ba dang ’bral ba’i rnam grangs tsam du zad do, “they are synonyms.”
n.­424
This means from the attainment of the forbearance for dharmas that are not produced and the matured perfections on the eighth level.
n.­425
khri brgyad 3.­53 (ka 37a1) bskyed; ’bum 2.­476 (ka 160a4); nyi khri 2.­160 (ka 61a5) skyed, “do not produce a miserly thought.”
n.­426
Maitreya lives in the Tuṣita heaven ready to be “reborn” as a Śākyamuni-like buddha.
n.­427
skyon med pa; rendered at khri brgyad 3.­72 “flawlessness.”
n.­428
viṣkandaka (thod rgal) (variously avaskandha, avaskandhaka, or as in Vasubandhu’s Abhidharmakośa 8.73, vyutkrāntaka) means “leaping above”; see khri brgyad n.­79 at 3.­75 for an explanation, and khri brgyad 62.­54–62.­56 for the full account of this meditative stabilization.
n.­429
brtun is a perfective voluntary form of ’dun; cf. Jäschke, s.v. rtun, dun.
n.­430
bsdus is glossing sdom (saṃvara). Alternatively, even though it is not contextually appropriate, the author might intend that they have gathered (saṃgrah) a retinue through morality.
n.­431
khri brgyad 3.­97.
n.­432
K, N la bka’ stsal.
n.­433
At khri brgyad 3.­104 the statement, “Śāriputra, there are bodhisattva great beings practicing the perfection of wisdom cleansing the awakening path who are practicing the perfection of giving,” and so on, comes immediately before Śāriputra’s question.
n.­434
These are the ten powers (bala) of a tathāgata, khri brgyad 16.­81–16.­89.
n.­435
khri brgyad K, N ka 121–22; khri brgyad 3.­133 differs slightly; PSP 1-1: 101–2.
n.­436
Golden pa 112b6, citing khri brgyad 3.­127. D differs.
n.­437
Golden pa 113a3–4, citing khri brgyad 3.­134.
n.­438
khri brgyad 3.­134 ff. says that bodhisattvas inclined to generosity, morality, and so on practice each of the six perfections in turn, but their inclination to one does not preclude the practice of them all together.
n.­439
khri brgyad 3.­140.
n.­440
The eight are listed earlier at 1.­31 and are explained below 4.­833.
n.­441
This summarizes from khri brgyad 3.­146 up to the end of chapter 3 (3.­153‍—prophesy); up to the end of chapter 4 (4.­6‍—praise); up to the end of chapter 5 (5.­14‍—the diffusion of the light and so on); and up to Ghoṣa 322.
n.­442
2.­5. The last two are “the subdivisions of the endeavor, and the specific instruction for coming to an authoritative conclusion about this exposition.”
n.­443
Golden 104b1 emends D bus to bu. Śāriputra is being addressed by Subhūti. Śāriputra is not stating this as a fact.
n.­444
bod rgya tshig mdzod chen mo, s.v. stsol, says it is an archaic form of sel (past tense bsal); s.v. sel ba, 2 gives the example dmigs kyis bsal ba (“zero in on a particular”).
n.­445
Perhaps this means discourses “intended for oneself, intended for others, and given when the time is ripe.”
n.­446
In this section the following conventions are employed for compounds with the word prajñapti (rendered into Tib by forms of ’dogs): btags pa (prajñapti), “designation,” “designated”; in its basic meaning “something that makes something else known”; “label,” “labeled”; ming du btags pa (nāmaprajñapti), “name designation”; chos su btags pa (dharma­prajñapti), “dharma designation”; btags pa’i chos (prajñapti­dharma), “phenomenon that is a label”; tha snyad du gdags pa (vyavahṛ passive), “use conventionally”; and ming dang brda (nāma/saṃjñā-saṃketa), “name and conventional term,” and ming gi brda, “name that is a conventional term.”
n.­447
khri brgyad 6.­4.
n.­448
K, N; D “these dharmas are not dual.”
n.­449
btags pa. Golden 116a1–2 brtags pa’i/pas gdams pa, “instruction about what has been conceptualized.”
n.­450
khri brgyad 6.­34 “understand that it is a dharma designation that is a name and conventional term.” ’bum 3.­113 (ka 236b4), nyi khri 3.­75 (ka 99a1) have the preferable reading ming dang brdar bya ba’i chos su gdags pa rnams de ltar, “understand the conventional usage of dharmas that are names and conventional terms.”
n.­451
khri brgyad 6.­57.
n.­452
The other three questions at khri brgyad 6.­35 are: “or is the bodhisattva in form, or is form in the bodhisattva, or is the bodhisattva without form?”
n.­453
Ghoṣa 432, Gilgit 48r10, PSP 1-1:139, ’bum 3.­656, nyi khri 3.­142, and le’u brgyad ma ga 115b5. khri brgyad 6.­51 “when a being.”
n.­454
khri brgyad 6.­56.
n.­455
khri brgyad 6.­57, citing 6.­4 (ka 58a3), but without sems dpa’.
n.­456
khri brgyad 6.­62.
n.­457
Golden 116b3. D “not apprehending the elder Subhūti’s word.”
n.­458
khri brgyad 6.­67 with a slight difference.
n.­460
khri brgyad 6.­68, citing 6.­4. It is noteworthy that here there is only bodhisattva (’bum 3.­4, nyi khri 3.­4) not bodhisattva great being.
n.­461
This exact citation is not in the other scriptures beginning from ’bum 3.­745, nyi khri 3.­180, PSP 1-1:145, or Ghoṣa 470. Closest is khri brgyad 6.­68.
n.­462
khri brgyad 6.­74.
n.­463
K, N phyis; D phyir.
n.­464
nyi khri 3.­28; khri brgyad 6.­23 “names that are conventional terms”; Gilgit 41v7, Kimura 1-1:114. prajñapti is rendered here in line with its basic meaning as a causal form of the root jñā. There is a sense of altruism in prajñapti, where all dharmas are what they are, to make known to others their lack of an intrinsic nature in order to liberate them. Alternatively (rendering prajñapti by “designation,” “designated”; Tib btags pa), “they should train in designation that is names and conventional terms, in designation that is advice, and in designation as the dharmas.”
n.­465
While giving advice they remain free from the two extremes.
n.­466
Both are the names and conventional terms that make things known, and advice that makes things known.
n.­467
khri brgyad 6.­29, “Because, Subhūti, bodhisattva great beings practicing the perfection of wisdom do not mentally construct and do not conceptualize all those dharmas.”
n.­468
’bum 3.­104, nyi khri 3.­61.
n.­469
khri brgyad 6.­29, ’bum 3.­105, nyi khri 3.­61, Gilgit 44v2, PSP 1-1: 128; Ghoṣa 372 omits.
n.­470
khri brgyad 6.­29.
n.­471
D; K, N “that is the object of nonconceptualization.”
n.­472
Here tathatā (“suchness,” “reality”) has the sense of “the state that remains just as it is.”
n.­473
’bum 3.­124, nyi khri 3.­75. PSP 1-1, Ghoṣa, and Gilgit 44v8 nāmasāṃketikī dharmaprajñaptir, rendered in LSPW p. 106 “the concept of dharma as a word and conventional term.”
n.­474
4.­425. A threefold subset of conceptualizations is set out as falling within the province (1) of insight, (2) of the three gateways to liberation, and (3) of the perfect analytic understanding of the reality of dharmas.
n.­475
khri brgyad 6.­33.
n.­476
’bum 3.­125; nyi khri 3.­76: “You have said, Subhūti, that ‘The Lord says “bodhisattva” again and again.’ ”
n.­477
Golden 121a1–2 yongs su brtags pa; D yongs su btags pa “labeled,” “designated.”
n.­478
More exactly, “bodhisattvahood” (byang chub sems dpa’ nyid).
n.­479
khri brgyad 6.­69; 6.­5 has the same slightly abbreviated list.
n.­480
Golden 112a6, D delete de. This is a name for the Vaiśeṣikas.
n.­481
The sequence of questions and responses goes up to khri brgyad 6.­49.
n.­482
khri brgyad 6.­47.
n.­483
khri brgyad 6.­50.
n.­484
khri brgyad 6.­53.
n.­485
Cf. khri brgyad 6.­57, citing 6.­5. Here again, as at Bṭ3 4.­438, citing khri brgyad 6.­68 citing 6.­5, it is noteworthy that there is only bodhisattva (as at ’bum 3.­4, nyi khri 3.­4) not bodhisattva great being.
n.­486
khri brgyad 6.­67.
n.­487
The full sentence is: “Again, Subhūti, you say, ‘I do not see that‍—namely, the phenomenon bodhisattva.’ ” Cf. khri brgyad 6.­68, citing a passage similar to 6.­4 (that has ming gi chos in place of just chos); ’bum 3.­4; nyi khri 3.­4.
n.­488
khri brgyad 6.­68.
n.­489
Nothing else, no other state of consciousness, sees the state when, ultimately, nothing sees anything.
n.­490
Golden 125a1 tha dad par de.
n.­491
Alternatively, “You cannot designate (gdags) the uncompounded without the compounded.”
n.­492
khri brgyad 6.­68.
n.­493
In the list at khri brgyad 6.­5, there are sixteen, and here there are twelve. The other nine are “one who lives, an individual, a person, one born of Manu, a child of Manu, one who does, one who feels, one who knows, and one who sees.”
n.­494
These are the six consciousnesses, such as eye consciousness, that engage with their objects. The “foundation consciousness” is the ālayavijñāna, kun gzhi shes pa, literally “basis-of-all consciousness.”
n.­495
The “afflicted thinking mind” is the kliṣṭamanas, nyon yid, the seventh of the eighth consciousnesses.
n.­496
This is the fifth of the eight parts of the exposition (listed at 2.­5) of the statement (khri brgyad 2.­1), “Here, Śāriputra, bodhisattva great beings who want to fully awaken to all dharmas in all forms should make an effort at the perfection of wisdom.”
n.­497
This is the seventh chapter, “Entry into Flawlessness,” khri brgyad 7.­1–7.­31.
n.­498
khri brgyad 7.­1.
n.­499
This should possibly be emended to “obtain the meditative stabilization gateways,” or, alternatively, it should be taken as a summary paraphrase of the whole section; cf. khri brgyad 7.­8, ’bum 4.­16–4.­18, nyi khri 4.­5–4.­6.
n.­500
K, N.
n.­501
This means they are included in the third of the four benefits listed just above, but for stylistic purposes explained later.
n.­502
“Big flaw” renders skyon chen po attested at ’bum ka 319b5, nyi khri ka 120a7. khri brgyad ka 71a1 skyon gyi spyi gtsug, and le’u brgyad ma ga 124b1 rtse mo’i skyon (“hardheadedness”), render Ghoṣa 486 bodhi­sattvasyāmaḥ or PSP 1-1: 150 bodhi­sattva­mūrdhāmaḥ more exactly; cf. Edg, s.v. mūdhāma, who comments on Ghoṣa’s reading, and Conze’s notes to LSPW pp. 119–21.
n.­503
This renders spyi bor gyur pa (mūrdhagata; usually rendered rtse mor gyur pa). Our author likely intends the second of the four divisions of the aids to knowledge that penetrates reality.
n.­504
khri brgyad, ’bum, and nyi khri omit mthun. mthun pa’i chos renders anudharma, a word specific to this context that means something is a proper practice, but it is not so from a bodhisattva’s perspective if it is polluted by a persistent negative attachment to it. Edg, s.v. undharma, cites Childers’ Pāli Dictionary, s.v. anudhammam, as an adverb meaning “in accordance with the dhamma.”
n.­505
This relates āma = skyon (“rawness,” “hardheadedness”) with āmana (“affection for something”) and hence with vikalpa (“mental construction”).
n.­506
This explains nyāma (skyon med pa) as niyā and āma; MDPL, s.v. nyāma, “way of salvation.”
n.­507
khri brgyad 7.­20.
n.­508
Correct D bden to ldan.
n.­509
khri brgyad 7.­23. Śāriputra is asking Subhūti the question.
n.­510
D; Golden 128b3 sems ma yin pa “with the mark of no thought.”
n.­511
This is the same at khri brgyad 7.­25. nyi khri 4.­19 “is then… your question… appropriate?” is better.
n.­512
This section begins the seventh of the eight subsections introduced earlier (2.­5).
n.­513
nges par ’byin pa, nairyāṇika, “cause going forth” (describing the true path) is derived from nges par ’byung ba, niryāṇa (describing the true cessation). Here nges par ’byung ba has the meaning of “going forth.” Below (4.­564) it has the additional meaning of a “definite emergence” or “escape,” and at 4.­1168 a yāna is understood as both a “going,” and a “vehicle,” and the great niryāṇa is equated with the Great Vehicle and has the meaning of “that from which going has gone.”
n.­514
Alternatively, thabs la sgrub pa may be rendered “progress in the method.” Below (4.­609) our author calls this section brtson par sgrub pa, “practice as perseverance,” and (4.­620) brtson pa’i sgrub pa “practice of perseverance,” with the practice of method as a subset.
n.­515
khri brgyad 8.­12 is closest but Subhūti, not the Lord, is speaking, and “will be near the knowledge of all aspects” is omitted.
n.­516
khri brgyad 8.­1.
n.­517
“Scripture that is authoritative about a specific instruction” (gtan la dbab pa’i bstan pa, upadeśa) is the twelfth of the twelve divisions of a buddha’s sacred speech (pravacana), an authoritative statement about a specific karmic result that has a specific karmic cause utterly hidden from any ordinary knowledge, usually a story in the Vinaya to explain particular occurrences that occasion instructions on a particular point of conduct; cf. Haribhadra (Wogihara, pp. 92–93) āgamapramāṇa (lung gi tshad ma), “valid cognition based on a scripture,” “authoritative scripture.”
n.­518
K, N gang zag gang la.
n.­519
“Uneasy” renders ’gyod pa (kaukṛtya); “done badly” (nyes par byas pa) is explaining the word based on the root kṛ (“to do”) and the suffix ku (“deviating,” “bad”).
n.­520
Golden 131b1 bzhag.
n.­521
The disgust is separate in the list in khri brgyad 8.­6; ’bum 5.­131; nyi khri 5.­10; PSP 1-1: 158, le’u brgyad ma ga 132b4 omit.
n.­522
PSP 1-2: 63 yā utpādād vā tathāgatānāṃ anutpādād vā sthitaivaiṣā dharmāṇāṃ dharmatā; khri brgyad 62.­40.
n.­523
“Breaking through” (rab tu rtogs, prativyadh); alternatively, “awaken to” (rab tu rtogs, prabudh).
n.­524
K, N mtha’; D lam (“path”).
n.­525
The Skt anya is rendered “one thing” (gzhan, anya), “something else” (gzhan, anya), “unaltered (mi ’gyur pa, ananya) suchness,” and “does not change” (mi gyur pa, anyathā-).
n.­526
khri brgyad 8.­11.
n.­527
I understand our author to be interpreting the version of the Sūtra he is reading as having three sections, the first two of which comprise the first section. He understands the passage as saying that the aggregates and so on that are the basis for designating a bodhisattva cannot be said to be wholesome, and so on, by saying the words dream and so on. LSPW renders the three as: (1) “anything to correspond to the word ‘Bodhisattva,’ ” (2) “to what, then, could that word ‘Bodhisattva[’] refer?” and (3) “the reality corresponding to ‘Bodhisattva.’ ”
n.­528
’gres renders hāraka; MW, s.v. hāraka, “a kind of prose composition.”
n.­529
Golden 134b4 ming phung po; D ming dang phung po.
n.­530
khri brgyad 8.­11, ’bum 5.­189, nyi khri 5.­15 all have gang gis kyang, not gang yang.
n.­531
khri brgyad 8.­12.
n.­532
khri brgyad 8.­22.
n.­533
khri brgyad 8.­29.
n.­534
khri brgyad 8.­12. It is noteworthy that “will be near the knowledge of all aspects” is omitted here.
n.­535
’bum 5.­191, nyi khri 5.­18, and khri brgyad 8.­14. All differ slightly in unimportant details from the passage cited here.
n.­536
This, like the earlier passage (4.­111), is important for understanding the discussion of the other-emptiness (gzhan stong) doctrine in fourteenth century Tibet.
n.­537
K, N de bzhin nyid, D de nyid, “just that” (tad eva); also “true reality” (tattva).
n.­538
Here “true dharmic nature” means the true nature that is the ultimate attribute, emptiness, and the dharma that is the possessor of that attribute (=dharmin) as something that can be said of everything, including even emptiness itself.
n.­539
A “seed syllable” (yi ge’i ’bru, vyañjana) here means an acronym.
n.­540
khri brgyad 16.­99. “Unproduced from the very beginning” renders ādy-anutpannatvād.
n.­541
khri brgyad 8.­22.
n.­542
Golden 138a1; D chos nyid gnas, “the true nature of dharmas standing.”
n.­543
khri brgyad 8.­23.
n.­544
’bum 5.­230 (ka 378a3), nyi khri 5.­24 (ka 136a4) gzugs mi rtag pa nyid kyi stong pa nyid, “emptiness of the impermanence of form.”
n.­545
This exact wording is not found in khri brgyad 8.­23, nor in ’bum 5.­230 or nyi khri 5.­26.
n.­546
’bum 5.­230 and nyi khri 5.­26.
n.­547
khri brgyad 8.­28.
n.­548
“Enactment” renders abhisaṃskāra; Conze 1973a, s.v. anabhisaṃskāra, “put together, brought together.”
n.­549
nges par ’byung ba, niryāṇa. See n.­513 to “practices that cause going forth” at 4.­501.
n.­550
’jug means khri brgyad 8.­28 (ka 82a1) snyoms ’jug.
n.­551
khri brgyad 8.­31.
n.­552
khri brgyad 8.­31.
n.­553
khri brgyad 8.­33.
n.­554
khri brgyad 8.­33.
n.­555
Cp. khri brgyad 8.­36.
n.­556
Cf. khri brgyad 8.­39, which is similar. nyi khri 5.­58 “does not fully grasp even the very limit of reality.”
n.­557
khri brgyad 8.­36, Ghoṣa 615, Gilgit 284.2 parigrāhakaṃ nopalabdhā.
n.­558
le’u brgyad ma ga 145b4–5, reading slad du’o; cf. khri brgyad 8.­39.
n.­559
khri brgyad 8.­31.
n.­560
Golden 140a2 gis.
n.­561
Golden 140a2, K, N; D “the dharma in true dharmic nature.”
n.­562
The passage being explained is khri brgyad 8.­32–8.­32. The ultimate thoroughly established phenomenon is “known” by this meditative stabilization and in that sense is its dharma, which is to say it qualifies it as its attribute or quality.
n.­563
Golden 140b1, K, N: “The completion of what has been thoroughly cleansed by all the emptinesses when all dharmas are not apprehended is ‘the knowledge of all aspects.’ ”
n.­564
K, N; D: “because a causal sign is not an affliction.”
n.­565
A conceptual mind is defined by having a causal sign as its appearing object. Here, “these” is in reference to them both, like a dream consciousness and its object, as affliction.
n.­566
This translation is based on K, N … ma rtogs pa and D de la dad pa bskyed. Aṣṭa (Wogihara p. 51) adhimukta iti veditavyo nādhigata iti; Bṭ1 na, 113a4–5, says he had faith in the absence of causal signs but did not realize simultaneously that all dharmas are without causal signs, only each (form and so on) separately (kun du rgyu ba de sngon mtshan ma med par spyod pa la dad pas dad pa’i rjes su ’brang ba zhes bya/ chos thams cad cig car mtshan ma med par ni ma rtogs kyi/ gzugs la sogs pa re re nas mtshan ma med par rtogs pa’i phyir/ nyi tse ba’i ye shes kyis zhugs zhes bya’o).
n.­567
K, N: “because it was with a partial knowledge without causal signs.”
n.­568
khri brgyad 8.­36.
n.­569
khri brgyad 8.­36 (ka 84a1–3) lags pa in place of tshul gyis; cf. nyi khri 5.­54 (ka 142b3–5), which differs but has tshul gyis.
n.­570
D bzhin du yang is a mistake for gzhan du yang.
n.­571
Cf. khri brgyad 8.­37, nyi khri 5.­55. I have not emended the citation to correspond to the explanation given immediately below.
n.­572
The other editions are the same with minor variations. Cf. khri brgyad 8.­37: “any dharma with which he might know, or which he might know, or which he will come to know.”
n.­573
’bum 5.­442 (kha 34a6), nyi khri 5.­56, le’u brgyad ma ga 145b1, LSPW p. 135 “gone to a beyond which is no beyond.”
n.­574
K, N; D adds bar du zhes bya ba smos pa ni here, as well as at the end, suggesting a short passage has dropped out of the text at this point explaining “interim” as meaning until “prayers are completed, up to until the eighteen distinct attributes are completed.” This would then be followed by the nearly identical passage that follows, perhaps expanding on a different etymology for parāntarā.
n.­575
khri brgyad 8.­40–8.­54.
n.­576
In each case, at khri brgyad 8.­40, the “it” is “the perfection of wisdom.” “What is it for” renders ci zhig na, kena; LSPW “whereby.” “Why” can be an inquiry about both cause and result. Below our author glosses it with nges par ’byin pa (nairyāṇikā), “causes an escape”‍—either the escape itself (what it is for) or the practice that brings it about.
n.­577
khri brgyad 8.­40–8.­43.
n.­578
khri brgyad 8.­45.
n.­579
nyi khri 5.­76, khri brgyad 8.­48 has “form is separated from the defining mark of form.”
n.­580
khri brgyad 8.­51–8.­54.
n.­581
byed pa; Mvy 4 karaṇīya, 14 kāraka.
n.­582
D, Golden 143a1–2. khri brgyad 8.­40 (ka 85a4) de legs par mthong ba lags te, “they see it well”; nyi khri 5.­59 yang dag par mthong ba, “…perfectly.”
n.­583
khri brgyad 8.­43.
n.­584
khri brgyad, nyi khri omit “because of this one of many explanations.”
n.­585
khri brgyad 8.­50–8.­54.
n.­586
Emend shA ri bus to shA ri bu.
n.­587
Earlier (4.­501) our author calls this division “the practice of method.” Here (F.104.a) he calls this section brtson par sgrub pa, “practice as perseverance,” and (4.­620, F.105.a) brtson pa’i sgrub pa “practice of perseverance,” with the practice of method as a subset.
n.­588
khri brgyad 9.­1–9.­17.
n.­589
khri brgyad 9.­4.
n.­590
khri brgyad 9.­6–9.­10.
n.­591
“Possess” (gnas, adhisthā), “form a notion” (kun tu shes, saṃjñā), and “believe” (mos, adhimuc). In “mental error,” the “mind” (citta) is a basic awareness or bare thought; “perception” (’du shes, saṃjñā) is the discrimination or naming of the known; and “philosophical view” (dṛṣṭi) is a belief formed about what is known.
n.­592
Here “practice without apprehending” (mi dmigs par), as at nyi khri 6.­10 (ka 151b4–152a1), is rendering PSP 1-1: 182, Ghoṣa 824, Gilgit 291.7 nopaiti (na upa-i), literally “go near”; and LSPW “approaches.” khri brgyad 9.­15 (ka 90a3) renders it consistently by khas len (“assert”): “If, while practicing the perfection of wisdom they assert (khas len) any dharma, they are not practicing the perfection of wisdom.”
n.­593
khri brgyad 9.­12.
n.­594
4.­282–4.­285. They will be explained in more detail later (4.­541–4.­551).
n.­595
khri brgyad 9.­15 (ka 90a2–7) has khas len (“assert”) in place of dmigs.
n.­596
khri brgyad 9.­15; cp. nyi khri 6.­12.
n.­597
khri brgyad 9.­17.
n.­598
khri brgyad 9.­17; cf. PSP 1-1: 182, Ghoṣa 824, Gilgit 291.9.
n.­599
khri brgyad 9.­18–10.­68.
n.­600
khri brgyad 9.­18.
n.­601
khri brgyad 10.­1–10.­23.
n.­602
khri brgyad 10.­25–10.­68.
n.­603
Cf. nyi khri 6.­16, khri brgyad 9.­18. The sarva­dharmānutpāda is the first in the list of meditative stabilizations.
n.­604
Emend rtog to rtogs.
n.­605
khri brgyad 9.­25.
n.­606
’bum 6.­166, nyi khri 6.­22: “I am in meditative equipoise”; “I am entering into meditative equipoise”; “I will be in meditative equipoise”; and “the meditative equipoise will have happened” (mnyam par gzhag par gyur to).
n.­607
nyi khri 6.­26. The word saṃjñā (“notion,” “name,” and “discrimination,” “perception”) is rendered ’du shes here and in ’bum and nyi khri, and kun tu shes in khri brgyad 9.­29 (ka 93a7).
n.­608
nyi khri 6.­28; Gilgit 294.6 avidya­mānatvena.
n.­609
nyi khri 6.­30; cf. khri brgyad 9.­33.
n.­610
khri brgyad 9.­35.
n.­611
“All” means both self and dharmas.
n.­612
“Do not exist” (yod pa ma yin, na saṃvidyante).
n.­613
khri brgyad 9.­42; nyi khri 6.­36 de’i phyir med ces bya’o. Skt vid means both “know” and “exist.”
n.­614
bka’ stsal identifies what is said by the Lord.
n.­615
khri brgyad 9.­44.
n.­616
khri brgyad 9.­45.
n.­617
khri brgyad 9.­49.
n.­618
khri brgyad 9.­52.
n.­619
khri brgyad 9.­56–9.­59.
n.­620
khri brgyad 10.­1.
n.­621
khri brgyad 10.­2.
n.­622
khri brgyad 10.­9.
n.­623
khri brgyad 10.­12.
n.­624
khri brgyad 10.­13–10.­15.
n.­625
Cf. khri brgyad 10.­22, nyi khri 7.­17.
n.­626
khri brgyad 10.­24.
n.­627
Both khri brgyad ka 100b6 and nyi khri ka 162b3 omit the last part.
n.­628
khri brgyad 10.­26.
n.­630
khri brgyad 10.­27.
n.­631
Cf. khri brgyad 10.­27–10.­30, nyi khri 7.­23-7.­24. Our author perhaps intends that even the analytic understanding, each explanation of which is preceded and followed by these two extracts, is included in the completion of the six perfections, which are explicitly explained from this point on.
n.­632
khri brgyad 10.­40.
n.­633
khri brgyad 10.­43–10.­48.
n.­634
khri brgyad 10.­49 (10.­50 “apprehend a perfection of wisdom while cultivating it, and falsely project it as the perfection of wisdom”), up to khri brgyad 10.­58.
n.­635
Our author is either following a different version of the Sūtra or this is a corrupt reading. khri brgyad 10.­58, “Lord, why does a bodhisattva great being fall into the clutches of a bad friend,” makes better sense.
n.­636
khri brgyad 10.­68.
n.­637
This is the last of the eight sections given earlier (2.­5), glossed (2.­14) as “the specific instruction for coming to an authoritative conclusion about this brief exposition in terms of the basis in reality and the characteristic marks.”
n.­638
2.­1, citing khri brgyad 2.­1.
n.­639
padārtha (“meaning of the words”) is explained more fully earlier in the notes n.­246 and n.­242 to 2.­14.
n.­640
khri brgyad 11.­1–20.­106. The wording of some of the questions does not exactly follow the later wording found in the Sūtra. Furthermore, the first two, and possibly even the first three, are grouped together as one question in the later explanation. The statements that are not obvious questions are to be understood as rhetorical questions, repeating the words of the Lord with an implicit “You mean to say, then, that…?”
n.­641
4.­1169; khri brgyad 19.­1.
n.­642
This and all the remaining questions and responses are at khri brgyad 20.­1–20.­106. First are the statements made by Subhūti (20.­8–20.­10) that are then queried by Śāriputra (20.­11), and then answered by Subhūti up to the end of the chapter (20.­106).
n.­643
Here it says there are twenty-eight questions, and later (6.­57) it references the last in the list as the twenty-eighth question. Later (4.­1247) it will say there is a list of twenty-nine questions. Below, the third question is introduced as the second, so the first two in the list are explained as just one question: “Why do you say bodhisattva great being?” Furthermore, because the response of Pūrṇa to why a bodhisattva is a great being incorporates the third in the list, our author incorporates it, in the body of his explanation, into a first, expanded question.
n.­644
khri brgyad 21.­1–21.­97.
n.­645
khri brgyad 11.­2 and nyi khri 8.­2 both differ slightly.
n.­646
A bodhi-sattva is an “awakening-being.”
n.­647
khri brgyad 11.­2.
n.­648
“Heroic being” is a literal rendering of the Tib sems dpa’, a translation that in turn renders the second half of the older word bodhisatva before its Sanskritization to bodhisattva. It is elsewhere rendered into English consistently as “[bodhi]sattva.”
n.­649
phung po lnga’i gzhi med do. Probably the author intends to say there is no bodhisattva over and above the aggregates, and in that sense they are not the basis.
n.­650
K, N. D byang chub sems dpa’.
n.­651
khri brgyad 11.­16.
n.­652
K, N. D: “Just as a basis for nirvāṇa and saṃsāra does not exist, similarly…”
n.­653
In the earlier list padārtha was rendered gzhi’i don, “a basis in reality for.”
n.­654
khri brgyad 11.­17 gzhi med; nyi khri 8.­19 gnas med.
n.­655
khri brgyad 11.­20 (ka 112b2) has rnam par byang ba med pa’i gzhi in place of med pa la gzhi.
n.­656
“Ultimate” renders don dam pa; in the list given earlier it’s don med pa (“unreal”).
n.­657
nyi khri 8.­26 (ka 183b7–184a1) gnas in place of gzhi; khri brgyad 11.­25 (ka 113a3) omits mtshan ma’i; the other examples are up to khri brgyad 11.­29.
n.­658
nyi khri 8.­29 (ka 184b5) gnas for gzhi; khri brgyad 11.­30 (ka 113b2) incorrectly adds mun pa’i, “a basis for darkness.”
n.­659
khri brgyad 11.­31–11.­32.
n.­660
khri brgyad 11.­33.
n.­661
D dpyod pa med pa (Golden 158b1 spyod pa med pa is wrong) is based on the root rūp, “to investigate”; khri brgyad 11.­33 (ka 113b6), nyi khri 8.­29 (ka 185a3) “formless” (gzugs med pa).
n.­662
nyi khri 8.­29 (185a4), le’u brgyad ma ga 181a5; khri brgyad 11.­33 (ka 113b7), ’bum 8.­74 (ga 60a7) omit chags pa; cf. Gilgit 310.10 asattāyām, Ghoṣa 1257 asaṅgatatāyām, PSP 1-2: 24 asaktatāyām asadbhūtatāyāṃ.
n.­663
khri brgyad 11.­50, likely a later “improvement” of an earlier reading like Ghoṣa 1263 akalpanāvikalpanātām upādāya. ’bum 8.­91 (ga 64b4) rtog pa myed cing / rnam par rtog pa myed pa; similarly, le’u brgyad ma ga 184a7.
n.­664
khri brgyad 11.­51.
n.­665
khri brgyad 11.­52–11.­72.
n.­666
khri brgyad 12.­3–12.­5.
n.­667
khri brgyad 12.­7–12.­19.
n.­668
If the text is emended to byang chub sems pa sems pa chen po zhes it would mean “this ‘bodhisattva great being’ is called a ‘great being.’ ”
n.­669
khri brgyad 13.­2–13.­35.
n.­670
khri brgyad 11.­54.
n.­671
“Many” (mang po) is a reading not attested either in khri brgyad ka 117a1 phal po che, or in nyi khri 8.­46 (ka 188b3) nges pa’i phul byed pa. Mvy 5075 gives phal po che as a translation of nicaya; Gilgit 313.8 niyatasya.
n.­672
Cf. nyi khri 8.­48, khri brgyad 11.­56.
n.­673
khri brgyad 11.­58.
n.­674
khri brgyad 11.­59.
n.­675
khri brgyad 11.­60.
n.­676
khri brgyad 11.­63–11.­72.
n.­677
khri brgyad 11.­63 “unbroken unity” is the LSPW rendering of asaṃbheda (dbyer med pa).
n.­678
khri brgyad 12.­3.
n.­679
Golden 161a4, khri brgyad 12.­5, nyi khri 8.­62.
n.­680
nyi khri 8.­73; cf. Ghoṣa 1292 acittatvāt tatrāpi citte ’sakta iti; referenced at khri brgyad 12.­16.
n.­681
khri brgyad 12.­9.
n.­682
khri brgyad 12.­9.
n.­683
“Venerable Subhūti, you said, ‘Even to that thought of all-knowing that is without outflows and does not belong they are unattached.’ ”
n.­684
nyi khri 8.­69; khri brgyad 12.­12 (ka 120b5) renders paryāpanna (“belong to”) khongs su gtogs pa.
n.­685
nyi khri 8.­73.
n.­686
khri brgyad 13.­2.
n.­687
khri brgyad 13.­4.
n.­688
nyi khri 8.­79 (ka 195a3), ’bum 8.­173 (ga 93a1) have de tsam gyis na, “to that extent,” in place of de phyir, “therefore”; khri brgyad 13.­5 (ka 122b4) omits this final statement.
n.­689
nyi khri 8.­80, ’bum 8.­174, Ghoṣa 1302; cf. khri brgyad 13.­6 ff.
n.­690
nyi khri 8.­120, khri brgyad 13.­35.
n.­691
Cf. le’u brgyad ma ga 190a5 yongs su bcad pas; khri brgyad 13.­5 (ka 122b2), nyi khri 8.­79 (ka 194b4) yongs su dpag pas.
n.­692
khri brgyad 13.­6.
n.­693
rang bzhin gyis (prākṛta) means when the perfection of giving is the focus in each of the six explanations.
n.­694
Cf. khri brgyad 13.­7.
n.­695
Cf. khri brgyad 13.­11.
n.­696
Cf. khri brgyad 11.­56, nyi khri 8.­86; ’bum 8.­169, Ghoṣa 1310 ayam… ṣaṭpāramitā­mahā­sannāhaḥ.
n.­697
Cf. nyi khri 8.­87.
n.­698
This is an brief summary of khri brgyad 13.­13–13.­34.
n.­700
khri brgyad 13.­36. Śāriputra asks the question.
n.­701
khri brgyad 13.­64.
n.­702
This is the first of the ten.
n.­703
The twelve are the three sets of concentrations, immeasurables, and absorptions.
n.­704
khri brgyad 13.­42. Below (4.­1300) our author says, “Names, designations, conventional terms and so on are ‘reasons’ [or ‘tokens’]; defining marks and behaviors are ‘signs.’ ” Both of these explain “attributes” (ākāra, rnam pa), the aspects of a particular thing that make up its identity. They pay attention to the attributes and so on of space because, like space, all the different meditative states are ultimately the same, without any intrinsic nature.
n.­705
khri brgyad 13.­42, nyi khri 8.­123.
n.­706
The difference between the first and the second is that in the first the twelve‍—the concentrations and so on‍—are the focus, and in the second the six perfections are. In both cases the giving, morality, and so on are in the form of an altruistically motivated meditation practice that accomplishes the different meditative states.
n.­707
khri brgyad 13.­50; cf. nyi khri 8.­131 (ka 203a4) that omits drug gi.
n.­708
khri brgyad 13.­51.
n.­709
khri brgyad 13.­52–13.­58.
n.­710
khri brgyad 13.­59, nyi khri 8.­139 shes, (“knowledge of”) the emptinesses.
n.­711
khri brgyad 13.­60.
n.­712
khri brgyad 13.­61. “Not without knowledge” explains “by way of not apprehending anything.”
n.­713
khri brgyad 13.­62.
n.­714
khri brgyad 13.­63.
n.­715
khri brgyad 13.­64.
n.­716
“Stand in” renders gnas. ’bum 8.­250 (ga 112b1), nyi khri 8.­145 (ka 205a3) gnas; khri brgyad 13.­65 (ka 130a2), ’bum 8.­251 (ga 112b3), nyi khri 8.­145 (ka 205a5) yang dag par gnas; PSP 1-2: 44, Ghoṣa 1329 samārūḍha; le’u brgyad ma ga 200a1 zhugs, ga 200a2 ’dzeg pa; Abhi­samayālaṃkāra 1.45d (Amano, p. 25) adhirohinī; mngon rtog rgyan, Degé Tengyur (shes phyin, ka), 4a6 ’dzegs.
n.­717
yang dag par gnas; PSP 1-2: 44 ārohati, Gilgit 321.1 samārohati, “mount up on.”
n.­718
khri brgyad 13.­66 (ka 130a3) yang dag par gnas: “bodhisattva great beings practicing the perfection of wisdom mount up on.”
n.­719
“They” means the nonconceptual perfections at the eighth bodhisattva level.
n.­720
khri brgyad 13.­67. Alternatively, “because of a disintegration of meditation” or “in order to cause a disintegration.” Ghoṣa 1331, PSP 1-2: 44 bhāvanāvibhāvanārthena; le’u brgyad ma ga 200b1 bsgom pa rnam par gzhig pa’i don du; ’bum 8.­253 (ga 113b1), nyi khri 8.­147 (ka 205b1) bsgom pa rnam par bsgom pa’i don du, “in order to develop a meditation”; LSPW p. 184 “a development in the sense of annihilation.” It is noteworthy that the translators of khri brgyad consistently render vibhāvanā by bsgom par rnam par ’jig pa, “a disintegration of meditation,” and at khri brgyad 51.­78 (kha 206b) by bshig pa, the past tense of ’jig pa; cf. Bṭ3 5.­1229 explaining khri brgyad 69.­42 ff. In general, bhāvanā is “meditation”; vibhava / vibhāva is a bahuvrihi (vigato bhāvo yasya), “devoid of existence”; vibhāvanā (rnam par ’jig pa), “disintegration of meditation”; and bhāva “existent thing,” all from root bhū, cognate with the English “be.”
n.­721
khri brgyad 13.­68–13.­70.
n.­722
khri brgyad 14.­1.
n.­723
Golden 167a2, cf. khri brgyad 14.­34 and 14.­40; D gnyis pa, “second.” Even though it is clear that the section of the text our author is explaining is khri brgyad 14.­1–14.­53, it is not clear whether the eleven sections are the nine and the two sections introduced by Subhūti’s two statements with “The way I understand,” or whether the section beginning 14.­34 should be understood as itself divided into eleven sections.
n.­724
khri brgyad 14.­2–14.­8.
n.­725
khri brgyad 14.­9–14.­26.
n.­726
khri brgyad 14.­27–14.­30.
n.­727
khri brgyad 14.­31–14.­33.
n.­728
khri brgyad 14.­34.
n.­729
khri brgyad 14.­34.
n.­730
khri brgyad 14.­35.
n.­731
khri brgyad 14.­37 and 14.­38; khri brgyad ka 139b3 gtan med in place of shin tu med.
n.­732
khri brgyad 14.­38.
n.­733
khri brgyad 14.­40.
n.­734
khri brgyad 14.­46 (ka 140b7) gzugs nyid med pa’i phyir; nyi khri 8.­202 (ka 217b1), le’u brgyad ma ga 214a2 gzugs med pa’i phyir. It is perhaps odd to write gzugs med nyid kyi phyir in Tib. The asattva here, like the sattva in sarve sattvāḥ and bodhisattva, means more than just a state of nonexistence; LSPW “nonbeingness.”
n.­735
khri brgyad 14.­44.
n.­736
This is the sixth of the twenty-eight or twenty-nine questions listed earlier (4.­678). The numbering here jumps to six, leaving out four and five, because the first three questions go together as 1a, 1b, and 1c, followed by 2 and then 3.
n.­737
This is in Pūrṇa’s explanation of a great being, khri brgyad 13.­2 ff.
n.­738
Subhūti’s five questions at khri brgyad 15.­1, are: “Lord, what is the Great Vehicle of bodhisattva great beings? Lord, to just what extent should bodhisattva great beings be known to have set out in the Great Vehicle? Where will the Great Vehicle have set out? Where will the Great Vehicle stand? Who will go forth in the Great Vehicle?” Below (Bṭ3 4.­1168–4.­1169) our author will say that the responses to them first explain the Great Vehicle in the context of setting out, and then, arising out of the response to the last question (khri brgyad 18.­36, “Who will go forth in the Great Vehicle?”) there is an explanation of the Great Vehicle in the context of the result, beginning with the statement (khri brgyad 19.­1), “Lord, you say this‍—‘Great Vehicle’‍—again and again. It surpasses the world with its gods, humans, and asuras and goes forth; that is why it is called a Great Vehicle.”
n.­739
“Effort” (pradhāna) should also be understood as incorporating the Tib spong ba (prahāṇa), “abandonment.”
n.­740
In the list in the khri brgyad, insofar as the next in the list of the twenty-one Great Vehicles is “the Great Vehicle of the ten powers,” the five absorptions are a general term including (1) the four immeasurables, (2) the four concentrations, (3) the four formless absorptions, (4) the eight deliverances, and (5) the nine successive absorption stations.
n.­741
Our author begins with an explanation of the second Great Vehicle because he has already explained the six perfections in response to the earlier question.
n.­742
The section begins from khri brgyad 15.­10 and goes up to 15.­34. The extract is from 15.­11.
n.­743
D dngos po, vastu (“real basis”); K, N mig gis dngos por med do, “they do not exist in actual fact (vastutaḥ) as eyes.” Alternatively, taking dngos po as rendering bhāva (“existent thing,” “real thing”) and dngos po med pa as rendering abhāva (“nonexistent thing,” “unreal thing”): “it means the nonexistence in eyes of eyes as a real thing.”
n.­744
Alternatively, “that nonexistence in eyes of eyes as a real thing (dngos po med pa nyid, abhāvatā) is their basic nature (prakṛti), their intrinsic nature (svabhāva).”
n.­745
khri brgyad 15.­17, explaining “the emptiness of ultimate reality.”
n.­746
K, N “ultimate nirvāṇa is empty of falsely imagined nirvāṇa.”
n.­747
K, N rtog pa dang bcas pa; D “The system (tshul, naya) of some in the Śrāvaka Vehicle who have realization (rtogs pa dang bcas pa) is not like that.” It does not make sense to understand rtog pa dang bcas pa as savitarka in the technical sense specific to the first concentration, as “The mode of some in the Śrāvaka Vehicle with applied thought is like that.”
n.­748
This is explaining the emptiness of the uncompounded.
n.­749
At khri brgyad 15.­20 (ka 144b7) “extreme” (mtha’, anta) is rendered “limit.”
n.­750
khri brgyad 15.­21.
n.­751
K, Golden 170b6 ma yin gyi; D yin gyi, “is posited.”
n.­752
Here “that which possesses an attribute” and “possessor of an attribute” render dharmin and “attribute” renders dharma. Every attribute can be a possessor of an attribute, and vice versa. Thus anything‍—for instance, a basic nature‍—can be qualified by an attribute. At such a time it is that which possesses an attribute. Or a basic nature can be the attribute of anything‍—for instance, a person. But when you say “basic nature” you have willy-nilly expressed something that as an attribute will be the ultimate reality of that thing, and in that sense cannot be said to be an attribute of it.
n.­753
khri brgyad 15.­24.
n.­754
Golden 171a5 gi; D gis.
n.­755
khri brgyad 15.­26: “Any past, future, or present dharma cannot be apprehended.”
n.­756
The same compound abhāva­svabhāva­śūnyatā (with the same Tib translation) is rendered “the emptiness that is the nonexistence of an intrinsic nature” at khri brgyad 15.­29. Our author’s interpretation requires this different translation.
n.­757
khri brgyad 15.­29.
n.­758
This explanation takes the initial negation prefix a- in the Skt. compound word abhāvasvabhāva as going with both bhāva (“existent thing”) and svabhāva (“intrinsic nature”) separately, giving bhāva (“existent thing”) and its negation abhāva (“nonexistent thing, nonexistence”), and svabhāva (“intrinsic nature”) and its negation parabhāva (“nature from something else”). It understands the compound to be teaching the emptiness of these four things.
n.­759
Alternatively, “ ‘Existent thing,’ bhāva, is a form derived (de las byung ba, tatpratyaya) [from the root bhū, cognate with English “be”].”
n.­760
śūra.
n.­761
khri brgyad 16.­1.
n.­762
“Application” (stressing the action rather than the object acted upon) and “foundation” (stressing the object of mindfulness) both render upasthāna. It is hard to see how “the foundation” (upasthāna) of mindfulness, in the sense of its object‍—the body, for example‍—could be the Great Vehicle.
n.­763
The la in bzhi la is a connective; it does not mark the object of mindfulness.
n.­764
The explanation of the Great Vehicle is khri brgyad 16.­2–16.­3; the six parts in accord with the śrāvaka system are khri brgyad 16.­4–16.­19. The six are given below at Bṭ3 4.­839.
n.­765
gzugs (rūpa) in this section is equivalent to the “form” in gzugs kyi phung po (rūpaskandha), that is, it is akin to “material.” It does not mean just the body as a shape (gzugs, rūpa).
n.­766
“Threefold” means as inner, outer, and both.
n.­767
“Element” (’byung ba, bhūta); cf. Mppś English, vol. 3, p. 965: “the five objects (viṣaya), color (rūpa), etc., are the outer body,” and “the four great elements (bhautikarūpa), etc., are the outer body.”
n.­768
This glosses the anu (“after, again”) in anupaśyin with anutarka.
n.­769
K, N: “He ‘is a viewer’ investigating and reflecting on an inner body as ‘the body.’ ”
n.­770
The five “obstructions” (sgrib pa, nīvaraṇa) are greed that causes you to act on the desire for sense gratification (kāmacchanda), malice (vyāpāda), drowsiness and dozing (sthyānamiddha), gross mental excitement and uneasiness (auddhatyakaukṛtya), and vicikitsā; cf. Abhidharmakośa 5.58d–59.
n.­771
’bum 9.­3.
n.­772
gardhanaiṣkramyāśrita­bhedena; cf. Abhi­dharma­kośa­bhāṣya on Abhidharmakośa 3.35 (Śastri, 489).
n.­773
khri brgyad 3.­129, gives the full list.
n.­774
This is explaining the mindfulness of dharmas; cf. khri brgyad 16.­3: “They dwell while viewing in dharmas outer feelings, mind, and outer dharmas, and dwell while viewing in dharmas inner and outer feelings, mind, and inner and outer dharmas by way of not apprehending anything, and without indulging in speculations to do with the body.”
n.­775
khri brgyad 16.­4.
n.­776
The “second” is the teaching from the viewpoint of being clearly conscious, khri brgyad 16.­5.
n.­777
’chos pa ’bum, ga 179a5; Jäschke, s.v. ’chos 2: “a secondary form of ’cha.”
n.­778
MW, s.v. prahara, an eighth of a day (about three hours).
n.­779
I have emended gsum to gsum pa, “third.” Alternatively, D, Golden 177a6 gsum (“three”) would be this viewpoint together with the fourth (constituents) and fifth (thirty-two unclean aspects) viewpoints our author touches on in passing below.
n.­780
khri brgyad 16.­6.
n.­781
khri brgyad 16.­8.
n.­782
khri brgyad 16.­9–16.­19.
n.­783
khri brgyad 16.­9–16.­19: “This body too is of such a quality…”
n.­784
Golden 178a1; khri brgyad 16.­10: “does not avoid having that as its natural state.”
n.­785
This section explains the nine unpleasantnesses, listed below, in connection with the nine perceptions of the stages in the decomposition of the body. They have been listed earlier in the Sūtra as the bloated corpse perception, and the cleaned-out-by-worms, putrid, bloodied, black-and-blue, savaged, torn-asunder, bare-bones, and burnt-bones perceptions (at khri brgyad 2.­4); or the perception of a bloated corpse, of it chopped in half, of it as putrid, the bloodied perception, and the black-and-blue, savaged, torn-asunder, bones, and burnt-bones perceptions (at khri brgyad 11.­36).
n.­786
khri brgyad 16.­13.
n.­787
When there is no longer any blood, flesh, or sinew left.
n.­788
khri brgyad 16.­17–16.­19.
n.­789
Alternatively, “There is an explanation of mindfulness to the body in thirteen parts: five viewing a body that has consciousness, and eight unpleasantnesses where there is no consciousness.” If translated like that I am unclear how our author arrives at a total of fifteen sections.
n.­790
This is the second of the sets of dharmas included in the thirty-seven dharmas on the side of awakening. spong ba (prahāṇa) should also be understood as “effort” (pradhāna).
n.­791
Tib spong ba renders prahāṇa.
n.­792
Tib ’jog pa (“put to work”), literally “place,” renders pradhāna, more usually rtsol ba “exertion, effort.” Alternatively, “because it places the goal before the mind” (praṇidhatte); cp. samādhi, a stability of mind.
n.­793
They generate “the desire not to produce wrong unwholesome dharmas not yet produced,” “the desire to abandon wrong unwholesome dharmas already produced,” “to desire to produce wholesome dharmas not yet produced,” and “the desire that wholesome dharmas already produced will remain, will increase, will not be forgotten, will not degenerate, and will be completed.”
n.­794
Ratnākaraśānti’s Śuddhamatī (dag ldan, Degé Tengyur [shes phyin, ta], 110a4–5) and Abhayākaragupta’s Marmakaumudī (gnad kyi zla ’od, Degé Tengyur [shes phyin, da], 57b3–4) have the same names for all four.
n.­795
Golden 178b6 tshegs.
n.­796
This is the third of the sets of dharmas included in the thirty-seven dharmas on the side of awakening.
n.­797
Here spong ba’i ’du byed (prahāṇa­saṃskāra), literally “abandonment effort,” means “volitional effort,” specifically the eight factors involved in the effort to eliminate the five faults that prevent calm abiding. Madhyānta­vibhāga 4.3–5 (see also the commentary on Mahā­yāna­sūtrālaṃkāra 18.53) says the five faults are laziness, forgetting the instructions, dullness and excitement, not trying, and trying; yearning, resolve (vyāyāma), faith, pliability, mindfulness, introspection, intention, and equanimity are the eight dharmas that counteract those five.
n.­798
khri brgyad 16.­22. This is the fourth of the sets of dharmas included in the thirty-seven dharmas on the side of awakening.
n.­799
The “preparation for reality” is the aid to knowledge that penetrates true reality, the “certainty.” The conditions governing it are the mental stability and insight taught as the four limbs of miraculous power.
n.­801
khri brgyad 16.­26–16.­30.
n.­802
It is difficult to conclusively determine the meaning of these explanations of the three gateways. Brunnhölzl (2011, p. 38) discusses them and Hong (2018, pp. 586–89) is a critique of Brunnhölzl.
n.­803
Cf. nyi khri 9.­26, khri brgyad 16.­27.
n.­804
Cf. khri brgyad 16.­29; nyi khri 9.­26: “ ‘all dharmas cannot be occasioned/created by karma’ so the stability of mind when not occasioning anything/creating karma is the wishlessness…” Cp. Brunnhölzl 2011, p. 38.
n.­805
Cf. khri brgyad 16.­32, nyi khri 9.­27.
n.­806
Emend D, Golden 183a3 byas pa srung ba can gyi sa to Mvy byas pa (b)srang ba’i sa, or (4.­1139) byas pa rtogs pa can gyi sa where in explaining the list at khri brgyad 17.­128 it says it is the level of the worthy one “who has done the work to be done.”
n.­807
Our author is saying the “knowledge of extinction” is the unobstructed path of seeing and this “knowledge of nonproduction” is the path of freedom.
n.­808
The dharma is the ultimate attribute, the nonproduction or emptiness that qualifies the subject.
n.­809
This is a gloss of “subsequent” realization (rjes su rtogs pa, anvaya) with “inference” (rjes su dpag pa, anumā).
n.­810
This translation is a conjecture. kha cig kho nar perhaps renders apare eva, that is, the speaker in contrast to pare (pha rol), “somebody else.” “Conventional” renders saṃvṛti/saṃvṛta, which means “totally covering” or “totally covered.”
n.­811
This is playing with the words paricaya (“familiarity”) and parijaya (“totally vanquishing”), and bhāvanā (“meditation”) and abhibhāva (“domination”).
n.­812
“The earlier one” may be the earlier knowledge of extinction, or it may be the paricaya (“familiarity”) just explained earlier than the parijaya (“totally vanquishing”), or it may be in reference to the earlier (4.­31) explanation of mastery when a bodhisattva knows but does not experience the result of stream enterer and so on.
n.­813
Both are the paths of seeing and meditation.
n.­814
khri brgyad 16.­51 ff.
n.­815
khri brgyad 16.­52–16.­53.
n.­816
Alternatively, “apprehends the eight worldly dharmas as being the same.” The idea is that the person is in a detached state where the laws no longer operate.
n.­817
khri brgyad 16.­54.
n.­818
kāma (“sense object”) means both the desire for the pleasure from the objects of the senses‍—color, smell and so on‍—and the objects of the senses themselves, the “bases.”
n.­819
The “desired aim” is śamatha (“calm abiding”). Here gnas ngan len (dauṣṭhūlya) does not mean the final basis of suffering, the last traces or residual impressions obstructing the attainment of the final goal of nirvāṇa or full awakening, but rather the defective states (gnas ngan len) removed by the absence of effort leading to a fully qualified śamatha. Cf. Vasubandhu’s Āryākṣaya­mati­nirdeśaṭīkā (’phags pa blo gros mi zad pas bstan pa rgya cher ’grel pa [mdo ’grel, ci], 150a).
n.­820
nye bar ’jog pa. This is also the term used for the fourth of the nine stages leading to śamatha.
n.­821
LC, s.v. mang tu gnas, questions the meaning of bahuvihāra. I have conjectured it means “stay at their post,” having in mind that a practitioner, balancing śamatha and vipaśyana, utilizes an insightful introspection to make sure the earlier attractions to the qualities of the lower concentrations do not arise.
n.­822
The four are pleasure, suffering, mental happiness, and mental unhappiness.
n.­823
khri brgyad 16.­59.
n.­825
khri brgyad 16.­71–16.­80.
n.­826
Our author’s presentation is a paraphrase of, and often a direct citation from, The Teaching on the Great Compassion of the Tathāgata (Toh 147, Tathāgata­mahā­karuṇā­nirdeśa­sūtra) 2.­258 ff. (Burchardi 2020), cited in the AAV (Sparham 2006–11, vol. 4, p. 80) by the name of the questioner, Dhāraṇīśvararāja. The same explanation is also in The Bodhisattva’s Scriptural Collection of the Heap of Jewels collection (byang chub sems dpa’i sde snod, Degé Kangyur [dkon brtsegs, ga], 11a ff.). Mppś English (vol. 3, p. 1239 ff.) lists earlier sources for the powers, including the Majjhimanikāya.
n.­827
skyon med pa, literally “flawlessness”; TMN 2.­258 (185a4) nges par gyur ba.
n.­828
Alternatively, “a wife who is competitive,” “nagging”? TMN omits.
n.­829
D; so too Golden 170b3. Possibly “not going to a good form of life is impossible” has accidentally been left out.
n.­830
rjes su mthun pa’i bzod pa, Mvy ānulomikī kṣānti.
n.­831
TMN 2.­259 says it is impossible that a girl, in that very body, can become an Indra and so on, but having transformed, it is possible. This may be no stronger than saying a man, in that very body, cannot become a mother, but having changed bodies can.
n.­832
The “eighth person” (aṣṭamaka) is the candidate for the result of stream enterer, the lowest of the eight goals: candidate for, and recipient of, the results of stream enterer, once-returner, non-returner, and worthy one.
n.­833
TMN 2.­264 (187a4) ’khrul pa dmigs pa, “mistake in what they apprehend.”
n.­834
TMN 2.­275 and khri brgyad 16.­83 differ slightly; similar to Ghoṣa 1446, PSP 1-2: 83, and khri brgyad 73.­67. Mppś English (pp. 1248–58) gives a detailed explanation.
n.­835
BPS 15a1 ma ’ongs pa’i dus na dge ba’i rgyu ’byin pa de, perhaps suggesting that right and wrong beget the habits of right and wrongdoing; TMN 2.­275 (187b5) gang ma ’ongs pa’i dus na dge ba’i rgyu las byung ba ’byin pa de, “issue arising from an unwholesome cause.”
n.­836
“A superior” (khyad par) and “an inferior” (dman pa) might be the status you have in the life in which the action is undertaken, or it might be an important person you are associated with in your life who can help or hurt you, or it might be something of great value that might make you rich or put you in jail; cf. Mppś English (p. 1250): “Sometimes the action that must necessarily be experienced depends (apekṣate) on the time (kāla), a person (pudgala), and the place (sthāna) in order to undergo its retribution. Thus, a person who is to enjoy happiness in the company of a noble cakravartin king awaits the moment when the noble cakravartin king appears in the world, and that is the moment when he attains his reward: therefore, he depends on the time. He depends also on an individual, on the occurrence of the noble cakravartin king, and finally, he depends on the place, i.e., the place where the noble cakravartin king is born.” BPS 15a1–5.
n.­837
In a position of power you hurt somebody, and in a later life are thrown in jail by the ruler.
n.­838
Cf. TMN 2.­276; BPS 15a7.
n.­839
TMN takes dhātu and adhimukti together in a single section and deals with adhimukti first. Mppś English (p. 1264) takes adhimukti (“aspiration”) as the fifth power and dhātu (“acquired disposition”) as the sixth.
n.­840
This may simply mean “the world with its various places and multiplicity of regions.” A dhātu (“constituent,” “element”) is a physical constituent of the world (the earth element and so on), one of the eighteen categories (the eye, color, eye-consciousness constituent, and so on), the basic character of a person, a region of the universe, or a relic of a buddha; cf. Edg, s.v. dhātu, who cites a verse from The Stem Array (Ganda­vyūha­sūtra) 484.15–16: sattvadhātu paripācayiṣase, lokaghātu pariśodhayiṣasi, jñānadhātum uttāpayiṣyase, āśayasya tava dhātu tādṛśaḥ. (See English translation of this verse in Roberts 2021a, The Stem Array 54.­132).
n.­841
The “disposition constituent” (lhag pa’i bsam pa’i khams, adhyāśayadhātu) is distinct from an “inherited disposition” (gnas, āśaya), dealt with below. This one is deposited and then drawn on. The richer the deposit (the stronger the disposition) the more it gives rise to its concordant result. Lamotte’s translation of Kumārajīva is helpful (Mppś English, pp. 1268–70): “By acquired disposition (dhātu) is meant an accumulated habitual pattern (ācitavāsanā). The characteristics (lakṣaṇa) arise from the dhātu. The aspiration (adhimukti) functions in accord with the dhātu. Sometimes the dhātu results from the adhimukti. Habitual patterns (vāsanā) and aspirations (adhimukti) realize the dhātu. Dhātu is the lofty resolution (adhyāśaya), adhimukti arises as a result of the conditions (pratītya­samutpanna). These are the differences between adhimukti and dhātu. … The Buddha knows that beings have such and such acquired dispositions (dhātu), such and such aspirations (adhimukti), and that they come from such and such a place (sthāna).”
n.­842
TMN 2.­291 (189b7) gang gis ’jig rten bsod nams kyi ’du byed sogs pa’i khams, “[the action] on account of which there is a deposit of the collection of volitional factors for making ordinary merit.”
n.­843
An “immovable” is an action (a strong meditation habit) that will bring its maturation result (a life in a higher realm) before any other action is allowed to mature.
n.­844
Abhayākaragupta’s Muni­matālaṃkāra (thub pa’i dgongs pai rgyan Degé Tengyur [dbu ma, a], 277a6–7) khams sna tshogs pa ni bsod nams dang bsod nams ma yin pa dang mi g.yo ba la sogs pa bskyed pa’i bsam gtan no/ /mos pa sna tshogs pa la ’dir mos pa ni ’dod pa ste/ ’di ltar ’dod chags la gnas pa’i yang zhe sdang la ’dod pa dang/ zhe sdang la gnas pa’i ’dod chags la ’dod pa dang/ sbyor ba dman pa’i sbyor ba rgya chen po la dang/ sbyor ba rgya chen po’i sbyor ba dman pa la’o. The sense is, for instance, someone who is lazy by nature but quick to get angry, someone who is lecherous by nature but quick to form silly prejudices, someone who is arrogant by nature but quick to question him or herself. The place (gnas) is caused by karma, but in this life, in this place, the tendency of the person is toward a personality that easily gets angry, or a person whose basic nature is greedy and is easily swayed to anger.
n.­845
TMN 2.­309 (192b4) sems can thams cad kyi dbang po yongs su smin pa rnams… dbang po yongs su ma smin pa rnams, “faculties that have reached maturity and faculties that have not reached maturity.”
n.­846
This is a subdivision of the stream enterer.
n.­847
This is a subdivision of once-returner.
n.­848
TMN 2.­306 (192a2) sems can gang sbyin pa’i dbang po cen yin la de’ang tshul khrims la sbyor ba de la de bzhin gshegs pas dbang po mchog and mchog ma yin pa mkhyen pas sbyin pa’i gtam ston to. The sense is with this power a buddha knows, to use a modern example, a child with only the capacity to study fractions, as it were, who is studying algebra that is beyond his or her capacity. The teacher stops teaching algebra, and so on.
n.­849
Cf. TMN 2.­306.
n.­850
Ghoṣa 1446, PSP 1-2: 83 indriya­parāpara.
n.­851
I am unsure of the meaning. “Something indicating” renders mtshan ma; alternatively, “sex organs.”
n.­852
This summarizes TMN 2.­334.
n.­853
Golden 199a2.
n.­855
TMN 2.­377 ff.
n.­856
Here the gzhung (“scripture”) is probably the Dhāraṇīśvara­rāja, or The Teaching on the Great Compassion of the Tathāgata (Tathāgata­mahā­karuṇā­nirdeśa­sūtra).
n.­857
Alternatively, “their body hair does not bristle.” spu zing zhes byed (romaharṣa) can also mean the bristling of hairs because of great anxiety.
n.­858
Here a dharma means a teaching of a doctrine.
n.­859
khri brgyad 16.­95 has them in reverse order.
n.­860
Here dharma means the necessary qualifying attributes of a particular “meaning” in the sense of the basis (artha) that makes it what it is.
n.­861
Here dharma has the sense of a governing law; the “meaning” (artha) is its result in the sense of what it aims at.
n.­862
Alternatively, if taken as qualifying statements, drang dgos pa means “that require interpretation” and tshig lhur len pa means “where the words are the main thing.” Here “meanings” (artha) is in the sense of welfare, or those for whose sake something is being done.
n.­863
K, N skad gang yin pa; D sngags ’chang.
n.­864
MW, s.v. dvīpa, “island,” (citing Krishna Kanta Handiqui, Naishadhacarita of Srīharsha i.5, p. 1) says there are eighteen dvīpas that “include the upadvīpas”; Abhidharmakośa 3.53 ff. and Bhagavata­purāṇa 5.166 ff. give nine dvīpas and upadvīpas (different in each case).
n.­865
Law (1954, pp. 42–53) lists sixteen major countries (ṣoḍaśa­mahā­jana­pada, Pāli soḷasamahājanapada, places known from the early records of the Buddha’s life) as listed in the Aṅguttaranikāya (Uposathasutta, Bk. 3.71; Vitthatūposathasutta, Bk. 8.42); Ānandajoti Bhikkhu conveniently locates them (Aṅgā, Magadhā, Kāsī, Kosalā, Vajjī, Mallā, Cetī, Vaṃsā, Kurū, Pañcālā, Macchā, Sūrasenā, Assakā, Avantī, Gandhārā, and Kambojā) on a map of ancient Buddhist India.
n.­866
K, N; D “demonstration, making known, and causing mastery.”
n.­867
The passage in full is cited in Āryavimuktisena’s AAVN 65a4–65b4, AAV 126b3–127b1 (Sparham 2006–11, vol. 3, pp. 17–18); also Asvabhāva’s Mahā­yāna­saṃgrahopanibandhana (theg pa chen po bsdus pa’i bshad sbyar, Degé Tengyur [sems tsam, ri], 281a5–6).
n.­868
BPS 40a6–40b3, TMN 2.­426.
n.­869
Cf. TMN 2.­426 (205b2), BPS 40b1: dri yid du ’ong ba’i padma mngon par ’byung ste/ de la de bzhin gshegs pa’i zhabs ’jog go, “Wherever tathāgatas step down with their feet, fragrant lotuses spring up and the tathāgatas place their feet there.”
n.­870
This is paraphrasing TMN 2.­427, BPS 40b3–40b5.
n.­871
D tshig la yi ge log par ’byung ba; K, N tshig la mi dge log par ’byung ba, “swears?” But cf. AAV 126b7: nyon mongs pa’i rta gad chen po dgod pa dang/ so ’tshigs byed pa’am, steg pa’i tshul yang nye bar ston par byed de; AAVN 65a6: dantavidaṣṭakaṃ saṃdaṃṣṭatim upadarśayati, “makes a show of gnashing their teeth.”
n.­872
Paraphrasing TMN 2.­444.
n.­873
Paraphrasing TMN 2.­453–2.­476, BPS 42a7–44a6.
n.­874
Cf. TMN 2.­453, 2.­455; BPS 42b2.
n.­875
Emend bsnyel, Mvy saṃmoṣa (“have a lack of mindfulness”), Jäschke, s.v. bsnyel, “forget,” to TMN 2.­457 (208b7) mnyel, “fatigue”; BPS 42b6 ngal, “tiredness.”
n.­876
Alternatively, “Tathāgatas are also ‘not deficient in meditative stabilization (samādhi).’ In a meditative equipoise (samāhita) on the suchness of all beings and all dharmas, all dharmas are placed in an equal state (samādhīyate) through the suchness (tathatā) that is a sameness (samatā). Hence suchness is called meditative stabilization”; cf. TMN 2.­464–2.­468; BPS 43a5–43b4.
n.­877
BPS 43b4–44a1.
n.­879
K, N don med par; D don dam par.
n.­880
The list of sixty (or, rather, sixty-four) in the The Secrets of the Realized Ones (Tathāgata­guhyaka Sūtra, Toh 47) is given below (4.­1184). See also n.­948.
n.­881
Emend lngar to sngar.
n.­882
K, N rtswa is supported by TMN 213a3 and BPS ga 44a6; D has rtsa.
n.­885
D srid pa (bhava) is the tenth link of dependent origination, an intense attachment that causes rebirth. Alternatively, emend to sred pa, “clinging.”
n.­886
This is a conjectural translation. It is perhaps referencing a cessation of ordinary breath as a person enters into an ultimate, death-like state.
n.­887
Cf. chos kyi rnam pa mi dmigs pa’i phyir (Ratnākaraśānti’s Śuddhamati, dag ldan, Degé Tengyur [shes phyin, ta], 116a3).
n.­888
This is probably a gloss of khri brgyad 16.­99 (ka 166b6) zhi gnas mi dmigs pa’i phyir (“because calm abiding is unfindable”) that has dropped out of the text. Śuddhamati, dag ldan, Degé Tengyur (shes phyin, ta), 116a3 has zhi gnas med pa’i phyir ro (“because there is no calm abiding.”).
n.­889
Vasubandhu’s Abhi­dharma­kośa­bhāṣya on Abhidharmakośa 4.74 (Shastri, 689) cites “a sūtra” as the source for these sixteen. La Vallée Poussin (Pruden, vol. 2, p. 739, n. 338) cites the Dīrgha, Aṅguttara, and Majjhima Nikāyas. The context is the explanation of lies. Ignoble persons say of what they have or have not seen, and so on, that they have not or have seen it, and so on (eight ignoble uses of conventional designations), and noble persons says of each what is true (eight noble uses of conventional designations).
n.­890
’bum 9.­72 (ga 195b2); nyi khri 9.­45 (ka 246b1) chags, “attached”; LSPW pp. 213–14 “tied down.”
n.­891
khri brgyad 16.­104.
n.­892
This is the seventh of Subhūti’s twenty-eight questions at 4.­678.
n.­893
These are the five questions (khri brgyad 15.­1, cited in Bṭ3 n.­738): “Lord, what is the Great Vehicle of bodhisattva great beings? Lord, to just what extent should bodhisattva great beings be known to have set out in the Great Vehicle? Where will the Great Vehicle have set out? Where will the Great Vehicle stand? Who will go forth in the Great Vehicle?” Here the second question is framed, “How have bodhisattva great beings come to set out in the Great Vehicle?”
n.­894
khri brgyad 17.­1.
n.­895
khri brgyad 17.­13 ff.
n.­896
’bum 10.­16, le’u brgyad ma ga 239b3–4, PSP 1-2: 91; khri brgyad ka 171a2, nyi khri ka 250a4 omit.
n.­897
Cf. The Ten Bhūmis, 1.­109 (Roberts 2021b); Daśa­bhūmika­sūtra (Honda p. 136).
n.­898
Our author does not provide a gloss here for māna­stambhana­nirghātana (Ghoṣa, Gilgit), “destroy arrogant rigidity”; khri brgyad 17.­2 “purification of preventing being puffed up with pride.” Abhisamayālaṃkāra 1.50ab, PSP 1-2: 88, and LSPW p. 214 also omit this.
n.­899
From this point on our author does not provide a gloss for every purification.
n.­900
khri brgyad 17.­4 and 17.­35.
n.­901
Cf. khri brgyad 55.­21; Aṣṭa (Wogihara p. 780).
n.­902
This is an overly abbreviated version of khri brgyad 55.­22; Aṣṭa (Wogihara p. 780) says, “Bodhisattva great beings‍—that is, those in the bodhisattva great beings’ isolation‍—living in jungle, upland forest, and frontier retreats, truly live in isolation.”
n.­903
khri brgyad 17.­5 and 17.­41. The twelve ascetic practices are listed at khri brgyad 41.­6 et passim; Edg, s.v. dhūtaguṇa.
n.­904
khri brgyad 17.­42 explaining 17.­5 “not giving up training.”
n.­905
khri brgyad 17.­44 explaining 17.­5 “production of a thought associated with nirvāṇa.”
n.­906
The meaning of g.yo ba yongs su btang ba here is unclear to me.
n.­907
khri brgyad 17.­46, explaining 17.­5 “great beings’ unmixed mind” (āveṇikacitta?), probably a mistake for “uncowed mind” (avalīnacitta).
n.­908
khri brgyad 17.­77, explaining 17.­8 “settle down on the view that the Buddha should be resorted to.” The following are glossing passages down to khri brgyad 17.­90, explaining down to 17.­9: “realizing the way things are perfect.”
n.­909
K, N.
n.­910
khri brgyad 17.­93, explaining 17.­9 “the exposition of the one way things are.”
n.­911
khri brgyad 17.­95, explaining 17.­9 “reversing views.”
n.­912
khri brgyad 17.­99, explaining 17.­9 “calmed state of mind.”
n.­913
Earlier the list for the seventh level (khri brgyad 17.­9, ka 170a4–5) has “unobstructed knowledge” (shes pa thogs pa med pa) followed by “the attachment-free level” (rjes su ’chags pa’i sa ma yin pa); in the explanation (khri brgyad 17.­100) it asks the question, “What is unobstructed knowledge?” This is followed by “What is knowledge that does not enter into attachment?” (rjes su ’chags pa la mi ’jug pa’i shes pa gang). Cp. ’bum 10.­9 (ga 198b2), nyi khri 10.­8 (ga 249a6) byams pa’i skabs shes pa; Gilgit 354.7 anunayāvasarajñatā (“knowledge of opportunities for loving kindness”). Mvy skabs renders avasara; Abhi­samayālaṃkāra 1.65a sakti (“attachment” in a positive sense) is a gloss of anunaya (“loving kindness”).
n.­914
khri brgyad 17.­107, explaining 17.­10 “attend on the buddhas and properly contemplate the buddha bodies.”
n.­915
Vakkalisutta in Suttanikāya 3.119 (PTS edition, 119–20); also BPS kha 277a.
n.­916
Golden 212b4–5 sems. D sems can “purifying the field of beings‍—me and others. There is no buddhafield except the field of beings, because it is simply just a representation.” This is glossing khri brgyad 17.­110: “It is purifying the minds of all beings,” explaining 17.­10 “purification of a buddhafield.”
n.­917
khri brgyad 17.­112, explaining 17.­10 “constantly being absorbed in meditation”; samāpatti means both “completion” and “absorption.”
n.­918
khri brgyad 17.­117, explaining 17.­11.
n.­919
“Is done” renders kṛta; “knowledge” renders āvid.
n.­920
This renders kṛtāvin.
n.­921
This is the eighth of Subhūti’s twenty-eight questions (4.­678).
n.­922
This is the third of the five questions at khri brgyad 15.­1 that has gang la, “where,” in place of gang nas, “from where” here, cited in Bṭ3 n.­738.
n.­923
This is a creative etymology linking arūpin, “formless,” with (a)ruh (causal (a)ropaya/ropaṇa), “to raise up.” The author means this metaphorically: “they are not causing you to form a notion of anything.” The Tib translators have rendered this rather elegantly with gzugs, the future or nonperfect form of the voluntary (tha dad pa) root ’dzugs pa; also used as a nonvoluntary (tha mi dad pa) perfect form of the same verb, (cp. ’dzin / zin). The Tib verb has the sense of “plant,” as in “plant a flag.”
n.­924
This glosses a passage not found in the extant Skt or Tib versions of the Sūtra.
n.­926
khri brgyad 18.­12.
n.­927
Understand the word shog to be a form of zho, “yogurt, milk.”
n.­928
This is the ninth of Subhūti’s twenty-eight questions (4.­678) and the fourth of the five questions at khri brgyad 15.­1.
n.­929
khri brgyad 18.­35.
n.­930
khri brgyad 18.­36. This is the tenth of Subhūti’s twenty-eight questions (Bṭ3 4.­678) and the fifth of the five questions at khri brgyad 15.­1.
n.­931
Cf. khri brgyad 18.­38, nyi khri 10.­70, ’bum 10.­258, and Lhasa Kangyur (shes phyin, ’bum, ga 229b6–7), which omit “Lord,” framing it as a rhetorical question.”
n.­932
khri brgyad 18.­38, nyi khri 10.­70, ’bum 10.­258 all omit and start with chos kyi dbyings, “dharma-constituent.”
n.­933
khri brgyad 19.­1 ff. This is the eleventh of Subhūti’s twenty-eight questions (Bṭ3 4.­678) and goes together with the twelfth rhetorical question, “That vehicle is equal to space?” that our author introduces just below. Our author says it is the Great Vehicle as a result, following on from the earlier explanation (Bṭ3 4.­786 ff.) of the Great Vehicle as practice. The last of the five questions (khri brgyad 15.­1) leads into an explanation of the resultant Great Vehicle because it occasions the statement (khri brgyad 18.­36), “that vehicle, one who goes forth, that by which one goes forth, from where one goes forth, all those dharmas do not exist and are not apprehended.”
n.­934
Glossed in Śrījagattalanivāsin’s Āmnayānusāriṇī, man ngag gi rjes su brang ba Degé Tengyur (shes phyin, ba), 49b7–50a1.
n.­935
Here a going is called a yāna (“going,” “vehicle”). The great niryāṇa (“going forth,” “that from which going has gone,” “definite emergence,” “escape”) is the mahāyāna (“great vehicle,” “great going”). Because it surpasses the three worlds and is a definite emergence, or escape (niryāṇa), from them all, that going forth (niryāṇa) is bigger, hence it is called a Great Vehicle. I have rendered niryāṇa as “going forth” and Mahāyāna as “Great Vehicle.” The translation terms are not intended to convey all the aspects of the Skt words, but, as with the Tib translations, are lexical markers for them.
n.­936
khri brgyad 19.­2 omits “Great.”
n.­937
Alternatively, de nyid may mean “its” greatness.
n.­938
K, N; D: “It teaches it is equal to space because it has a great amount of room; because its production, stopping, and so on do not exist; because it is not included in the three time periods; and because of a threefold cause.”
n.­939
What our author intends here is that Subhūti’s opening statement (khri brgyad 19.­1) is in three parts, and the remainder of the chapter spoken by the Lord (khri brgyad 19.­5–19.­111) is structured around the three parts of Subhūti’s statement that is further broken down into five subsections, each introduced by the Lord repeating what Subhūti said (khri brgyad 19.­9 ff., 19.­41 ff., 19.­64 ff., 19.­82 ff., and 19.­97 ff., up to 19.­111).
n.­940
This is just khri brgyad 19.­5–19.­8; ’bum 11.­5–11.­8.
n.­941
These five are in Subhūti’s opening statement (khri brgyad 19.­1–19.­4).
n.­942
khri brgyad 19.­10.
n.­943
This is spelled out explicitly later at khri brgyad 19.­17 ff. Cp. Ghoṣa, who edits this section consistently with an avagraha sign bhāvo ’bhaviy[=ṣ]yan, “not existent and not not existent.”
n.­944
Alternatively, ngo bo nyid med pa’i dngos po, “a thing without an intrinsic nature.”
n.­945
The “falling hairs” in “matted falling hairs” (skra shad ’dzing pa) are imaginary strands of hair that appear as if falling in front of the eyes of people with an eye disease.
n.­946
Our author presumably means not ultimately true, only conventionally so.
n.­947
Emend chos to chos nyid.
n.­948
Secrets of the Tathāgatas Sūtra, Degé Kangyur F.133.a–133.b; MSAvyT 182b2 ff.; AAV 83a5 ff. Note that the text of the sūtra itself mentions there being sixty-four qualities rather than sixty.
n.­949
Emend brtags to brtabs.
n.­950
Emend gnyen po to mnyen po, MSAvy (Lèvi, 80) snigdha (“soft, pliable”). In this same sentence nye bar ston is either a mistake, or derived from the rten/gtan/bsten verbal complex; MSAvy (Lèvi, p. 80) upasthambhikatva.
n.­951
“Modulated” renders valgu, “quality of strength” balaguṇa.
n.­952
Cf. Edg, s.v. aneḍa, “not injurious,” “presumed to represent Skt an-enas.” Here tshugs is a nonvoluntary form.
n.­953
MW, s.v. kalā, citing the bālarāmāyaṇa.
n.­954
Pensa (113) tadvyatikrame samyag niḥsaraṇopadaiśikatva; MSAvy (Lévi, p. 80) tadvyatikramasaṃpan niḥsaraṇopadeśakatva; AAV de las ’das na nges par ’byung ba’i thabs yang dag par ston par mdzad pa, “is the means of perfect renunciation” (=niḥsaraṇopāyopadeśika).
n.­955
MSAvy prītisukha­saṃjananī; TGN, K, N dga’ bde bskyed pa.
n.­956
ston par byed pa here and for the next quality render MSAvy darśikatva and then daiśikatva; Pensa daiśikatva both times.
n.­957
sgra gsang mtho ba, perhaps reading uccāra; MSAvy, Pensa udāratva; MSAvyT, AAV rgya che ba nyid, “expansive.”
n.­958
myur du (=kṣipra) ’gyur ba’i ngang tshul can; MSAvy, Pensa abhīkṣṇa­bhaṅgara; MSAvyT, AAV rno ba dang ’jigs pa, “sharp and reverberating.”
n.­959
gal bar bya ba ma yin pa from atisṛ (Mvy atisārinī = ’gal ba); MSAvy, Pensa anatikramaṇīya; MSAvyT, AAV ’da’ bar bya ba, “not something you want to go beyond.”
n.­960
D mi rtag is a wrong reading.
n.­961
’jigs pa med pa. MSAvyT, AAV bsnyengs pa dang bral (= bhayāpagata?); MSAvy, Pensa sāvadyāpagata, “nothing wrong in it to criticize.”
n.­962
This renders chub pa? Pensa sakalā; Mvy sakhilā (Edg, “smooth, soft”); MSAvy akhilā; MSAvyT thab dang bcas pa’i ched ni/ sems can rnams kyi de dag gi don thams cad sgrub par byed pa’i phyir ro; AAV sems can rnams kyi don de dag thams cad rdzogs par mdzad pa’i phyir tha ma med pa’o; Bṭ1 na 240b3 byang chub pa.
n.­963
MSAvy, Pensa āgamita­prayuktatvāt, “it is connected with what has come down in the tradition”; MSAvyT dus la bab par rab tu sbyor ba, “is connected with the appropriate occasion”; AAV thob pa’i dus su rab tu sbyor ba, “is connected with the time of attainment”; Bṭ1 na 240b5 ma ’ongs pa’i dus na de bzhin du mi ’gyur ba, “in the future similarly does not change.”
n.­964
MSAvy, Pensa acapalā, “not too quick, does not trip over itself.”
n.­965
MSAvy, Pensa sarva­laukikārtha­dṛṣṭānta­dharma­pariṇāmitvād; MSAvyT, AAV ’jig rten pa’i don thams cad dpe’i chos su bsgyur ba, “it turns all ordinary things into examples for Dharma”; Bṭ1 na 240b6 ’jig rten pa dang ’khor las ’das pa’i don dang dpe’i chos thams cad mchog dang ldan pa, “it is endowed with excellent ordinary and transcendental meaning and example dharmas.”
n.­966
Here the “Master” (slob dpon, ācārya) would have to be Asaṅga, not Vasubandhu, if Vasubandhu is indeed our author.
n.­967
The words cited from the Sūtra have not been explicitly identified, and numbers have been added for the ease of the English-speaking reader.
n.­968
“Constituent” renders khams (dhatu), referring to khri brgyad 19.­54: “there is no first production of the thought of awakening in space,” and so on.
n.­969
“The twos” are the sets of pairs or dualities at khri brgyad 19.­58: “does not have form, is not formless, does not show itself, does not not show itself, is not blocked, is not not blocked, is not united, is not separated.” Alternatively, out author perhaps understands these to be the śrāvakas and pratyekabuddhas, and bodhisattvas and buddhas.
n.­970
The Summary of the Doctrine (chos kyi mdo) is: “All compounded phenomena are impermanent; all contaminated phenomena are suffering; all phenomena are without a self; nirvāṇa is peace”; alternatively, “All compounded things are impermanent, everything with outflows is suffering, all dharmas are selfless, and nirvāṇa is peace.” See The Questions of the Nāga King Sāgara (Sāgara­nāga­rāja­paripṛcchā). Cf. Ratnākaraśānti’s Śuddhamatī, dag ldan Degé Tengyur (shes phyin, ta), 84a3–4: chos kyi mdo bzhi ni ’du byed thams cad mi rtag pa/ zag pa dang bcas pa’i chos thams cad ni sdug bsngal ba/ chos thams cad ni bdag med pa/ mya ngan las ’das pa ni zhi ba’o.
n.­971
This is referring to khri brgyad 19.­61: “is not isolated, is not not isolated, is not light, and is not dark.”
n.­972
nyi khri 11.­55, ’bum 11.­45; khri brgyad 19.­47 (ka 198a2) gnas pa dang ’bral ba.
n.­973
I have not emended gsum to gsum pa, even though this is referencing Subhūti’s third statement repeated by the Lord at khri brgyad 19.­64. The three are the statements about beings, space, and the Great Vehicle.
n.­974
Gilgit 378.6 takes all as plurals: “it is because the states of existence are states not existing (sattvāsattā) that spaces are states not existing”; LSPW “it is because of the nonbeingness [asattā] of beings [sattva].”
n.­975
khri brgyad 19.­69.
n.­976
The context is the infinite amount of room in the Great Vehicle for an infinite amount of beings.
n.­977
Golden 223a6; D adds “twenty-six.”
n.­978
The three are beings, space, and the Great Vehicle.
n.­979
This is a brief way of saying the dharma-constituent is put in place of suchness and connected with the three‍—beings, space, and Great Vehicle‍—and then with nonexistent, infinite, countless, and beyond measure.
n.­980
The thirteen synonyms are listed with the first of the three‍—a being‍—and then connected with the very limit of reality in place of suchness, and then with nonexistence and so on.
n.­981
This usage of bkol (a perfect form of ’khol) is noteworthy.
n.­982
’bum 11.­79–11.­90 (Ghoṣa p. 1570 ff.), and nyi khri 11.­81-11.­86 spell out the six outer sense fields (a form, a sound and so on) down to the twelve links of dependent origination perfections; khri brgyad omits.
n.­983
khri brgyad 19.­74.
n.­984
’bum 11.­97 (Ghoṣa p. 1581 ff.) spells out the noble truths and so on; khri brgyad omits.
n.­985
khri brgyad 19.­76.
n.­986
Cf. ’bum 11.­110, nyi khri 11.­96, khri brgyad 19.­82.
n.­988
K, N g.yo ba; D dbye ba, “undivided.”
n.­989
“Those” are the “basic nature,” “suchness,” “intrinsic nature,” and “mark” of each of the dharmas beginning with form that “do not come, go, or remain.” I have not indicated the words in the list that are directly cited from the Sūtra.
n.­990
This complete list of synonyms beginning with “suchness,” down to “the certification of dharmas,” is not in any of the extant versions of the Sūtra I have consulted.
n.­991
This is the last of the five statements (4.­1174, n.­941).
n.­992
Gilgit 382.12, Ghoṣa p. 1618, PSP 1-2: 130; khri brgyad stong pa omit.
n.­993
Here btsal is an archaism for sel, Mvy paryudasta.
n.­994
’bum 11.­136 ff. (Ghoṣa p. 1623), nyi khri 11.­122; khri brgyad 19.­106, Gilgit 383.14, PSP 1-2: 134 omit.
n.­995
khri brgyad 19.­112.
n.­996
The remainder of Subhūti’s twenty-eight questions ( 4.­678) and the responses are khri brgyad 20.­1–20.­106. First are the statements made by Subhūti (khri brgyad 20.­8–20.­10) that are then queried by Śāriputra (khri brgyad 20.­11), and then answered by Subhūti up to the end of the chapter (khri brgyad 20.­106).
n.­997
khri brgyad 20.­1.
n.­998
khri brgyad 6.­1.
n.­999
khri brgyad 20.­7, Ghoṣa p. 1642, Gilgit 385.13.
n.­1000
The ten statements (khri brgyad 20.­8–20.­10) are (1) “one does not assert a bodhisattva at the prior limit”; (2) one has to know the limitlessness of a bodhisattva through the limitlessness of form; (3) even such an idea as ‘form is a bodhisattva’ does not exist; (4) I, who thus do not see and do not find a bodhisattva great being as anyone at all in any way at all‍—to which bodhisattva great being will I give advice and instruction in which perfection of wisdom?; (5) you say ‘bodhisattva’ is just a word; (6) you say ‘self’ again and again, but it has absolutely not come into being; (7) given that all phenomena thus have no intrinsic nature, what is that form which has come into being?; (8) what has not come into being is not form; (9) Lord, you cannot apprehend those bodhisattva great beings who would practice for awakening other than those who have not come into being, so does what has not come into being give advice and instruction in a perfection of wisdom that has not come into being?; and (10) one should know when the mind of a bodhisattva given such instruction is not cowed.
n.­1001
nyi khri 12.­9 mi dmigs. Ghoṣa p. 1642, Gilgit 385.14 nopalabhyate; PSP 1-2: 137 nopaiti; khri brgyad 20.­8 (ka 211a3) khas len, “assert.”
n.­1002
D, K, N, Golden 228a4 all read “has come into being”; khri brgyad 20.­11, nyi khri 12.­10 “has not come into being.”
n.­1003
K, N, Golden 228b1; D “has come into being.”
n.­1004
Earlier (4.­679) it says there are twenty-eight questions.
n.­1005
This is the Lord’s reply (khri brgyad 20.­3) to Subhūti when Pūrṇa asks why, having been told to talk about the perfection of wisdom, Subhūti talks about the Great Vehicle.
n.­1006
These are Subhūti’s answers to Śāriputra, nyi khri 12.­12 ff. (consistently mi dmigs, “does not apprehend”), khri brgyad 20.­12 (ka 212b) ff. (khas mi len, “does not assert”).
n.­1007
nyi khri 12.­12.
n.­1008
“Does not come close to,” nye bar ’gro ba med do, is another rendering of nopaiti, rendered above by mi dmigs so (“does not apprehend”) and in khri brgyad by khas mi len (“does not assert”); LSPW pp. 244–46 “does not approach.” The closest to this is khri brgyad 20.­16 (ka 213a4–5).
n.­1009
Cf. khri brgyad 20.­26, which again has “assert” in place of “come close.”
n.­1010
khri brgyad 20.­32.
n.­1011
khri brgyad 20.­37.
n.­1012
khri brgyad 20.­44.
n.­1013
Śāriputra’s question was: “Why, Venerable Subhūti, do you say, ‘So Lord, I, who thus do not see and do not find a bodhisattva great being as anyone at all in any way at all‍—to which bodhisattva great being will I give advice and instruction in which perfection of wisdom?’ ”
n.­1014
khri brgyad 20.­55.
n.­1015
I understand our author to mean falsely imagined form “is” ultimate form because it is not different from it, because it is not there ultimately at all. Alternatively, if ultimate form is the name then it too is falsely imagined and hence not different.
n.­1016
“Repeat” renders bsgre par bya’o. A ’gre is a subsection of a longer connected passage. This is a voluntary, transitive (or causal) form of that.
n.­1017
khri brgyad 20.­61.
n.­1018
Golden 230b6; at khri brgyad 20.­73 ’dus pa has accidentally been left out.
n.­1019
Golden 231a2 nus par gyur pa’i stong pa nyid; D nus par ’gyur ba’i stong pa nyid; K, N nus par byung stong pa nyid.
n.­1020
khri brgyad 20.­77.
n.­1021
Pensa p. 60, tatrāsadartha ’nityārthaḥ; cf. khri brgyad 38.­1 (kha 86b1) ma mchis pa.
n.­1022
The Teaching of Akṣayamati (Akṣaya­mati­nirdeśa) blo gros mi zad pas bstan pa, Degé Kangyur (mdo sde, ma), 1.­327 (Braarvig and Welsh 2020), 168b.7 de la mi rtag pa’i don gang zhe na/ med pa’i don dang.
n.­1023
If yod pa las gyur pa renders sadbhūta it would mean “there is nothing truly real at all.”
n.­1024
nyi khri 12.­95; PSP 1-2: 150 yad anityaṃ so ’bhāvaḥ kṣayaś ca; LSPW pp. 252–54 “nonexistence and extinction.” khri brgyad 20.­79 “it is because that which is impermanent has come to an end, is a nonexistent thing.”
n.­1025
If the original compound is a bahuvrihi it would mean “suffering is called ‘what is on account of falsely imagined dharmas.’ ”
n.­1026
khri brgyad 20.­79 “suffering, selfless, calm, empty, signless, and wishless, … wholesome, not a basic immorality, without outflows, without afflictions, extraordinary, purified, and uncompounded.”
n.­1027
khri brgyad 20.­81.
n.­1028
khri brgyad 20.­84.
n.­1029
In place of ’dzin (“grasp”), khri brgyad 20.­92 (ka 224a3) has khas len (“assert”); nyi khri 12.­149 (ka 344a6) dmigs (“apprehend”). Gilgit 400.8–9 (na) upaiti.
n.­1030
K, N rim pa; D rigs pa, “logic.”
n.­1031
khri brgyad 20.­96, K, N; D “the nonproduction of form is form.”
n.­1032
If one leaves ngo bo nyid (svabhāva) untranslated, it means, simply, “the true nature of dharmas is not falsely imagined form.” I have rendered kun brtags pa’i gzugs kyi ngo bo nyid ma yin pa (na parikalpita­rūpa­svabhāva) literally to leave open the possibility that the author intends to say that the true nature of dharmas (dharmatā) does not have the falsely imagined (parikalpita) for its intrinsic nature, nor the falsely imagined the true nature of dharmas for its intrinsic nature.
n.­1033
khri brgyad 20.­100.
n.­1034
khri brgyad 20.­102.
n.­1035
Cited above 4.­1267.
n.­1036
khri brgyad 20.­102 ff. goes through categories of the thoroughly afflicted and purification dharmas but it does not explicitly include the “suchness, true nature of dharmas” category found at ’bum 12.­640–12.­640 and nyi khri 12.­202. However, both the longer versions omit the first “form… is impermanent” statement.
n.­1037
khri brgyad 20.­106.
n.­1038
khri brgyad 21.­1.
n.­1040
rnam pa (ākāra) is rendered “aspect” in the earlier line, and here by “attribute.”
n.­1041
The perfection of wisdom (prajñāpāramitā) has gone far off (āram itā).
n.­1042
khri brgyad 21.­6 “it has gone far off from the aggregates, constituents, sense fields, and dependent origination… all defilement… the six forms of life… the perfection of giving… inner emptiness… the applications of mindfulness… the knowledge of all aspects.”
n.­1043
nyi khri 13.­6. “Gone to the other side” (pāram itā).
n.­1044
“Skillful means” thabs (upāya) is part of the creative etymology of upaparīkṣa. K, N rigs pas brtags, “researching through skillful means and reasoning.”
n.­1045
khri brgyad 21.­12.
n.­1046
skye ba med pa; K, N med pa, “does not exist.”
n.­1047
khri brgyad 21.­18.
n.­1050
khri brgyad 21.­25.
n.­1053
khri brgyad 21.­27.
n.­1054
K, N mngon par rdzogs par yod pa (“is there manifestly and completely”) is an unusual rendering of abhisamaya. A later editor of the canon failed to replace it with mngon par rtogs pa, the reading in the following gloss.
n.­1055
The other ten are (1) the five objects of the senses and (2) the five senses.
n.­1056
This means the eye faculty and so on are blocked from seeing forms and so on. Alternatively, if apratigha means “unobstructed,” it means the sense faculties are not obstructed from knowing their object in the way an inert material object is.
n.­1057
The section on nonproduction, including the objections and responses, is khri brgyad 21.­24–21.­32.
n.­1058
khri brgyad 21.­42.
n.­1059
nyi khri 13.­56, 13.­57; khri brgyad 21.­45 and 21.­47 differ slightly.
n.­1060
khri brgyad 21.­24–21.­32.
n.­1061
khri brgyad 21.­55.
n.­1062
khri brgyad 21.­62.
n.­1063
khri brgyad 21.­66. “Ordinary world” renders loka (“ordinary,” “world,” “person”). Generally, loka means both a world and a person, in the sense suggested by John Dunne’s “No man is an island, entire of itself.” The “ordinary” is the opposite of the “extraordinary,” that is, the path and the result. The ordinary is the location of a person, the five aggregates, conveyed by the standard Tib rendering of loka as ’jig rten, “perishing basis.”
n.­1064
The “forbearance” (kṣānti) can be the third division of the aids to knowledge that penetrates true reality (nirvedha­bhāgīya) or the “path of seeing” (prayogamārga). Here the context suggests a threefold division of the eighth bodhisattva level, or, alternatively, the last three bodhisattva levels.
n.­1065
khri brgyad 21.­62–21.­77. This is the explanation of each of the six perfections as ordinary and extraordinary based on whether the bodhisattvas apprehend or do not apprehend anything.
n.­1066
khri brgyad 21.­78.
n.­1067
This section is explaining the usage of laukikī, a secondary derivative (“worldly, to do with the world”) from loka (itself perhaps from a root like ruc, “to shine”). The explanation relates laukikī to loka by putting loka in each of the seven cases, nominative and so on. Each explanation should be understood as, for instance in the first of the seven, “[the aggregates are laukikī because it is] on account of them the loka is here. PSP 1-2:171 kena kāraṇena laukikī? loko yābhir bhavati, lokaṃ vā yābhir nivartayati, lokena vā yāḥ samāḥ, lokāya vā yābhir dīyate, lokād vā yābhir [na?] niḥsarati, lokasya vā yā bhavāya, loke vā bhavā yās tā laukikasyaḥ. “Why are they laukikī? They are called laukikī because they are those on account which the world (nominative) exists; or on account of which [afflictive emotion and karma] the world (accusative) is established; or which are the same as the world (instrumental); or on account of which [five sense objects] something is given to the world [of the six senses]; or on account of which, [the links of dependent origination and so on, they do not] escape from the world (ablative); or [ordinary beings] who are for the coming into existence of the world (genitive); or [beings] who come into being in the world (locative).”
n.­1068
This is a speculative translation based on the idea that ordinary beings procreate and increase in the world.
n.­1069
This section again puts loka in each of the seven cases, nominative and so on, and explains the usage of lokottara (“extraordinary, transcendental, supramundane”) a compound word composed of loka and uttara (“higher”). In most of the following explanations, however, the word uttara is derived not from uttara, but from uttṝ (“to escape”)‍—for instance, the first of the seven, “[the parts of noble eightfold path are lokottara because] on account of them the loka (“person”) (nominative) escapes.” PSP 1-2:171 tatra katamā lokottarā? loko yābhir uttarati, lokaṃ vā yābhir uttārayati, lokena vā yābhir uttāryate, ālokāya vā yā bhavati, lokād vā yābhir niḥsarati, lokasya vā yā uttaraṇāya, loke vā yā uttarās tā lokottarā iti: “There, what are the lokottaras? They are called lokottaras [because they are those] on account of which the world (nominative) escapes; or on account of which [compassion and wisdom] they free the world (accusative); or on account of which [compassion and wisdom], a world [=a person] (instrumental) causes an escape; or which are there for illumination (dative); or on account of which they escape the world (ablative); or who are for the emancipation of the world (genitive); or who are the emancipators in the world (locative).”
n.­1070
khri brgyad 21.­79. According to LC, sel bar byed pa renders nivartayati. le’u brgyad ma nga 5b7 gang dag ’jig rten sgrol ba yin, “they free the world.”
n.­1071
le’u brgyad ma nga 5b7 gang dag gis ’jig rten gyi rgal bar byed pa, “those which cause a crossing over the world.”
n.­1072
le’u brgyad ma nga 5b7–6a1 don du, “those that are not there for the purpose of the world” makes the dative clearer.
n.­1073
le’u brgyad ma nga 6a1 gang dag’jig rten gyi sgrol byed yin pa, “those who are the emancipators of the world”
n.­1074
Cf. khri brgyad 21.­86; nyi khri 13.­101.
n.­1075
Rongtön (rong ston shes bya kun khyab) in his sher phyin stong phrag brgya pa’i rnam ’grel, pp. 638–39, says this means that Subhūti is saying it is “excellent” because, as Śāriputra says, were bodhisattvas bodhisattvas just because they pay attention, then all beings would indeed be bodhisattvas. Subhūti says Śāriputra’s statement is open to logical objection because it could only be true when the words are taken too literally, so it forces the reader to think about what he is actually saying. To that extent what Śāriputra says has got at what he, Subhūti, means, namely that bodhisattvas have compassion for (“pay attention to”) all beings even while cultivating a state free from thought construction.
n.­1076
D; Golden 243b1 lta “those sorts of attentions.”
n.­1077
Cf. khri brgyad 21.­91, nyi khri 13.­113, Gilgit 415.11–12. The corresponding part of the Śata­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā (xiii F.144.a, cited and translated in LSPW folios 267-268, p. 201, n. 13) says explicitly this attention is a “compassionate” (mahā­karuṇā­manasīkāreṇa) state.
n.­1079
K, N de bzhin gshegs pas. The reading in D, de bzhin gshegs pa, may intend, “In this tathāgata the perfection of wisdom is a threefold teaching: brief, middling, and detailed.”
n.­1080
khri brgyad 22.­2.
n.­1081
khri brgyad 22.­4 (ka 243b3) and nyi khri 14.­3 (kha 1b4) yang dag par skyon med pa, “flawlessness that is a perfect state.”
n.­1082
The fifteen are, in addition, attention to form as “a thorn, a misfortune, dependent, by its nature headed to destruction, shaky, brittle, a hazard, persecution, and a headache.”
n.­1083
These seven attentions (khri brgyad Tempangma ka 346b7) are attention to cessation as selfless, calm, isolated, emptiness, signlessness, wishlessness, and a nonenactment. khri brgyad 22.­8 (ka 244a7) incorrectly has attention to impermanence and suffering (mi rtag pa dang / bsdug sngal ba) in a list of nine.
n.­1084
khri brgyad 22.­10 ff.
n.­1085
khri brgyad 22.­5.
n.­1086
Emend sngon po to sdong po.
n.­1087
“Absence of hazards” renders abhaya; alternatively, “freedom from fear,” because bhaya is “fear” in other contexts.
n.­1088
“Nagging demon” renders ’dre ba (piśāca); alternatively, “a mix-up.”
n.­1089
khri brgyad 22.­11, literally, “causing dharmas to join together with a dharma.” The three parts of the picture are (1) the state of mind committed to becoming fully awakened, (2) the state of mind closer to the goal because of the good that has been done motivated by the commitment, and (3) the state of mind when rededicating to the original commitment, turning over all the good that brings the goal of full awakening closer to full awakening.
n.­1090
Cf. khri brgyad 22.­13, khri brgyad 3.­129.
n.­1091
khri brgyad 22.­11.
n.­1092
Tib ’grogs suggests “accompany” or “befriend” or “associate with.”
n.­1093
khri brgyad 22.­11, nyi khri 14.­23 (kha 5a4).
n.­1094
This reading is not at khri brgyad 22.­13, ’bum 14.­76, or nyi khri 14.­25, which all have “the thought of dedication is no thought.”
n.­1095
This reading is from our author’s version of the Sūtra.
n.­1096
khri brgyad 22.­16.
n.­1097
khri brgyad 22.­28.
n.­1098
Both D and Golden 248a5–b1 have chos (“dharma”) and then chos nyid (“true nature of dharmas”) below. It is hard to know whether the first or the second reading is wrong, or, indeed, if both are correct. If the second, and chos nyid (“the true nature of dharmas”) is emended to chos (“dharma”), the word “mark” (mtshan nyid, *lakṣaṇa) here is used not in the sense of a general and specific mark of a form (impermanent, and suitable to be seen), but rather in the sense of a causal sign, the object aspect in a mental image, which gives rise to the perception of something, conveyed in Skt by the word followed by iti (“the idea of”). Alternatively, if the first chos (“dharma”) is emended to, or at least understood as, chos nyid (“the true nature of dharmas”), then the mark is in reference to a unifying ultimate nature, and the iti to the falsely imagined phenomenon.
n.­1099
khri brgyad 22.­28–22.­31.
n.­1100
khri brgyad 22.­33–22.­37.
n.­1101
khri brgyad 22.­38–22.­43.
n.­1102
khri brgyad 22.­44–22.­46.
n.­1103
khri brgyad 22.­46–22.­59.
n.­1104
khri brgyad 22.­50–22.­59.
n.­1105
khri brgyad 22.­58.
n.­1106
khri brgyad 22.­62.
n.­1107
khri brgyad 22.­71.
n.­1108
“Move” renders g.yo derived from iñj or miñj. The meaning is that conceptual thought cannot get at it.
n.­1109
khri brgyad 22.­73.
n.­1110
khri brgyad 22.­75: “Therefore, gods, those who want to be candidates for the result of stream enterer and those who want to realize the result of stream enterer cannot, without having resorted to this forbearance.”
n.­1111
khri brgyad 23.­1.
n.­1112
khri brgyad 23.­12.
n.­1113
Cf. khri brgyad 22.­8: “the cessation of volitional factors from the cessation of ignorance… the cessation of old age and death, pain, lamentation, suffering, mental anguish, and grief from the cessation of birth‍—thus the cessation of simply this great heap of suffering.”
n.­1114
The negation in the Tibetan here (ma, "not") may very well be a scribal error that should be deleted.
n.­1115
khri brgyad 23.­13.
n.­1116
khri brgyad 23.­14–23.­21.
n.­1117
khri brgyad 23.­22.
n.­1118
khri brgyad 23.­23.
n.­1119
khri brgyad 23.­25.
n.­1120
Cf. Śrījagattalanivāsin’s Āmnayānusāriṇī, man ngag gi rjes su brang ba, Degé Tengyur (shes phyin, ba), 68a4 “in order to teach the gods the sign that the light of transcendental knowledge has been generated” (lha’i bu rnams la ye shes kyi snang ba bskyed pa’i rtags bstan pa’i don du me tog gi mchod pa bstan par byed de).
n.­1121
khri brgyad 24.­2.
n.­1122
khri brgyad 24.­15.
n.­1123
khri brgyad 24.­20.
n.­1124
5.­6, citing khri brgyad 22.­2.
n.­1125
khri brgyad 24.­21.
n.­1126
khri brgyad 24.­25.
n.­1127
khri brgyad 24.­26, nyi khri 16.­23.
n.­1128
khri brgyad 24.­27; ’bum 16.­58, nyi khri 16.­24 “does not see” in place of “does not train in.”
n.­1129
This is not found with exactly the same words in khri brgyad, ’bum, or nyi khri.
n.­1130
I have not emended “train in the knowledge of all aspects” to “train in the emptiness of the knowledge of all aspects” (PSP 2-3: 24 and ŚsPK II-3: 83–88) because this is the reading at khri brgyad 24.­29–24.­32. The abbreviation is too extreme. The idea is that training in the emptiness of any one dharma is training in the emptiness of any other. Therefore, to train in the emptiness of any one dharma is to train in any other different dharma, or in all dharmas.
n.­1131
khri brgyad 24.­34.
n.­1132
khri brgyad 24.­40.
n.­1133
khri brgyad 24.­43.
n.­1135
khri brgyad 24.­45.
n.­1136
Here tathāgata means “knower of reality”‍—literally “gone” or “come thus”; tathatā means “reality”: literally, “suchness.”
n.­1137
khri brgyad 24.­50–24.­51.
n.­1138
khri brgyad 24.­55, answering Kauśika’s question, “Where should bodhisattva great beings look for the perfection of wisdom?”
n.­1139
khri brgyad 24.­58.
n.­1140
khri brgyad 24.­61.
n.­1141
khri brgyad 24.­63.
n.­1142
khri brgyad 24.­65.
n.­1143
khri brgyad 24.­67.
n.­1144
The first three are khri brgyad 24.­71–24.­81. The “body of dharmas” (dharmakāya) is called the “objective support”: cp. ŚsPK II-3: 213 “dharmas as objective support” (dharmālambanānantatayānanta­pāramiteyaṃ) and PSP 2-3: 33 “dharma constituent as objective support” (dharma­dhātvārambaṇānantatayānanta-pāramiteyaṃ), in the sense of being the objective support of the knowledge of all aspects‍—both are limitless. The third is the ultimate reality of the knowledge of all aspects and the dharmas it knows. The fourth begins from khri brgyad 24.­82.
n.­1145
Cf. khri brgyad 24.­87, nyi khri 16.­72.
n.­1146
khri brgyad 25.­2.
n.­1147
khri brgyad 25.­3.
n.­1148
This is the brahmin student who in the future would become Śākyamuni.
n.­1149
nyi khri 16.­80.
n.­1150
An alternative translation: “remains consistent with.”
n.­1151
I have capitalized “perfection of wisdom” as an aid to the reader, not because it refers exclusively to the book as distinct from its contents or internalization.
n.­1152
’bum 16.­250, nyi khri 16.­81, khri pa 16.­19 (nga 171b3). khri brgyad 25.­7 and le’u brgyad ma nga 40a5 is a better Tib translation, “will have made just the emptiness of form into a good sustainable position,” of ŚsPK II-3: 223, PSP 2-3: 36, and Gilgit 440.8 rūpaśūnyataiva svadhiṣṭhitā bhaviṣyati [Gilgit bhaviṣyaṇti?].
n.­1153
The children of a good family who are not hurt (“not infiltrated”) because they respect the Perfection of Wisdom and what it teaches.
n.­1154
khri brgyad 25.­17.
n.­1155
khri brgyad 25.­18 says gods will amass a greater store of merit from respecting and protecting bodhisattvas practicing and teaching the perfection of wisdom than from respecting and protecting all the other types of beings.
n.­1156
The others at khri brgyad 26.­1 are “perfect celebrity, a perfect life, a perfect retinue, perfect major signs, perfect radiance, perfect eyes, a perfect voice, perfect meditative concentration, and perfect dhāraṇī.”
n.­1157
’khrugs; dkrugs at khri brgyad 26.­7 (ka 277b5).
n.­1158
khri brgyad 26.­9 “There is a medicinal herb called maghī that gives relief from all poisons.”
n.­1159
khri brgyad 26.­10.
n.­1160
khri brgyad 26.­12.
n.­1161
khri brgyad 26.­34–26.­37.
n.­1162
khri brgyad 26.­39 ff.
n.­1163
This summarizes khri brgyad 27.­1–27.­39, chapter 27.
n.­1164
glags thod. thod is a non-agentive form of gtod.
n.­1165
khri brgyad 27.­11.
n.­1166
khri brgyad 27.­23 ff. The merit from the worship of the perfection of wisdom.
n.­1167
khri brgyad 27.­37.
n.­1168
khri brgyad 28.­5: “Kauśika, you should take up the perfection of wisdom. Kauśika, you should keep in mind, you should recite, you should master, and you should properly pay attention to the perfection of wisdom.”
n.­1169
khri brgyad 28.­8.
n.­1170
khri brgyad 28.­13 ff.
n.­1171
khri brgyad 28.­18 ff.
n.­1172
khri brgyad 29.­1 ff., chapter 29.
n.­1173
khri brgyad 29.­11.
n.­1174
khri brgyad 29.­14.
n.­1175
Cf. khri brgyad 29.­15, nyi khri 20.­13.
n.­1176
khri brgyad 30.­1 ff.
n.­1177
le’u brgyad ma nga 74a2.
n.­1178
Cf. khri brgyad 30.­5 (kha 2a5–2b2). The Tib translators evidently read anupādānayogena (rendered len pa med pa’i tshul gyis) in place of Gilgit 465.6, PSP 2-3: 78 anutpādayogena, rendered ’bum 21.­10 (ca 308b3), nyi khri 21.­5 (kha 90b3), le’u brgyad ma nga 74a6–7 m(y)i skye pa’i tshul gyis.
n.­1179
khri brgyad 30.­11 ff.
n.­1180
khri brgyad 30.­17 “Those gods will want to connect those sons of a good family or daughters of a good family with the confidence that gives a readiness to speak about the perfection of wisdom.”
n.­1181
khri brgyad 30.­23, PSP 2-3: 82 anācchedya.
n.­1182
khri brgyad 30.­30.
n.­1183
rgya chen po la mos pa. Closest is khri brgyad 30.­34 (kha 7b5–6) rgya cher mos pa: “The belief of those sons of a good family or daughters of a good family becomes stronger and stronger in line with the arrival there of those extremely powerful gods.” PSP 2-3: 85 udārādhimuktika; ’bum 21.­54 (ca 331a6), nyi khri 21.­37 (kha 98a7), le’u brgyad ma nga 80a5 mos pa rgya chen po. LSPW p. 243b “confirmed in their faith.”
n.­1184
Closest again is khri brgyad 30.­38 (kha 8b6) lus la gzi brjid bcug par. PSP 2-3: 86, Aṣṭa (Wogihara p. 262) kāyam ojaḥprakṣiptam; ’bum 21.­63 (ca 336b6), nyi khri 21.­42 (kha 99b2), le’u brgyad ma nga 81a6 mdangs dang ldan par ’gyur.
n.­1185
The four requirements are robes, alms, beds and seats, and medicines for sicknesses.
n.­1186
khri brgyad 31.­3 ff.
n.­1187
These are the establishment and removal, respectively, of dharmas of buddhas and ordinary persons; bodhisattvas and śrāvakas; those in training and for whom there is no more training; and the uncompounded and compounded.
n.­1188
khri brgyad 31.­7.
n.­1189
These are the discourses, melodious narrations, predictions, verses, summaries, introductions, accounts, birth stories, expanded texts, marvels, tales, and expositions.
n.­1190
khri brgyad 31.­18.
n.­1191
khri brgyad 31.­19.
n.­1192
khri brgyad 31.­32.
n.­1193
’bum 22.­52 (ca 360b3) and nyi khri 22.­39 (kha 110a3) have ye shes kyi sku (jñānakāya) here. khri brgyad 31.­35, and also khri brgyad S kha 79b2, PSP 2-3: 96 (dharmakāyena ca rūpakāyena ca draṣṭukāmena), and le’u brgyad ma nga 89b1 omit. The dharma body and form body are the result of the jñānasaṃbhāra (“knowledge accumulation” or “equipment”) and the puṇyasaṃbhāra (“merit accumulation” or “equipment”), respectively.
n.­1194
Golden 261b4 mtshan nyid.
n.­1195
khri brgyad 31.­42.
n.­1196
khri brgyad 31.­51.
n.­1197
khri brgyad 31.­55.
n.­1198
khri brgyad 31.­58.
n.­1199
Beginning at khri brgyad 32.­1, chapter 32.
n.­1200
khri brgyad 32.­4.
n.­1201
khri brgyad 32.­9 ff.
n.­1202
khri brgyad 32.­17, le’u brgyad ma, nga, 98b7; ’bum 23.­118 (cha 29b5), nyi khri 23.­29 (kha 123b3–4) gnyis la spyod pa yang ma yin/ mi gnyis pa la spyod pa yang ma yin pa’i blo, Twenty-Five Thousand translation: “the mind, without engaging in duality and without engaging in nonduality.”
n.­1203
This is explaining properly paying attention to others.
n.­1204
khri brgyad 32.­18. This is introducing the explanation of the fourteen pairs.
n.­1205
This is paraphrasing Madhyānta­vibhāga 2.14–16, picking and choosing from the list of ten antidotes that counteract obstacles to the ten bodhisattva levels.
n.­1206
The sections are khri brgyad 32.­24–32.­39, 32.­40–32.­42, and the last two at 32.­43–32.­44; cf. ’bum 23.­368 ff. and PSP 2-3: 113.
n.­1207
khri brgyad 32.­45–32.­51.
n.­1208
Cf. nyi khri 23.­61 (kha 130a4–5).
n.­1209
This and the following sections summarize khri brgyad 32.­52–32.­74.
n.­1210
khri brgyad 32.­67–32.­68; ’bum 23.­458–23.­464, summarized nyi khri kha 23.­84-23.­85, le’u brgyad ma nga 108b7–109a7.
n.­1211
khri brgyad 32.­69 and 32.­74.
n.­1212
The admiration for, rejoicing in, and dedication to the perfection of wisdom in comparison to any other virtuous activity.
n.­1213
khri brgyad 33.­1, nyi khri 24.­1. The idea is that there is the thought of awakening (bodhicitta). Then there is rejoicing in the good works motivated by that thought and the wholesome roots planted by those good works, a rejoicing that gives energy to the motivating thought. Then there is the dedication of all the wholesome roots to awakening again‍—to the mindset the thought of awakening presupposes so that it grows stronger and stronger.
n.­1214
khri brgyad 33.­2–33.­4.
n.­1215
khri brgyad 33.­2: “aggregates of morality, aggregates of meditative stabilization, aggregates of wisdom, aggregates of liberation, and aggregates of knowledge and seeing of liberation.”
n.­1216
K, N.
n.­1217
khri brgyad 33.­4.
n.­1218
khri brgyad 33.­5.
n.­1219
khri brgyad 33.­6.
n.­1220
khri brgyad 33.­10.
n.­1221
khri brgyad 33.­11.
n.­1222
khri brgyad 33.­12. I have included some words left out of the citation to make it readable in English.
n.­1223
khri brgyad 33.­13 ff.
n.­1224
Cf. khri brgyad 33.­14, where “perception” (’du shes) is rendered “notion.” The Abhidharmakośa (cf. Abhidharmakośa 1.14c saṃjñā nimittodgrahaṇātmikā) defines saṃjñā (“perception,” “notion,” “discrimination,” “naming,” “idea”) as taking hold of or naming a causal sign, a mediating quasi-entity that allows consciousness to discriminate specific objects. The six may be (’bum 24.­22) “has no perception of a buddha, has no perception of śrāvakas, has no perception of wholesome roots, and has no perception of a thought doing the dedication.” The two perceptions of rejoicing and dedication are implicit. Alternatively, the six are derived from the six sense faculties‍—the perceptions that pop up based on the eye sense faculty and so on‍—eye perception, up to thinking mind perception. Alternatively (Śrāvakabhūmi, Degé Tengyur [mdo ’grel, sems tsam, dzi], 153a7–b1), they are “the two‍—the perception of signlessness and the perception of the absence of distraction in signlessness‍—and the perception of the absence of thought construction, and similarly, the perception of the absence of proliferation and the absence of disturbance in the absence of thought construction, the perception of calm, and the perception of the absence of sorrow, a stable mind, and pleasure in calm.” Alternatively (cf. Ten Thousand, khri pa 8.­38), “It entails absorption in the six aspects of perception (’du shes rnam pa drug) by engaging with all things as if they were an illusion.”
n.­1225
Cf. khri brgyad 33.­17.
n.­1226
Cf. nyi khri 24.­26; also ’bum 24.­21.
n.­1227
Cf. khri brgyad 33.­23–33.­24.
n.­1228
khri brgyad 33.­26–33.­34.
n.­1229
khri brgyad 33.­35–33.­38.
n.­1230
khri brgyad 33.­40.
n.­1231
nyi khri 24.­50; khri brgyad 33.­44 “untainted.”
n.­1232
khri brgyad 33.­43–33.­45.
n.­1233
khri brgyad 33.­50–33.­52.
n.­1234
The first section is khri brgyad 33.­53–33.­56, the second 33.­57.
n.­1235
The first section is khri brgyad 33.­53–33.­56, the second 33.­57.
n.­1236
khri brgyad 33.­59.
n.­1237
khri brgyad 33.­59. The Lord is speaking to Subhūti.
n.­1238
khri brgyad 33.­59.
n.­1239
This follows the order at nyi khri 24.­67.
n.­1240
khri brgyad 33.­61–33.­62.
n.­1241
khri brgyad 34.­1. The perfection of wisdom (1) makes things clear because of absolute purity; (2) makes you want to bow; (3) is bowed to by me (Subhūti and the Buddha); (4) is untainted by all three realms; (5) corrects visual distortions because of having eliminated all the darkness of afflictive emotion and views; (6) works as the highest of the dharmas on the side of awakening; (7) provides security because of having eliminated all hazards, terrors, and persecution; (8) gives light because then all beings easily appropriate the five eyes; (9) shows the ruts because beings caught in the ruts avoid the two edges; (10) works as the knowledge of all aspects because of having eliminated all residual impressions, connections, and afflictions; (11) is the mother of great bodhisattvas because she gives birth to all the buddhadharmas; (12) is unproduced and unceasing because of being empty of her own mark; (13) counteracts saṃsāra because she is not unmoved and not destroyed; (14) works as the protector of all unprotected beings because she is the giver of all dharma jewels; (15) works as the ten powers because she deals with those who are untamed; (16) works as repeating and thus turning the wheel of the Dharma; and (17) works to show the intrinsic nature of all dharmas because of the emptiness of the nonexistence of intrinsic nature.
n.­1242
This question by Śāriputra comes at the end of his seventeen statements praising the perfection of wisdom.
n.­1243
khri brgyad 22.­2 ff.
n.­1244
’jar is apparently a form of the modern colloquial honorific gcar, “to approach,” with honor to the place or person being approached. Bṭ1 pa 28a6–7 gus shing rim gro bya ba’i thabs ji lta bur bgyi, “how do you feel respect for and serve.”
n.­1245
khri brgyad 34.­4: “dedicate those wholesome roots of the past, future, and present lord buddhas, as many as there are, starting from when they first produced the thought, up to for as long as their good Dharma lasts…”
n.­1246
khri brgyad 34.­7.
n.­1247
khri brgyad 34.­9 (kha 54a2) “find and produce within themselves” renders mngon par sgrub (abhinirhṛ); LSPW “consummate.”
n.­1248
khri brgyad 34.­11.
n.­1249
khri brgyad 34.­17.
n.­1250
khri brgyad 29.­15: “Those sons of a good family or daughters of a good family who take up, up to properly pay attention to this perfection of wisdom will have attended on many buddhas and will have been looked after by spiritual friends. And why? Because the knowledge of all aspects issues forth from this‍—that is, the perfection of wisdom‍—and the perfection of wisdom issues forth from this, that is, the knowledge of all aspects. And why? Because the knowledge of all aspects is not one thing and the perfection of wisdom another. Therefore, the knowledge of all aspects and the perfection of wisdom are not two and cannot be divided into two; they have not been broken apart and have not been cut apart.”
n.­1251
khri brgyad 34.­22.
n.­1252
khri brgyad 34.­26.
n.­1253
khri brgyad 34.­28.
n.­1254
khri brgyad 34.­30
n.­1256
khri brgyad 34.­36.
n.­1257
khri brgyad 34.­36. ’bum 25.­180 (cha 239b4), nyi khri 25.­31 (kha 168a1), le’u brgyad ma nga 134a1 render niṣyanda by dang mthun pa’i ’bras bu, “not a result in accord with the perfection of wisdom.”
n.­1258
Our author’s version of the Sūtra has the synonyms of “a being” at this point. Other versions omit.
n.­1259
khri brgyad 34.­46.
n.­1260
khri brgyad 35.­4 ff. This is misplaced here, probably early in the transmission of the text by a scribe. It should come after the following summary, not before it.
n.­1261
khri brgyad 35.­1–35.­22.
n.­1262
khri brgyad 35.­23.
n.­1263
khri brgyad 35.­26.
n.­1264
khri brgyad 35.­31.
n.­1265
khri brgyad 35.­36 ff., nyi khri 26.­38 ff., ’bum 26.­150 ff.
n.­1266
khri brgyad 35.­35: “Subhūti, it is hard for those who do not work hard, up to are without introspection to believe in this perfection of wisdom.”
n.­1267
’bum 26.­151 (cha 348b3) so so ma yin, also nyi khri 26.­57 (kha 182a2); khri brgyad 35.­37 (kha 64b5–6), S kha 147b1 tha mi dad de gcad du med.
n.­1268
khri brgyad 35.­38 ff., ’bum 26.­151 ff., nyi khri 26.­39 ff.
n.­1269
The two passages (khri brgyad 35.­37–35.­38, ’bum 26.­150–26.­164, nyi khri 26.­38-26.­39) are the one that includes the purity of the result and the one that leaves it out.
n.­1270
khri brgyad 35.­39, nyi khri 26.­40-26.­42. The passage is truly spelled out in full from ’bum 26.­165 to ’bum 26.­441!
n.­1271
khri brgyad 35.­41, nyi khri 26.­43-26.­49, ’bum 26.­442–26.­525.
n.­1272
nyi khri 26.­50, ’bum 26.­526; cf. khri brgyad 35.­42 ff.
n.­1273
Closest is nyi khri 26.­51. Our author’s version differs slightly. Cf. khri brgyad 35.­43, ’bum 26.­527.
n.­1274
This citation suggests our author is following a version giving even more detail. Cf. nyi khri 26.­55, and ’bum 26.­531, where the purity of each earlier dharma is the reason for the purity of the next in the series, ending with the purity of the knowledge of the path aspects being the reason for the purity of the knowledge of all aspects. khri brgyad 35.­43 is an abbreviation.
n.­1275
The collections are the collecting together of a form, the eyes, eye consciousness, eye contact, and pleasurable, suffering, and neither pleasurable nor suffering feelings that arise from the condition of contact with the eyes and so on.
n.­1276
Cf. nyi khri 26.­56, ’bum 26.­532. khri brgyad 35.­44 is an abbreviation.
n.­1277
Cf. nyi khri 26.­79, 26.­91, and ’bum 26.­861 (nya 101a5–7).
n.­1278
’bum 26.­862–26.­891; cf. khri brgyad 35.­45. The operative factor is the similarity with the purity of the knowledge of all aspects.
n.­1279
khri brgyad 35.­46–35.­47, ’bum 26.­892–26.­895.
n.­1280
khri brgyad 36.­1.
n.­1281
In the cyclic of existences, a stream of deaths and rebirths, death both precedes rebirth, and follows it.
n.­1282
nyi khri 27.­28 (kha 192a3–4); ’bum 27.­234 (nya 151b7), and khri brgyad 36.­31 (kha 69b1) have chos kyi dbyings gnas pa nyid (*dharma­dhātu­sthititā). PSP 2-3: 1562 dharmasthititā, le’u brgyad ma nga 147b2 ch[o]s gnas pa nyid.
n.­1283
“Assist” renders yongs su ’dzin (parigrah), “take hold of.” Cf. Aṣṭa (Wogihara p. 411) prajñāpāramitā na kaṃcid dharmaṃ na parigṛhṇāti na parityajati, glossed by Haribhara (Sparham 2006–11, vol. 2, p. 287) with pratipakṣa (“antidote”) and vipakṣa (“opposing side”) (the words in single quotation marks are words from the Eight Thousand): “ ‘neither gains’ an antidote that counteracts ‘nor abandons’ an opposing side ‘any dharma.’ ” Bṭ1 pa 44a3–7 says help and harm is irrelevant to the dharma-constituent, which has an unchangeable nature and is intrinsically complete. It says “the ultimate, nonconceptual perfection of wisdom is not an existent thing and is purity, therefore it does not conceive of any dharma at all and is not in its intrinsic nature something that apprehends a causal sign.” LSPW p. 282: “How is it that the purity of the perfection of wisdom does not take hold of any dharma? The Lord: Because the Dharma-element has been taken hold of.”
n.­1284
khri brgyad 36.­34 ff.
n.­1285
khri brgyad 36.­47; ’bum 27.­448, nyi khri 27.­43 omit.
n.­1286
khri brgyad 36.­48, ’bum 27.­451, nyi khri 27.­45.
n.­1287
khri brgyad 36.­57; cf. Abhi­samayālaṃkāra 3.1.
n.­1288
khri brgyad 36.­60.
n.­1289
khri brgyad 36.­60.
n.­1290
nyi khri 27.­63, ’bum 27.­666, le’u brgyad ma nga 151a5; cp. khri brgyad 36.­68: “Form does not perceive form.”
n.­1291
khri brgyad 36.­70.
n.­1292
khri brgyad 36.­72.
n.­1293
khri brgyad 36.­76.
n.­1294
5.­279, explaining khri brgyad 35.­1, 35.­25, and 36.­1.
n.­1295
The first section (khri brgyad 37.­4) is “if one does not practice form, one practices the perfection of wisdom” and so on, and the second, “if one does not practice with the idea ‘form is permanent’ and so on, one practices the perfection of wisdom.”
n.­1296
khri brgyad 37.­11.
n.­1297
The statements (khri brgyad 37.­15, 37.­22, 37.­23, finishing 37.­32) all say that the perfection of wisdom is like space, or like a dream and so on, but is the origin of benefits.
n.­1298
khri brgyad 37.­34.
n.­1299
khri brgyad 37.­36.
n.­1300
khri brgyad 37.­39.
n.­1301
khri brgyad 37.­44.
n.­1302
khri brgyad 37.­49.
n.­1303
Cf. khri brgyad 37.­54, nyi khri 28.­60, ’bum 28.­392.
n.­1304
khri brgyad 37.­60.
n.­1305
khri brgyad 37.­63.
n.­1306
Cf. khri brgyad 37.­72 (kha 84b2) has thob par byed pa ma yin in place of sgrub pa’am; ’bum 28.­404 and nyi khri 28.­71 both omit sgrub pa. The “this perfection of wisdom” here is seyaṃ punaḥ, “And again, this,” at both PSP 2-3: 183 and Aṣṭa (Wogihara p. 441); le’u brgyd ma nga 166b7 rab ’byor yang shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa ’di ni chos gang yang mthong bar byed pa ma yin. Abhi­samayālaṃkāra 3.16 and the AAV (Sparham 2006–11 vol. 2, p. 63) relate the repetition of “[And again] this perfection of wisdom” with the first three of the Abhi­samayālaṃkāra’s eight chapters, respectively.
n.­1307
Emend brtag par bya to rtag par bya (PSP 2-3:180 śāśvatikā).
n.­1308
khri brgyad 37.­75, ’bum 28.­409, nyi khri 28.­73 omit “Subhūti.”
n.­1309
khri brgyad 37.­77.
n.­1310
nyi khri 28.­75, ’bum 28.­407; khri brgyad 37.­78 differs.
n.­1311
’bum 28.­413–28.­416 says of the six perfections, eighteen emptinesses, thirty-seven dharmas on the side of awakening, and the twenty-five other dharmas that they are empty. The total of ninety-five is perhaps reached by taking each of the ten powers separately.
n.­1312
nyi khri 28.­80, ’bum 28.­417; cf. khri brgyad 37.­80.
n.­1313
Cf. khri brgyad 37.­80, nyi khri 28.­80, ’bum 28.­417.
n.­1314
khri brgyad 37.­80–37.­81.
n.­1315
Cp. khri brgyad 37.­80, nyi khri 28.­80, and ’bum 28.­417.
n.­1316
In the Sūtra (khri brgyad 38.­1–38.­95), Subhūti makes a brief statement and the Buddha gives a corroborating reason. In this first instance Subhūti says, “This perfection of wisdom is a nonexistent thing (alternatively, “not truly real”) (asat) and the Buddha says, “Because space is a nonexistent thing.” In the Abhi­samayālaṃkāra’s system this marks the beginning of the fourth chapter, the explanation of the practice (prayoga) proper, beginning with a listing of its one hundred and seventy-three ākāras (“aspects,” “cognitive-subjective states”). Our author only glosses those he feels need clarification.
n.­1317
This is in response to Subhūti’s rhetorical question (khri brgyad 38.­7), “Lord, this is a perfection without language?” I have not been able to identify the citation.
n.­1318
nāmarūpa (“name and form”) is the fourth of the twelve links of dependent origination.
n.­1319
khri brgyad 38.­10: “Lord, this perfection of wisdom is a perfection that is not stolen.”
n.­1320
khri brgyad 38.­15: “Lord, this perfection of wisdom is a perfection that does not change places.”
n.­1321
nyi khri 29.­17.
n.­1322
Golden 289a5. D: “Just as that human seen in a dream, who is an existent thing in a dream, cannot be apprehended and does not exist, so too all phenomena are there as nonexistent things.”
n.­1323
khri brgyad 38.­24. The separate statements by Subhūti and the Buddha are combined into a single statement in this and some of the following glosses.
n.­1324
At khri brgyad 38.­30, ’bum nya 343a7, and nyi khri 29.­29 this is the response to Subhūti’s, “Lord, this perfection of wisdom is a detached perfection.” Below Subhūti will say, “Lord, this perfection of wisdom is a calm perfection.”
n.­1325
“Not a means of measurement” or, alternatively, “immeasurable” renders tshad ma mchis pa (apramāṇa); it has the sense of “not a valid cognition” of something. “Fully arise” renders kun nas ldang ba (paryutthāna), which has a negative sense, like a rage that arises in somebody and totally takes them over.
n.­1326
“Something to be measured” renders gzhal bya (prameya).
n.­1327
Cited earlier 4.­1267.
n.­1328
This is the response to khri brgyad 38.­46, “Lord, this perfection of wisdom is a suffering perfection.”
n.­1329
This is partially supported by AAVN 63a2 śūnyatākāreṇa sarva-dharmānupalabdher iti, AAV ka 122b4, Sparham 2006–11 vol. 2, p. 63. khri brgyad kha 89b1, nyi khri kha 219b3, ’bum nya 344b2 omit.
n.­1330
These are the definitions of the form and feeling aggregates.
n.­1331
khri brgyad 38.­50–38.­68 goes through the entire list of emptinesses.
n.­1332
khri brgyad 38.­83–38.­87.
n.­1333
khri brgyad 38.­88.
n.­1334
At nyi khri 29.­86, ’bum nya 347b3 Subhūti says the “four fearlessnesses” are the perfection because “the knowledge of a knower of paths is not cowed.” khri brgyad 38.­89 says it is “a perfection that is fearlessness” because the knowledge of paths cannot be apprehended.
n.­1335
Golden 289a5. “Realized one” renders tathāgata, “reality” tathatā, and “thus” tathā. D: “This is a perfection that is the realized one, because what has been said by all the buddhas is indeed the realized one.” At nyi khri 29.­89, ’bum nya 347b7: “This perfection of wisdom is a perfection that is the realized one because it is the reality of all that has been said.” khri brgyad 38.­93: “Lord, this perfection of wisdom is a perfection that is suchness… because it is the suchness of all that has been said.” Note that the Sanskrit tathatā/Tibetan de bzhin nyid is generally rendered "suchness" throughout. See also 3.­4.
n.­1336
svayambhū, “self-originated” = “intrinsic”; abhibhū, “predominate.”
n.­1337
khri brgyad 39.­1–39.­7.
n.­1338
’bum nya 353a5–6, nyi khri 30.­6, le’u brgyad ma nga 177b4. I have rendered brtson par byed in line with khri brgyad 39.­8 (kha 95a1) rnal ’byor du byed pa yin no (PSP 4: 11 yogam āpadyate). LSPW pp. 301–2, “does not stand in form, etc. and in consequence makes no endeavor about form.”
n.­1339
Cf. khri brgyad 39.­10, nyi khri 30.­8, ’bum nya 361a5.
n.­1340
Here “stand on X” means, from a negative perspective, to keep on entertaining the idea of X as real, and from a positive perspective to have one’s feet solidly on the ground of reality. Even the second is ultimately negated.
n.­1341
nyi khri 30.­14, “It is because the depth of form is not form” and so on, up to “the depth of the knowledge of all aspects is not the knowledge of all aspects.” It does the same with “hard to fathom” (30.­16) and “immeasurable” (30.­18); ’bum nya 386a7 to ’bum ta 4b1 is the same but fills in all the details; khri brgyad 39.­11 ff. differs.
n.­1342
khri brgyad 39.­12–39.­43. The section goes up to ’bum ta 11a, and nyi khri 30.­37.
n.­1343
khri brgyad 39.­45–39.­47, ending “what marks dharmas as dharmas is irreversibility, vanity, hollowness, pointlessness, and fraudulence.”
n.­1344
khri brgyad 39.­48–39.­49.
n.­1345
khri brgyad 39.­52.
n.­1346
Cf. khri brgyad 39.­12. Here (Bṭ3 39.­53) Subhūti says, “Lord, the perfection of wisdom is deep because form is deep.”
n.­1347
khri brgyad 39.­55. The gloss explains the tatpuruṣa compound śuddharāśi.
n.­1348
khri brgyad 39.­57: “Lord, that such an exposition of this deep perfection of wisdom would not give rise to many hindrances would be amazing,”
n.­1349
khri brgyad 39.­58–39.­73 explains the hindrances and merit.
n.­1350
khri brgyad 39.­77, ’bum ta 58a6, nyi khri 30.­65 (kha 245b1) lnga brgya tha ma; Harrison (2006, p. 144, n. 40) “final five hundred years”; PSP 4: 29–30, le’u brgyad ma nga 193a1 ff. omit; Aṣṭa (Wogihara p. 487) saddharma­syāntardhānakāle. There are a number of ways to explain “last of the five hundreds,” one of which is that the Dharma lasts five thousand years, divided into ten periods of five hundred years (Nattier 1999, Yuyama 1992).
n.­1351
“Chapter” renders le’u. Skt parivarta means not only “chapter” but also a period of time. The literal translation of le’u (“chapter”) is retained here because it conveys the sense of “a chapter in our history,” and connects the history to scripture.
n.­1352
K, N; D rtags tsam ’jigs pa’i le’u “Fear of Mere Signs chapter”; Mañjuśrīkīrti’s Kīrtimālā commentary chos thams cad kyi rang bzhin mnyam pa nyid rnam par spros pa’i ting nge ’dzin gyi rgyal po zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo’i ’grel pa grags pa’i phreng ba, Degé Tengyur (mdo ’grel, nyi), 116b2, has rtags tzam ’dzin pa’i (“Grasping Mere Signs”).
n.­1353
Braarvig (1993, vol. II, pp. 587–89) cites the passage from Vasubandhu’s Akṣaya­mati­nirdeśa­ṭīkā, ’phags pa blo gros mi zad pas bstan pa rgya cher ’grel pa, Degé Tengyur (mdo ’grel, ci), 268a4–269a3, in a note and has an excellent translation. The entire passage in a slightly different wording is found in Mañjuśrīkīrti’s work cited in the previous note (mdo ’grel, nyi), 116a6–116b4.
n.­1354
Vasubandhu’s Akṣaya­mati­nirdeśa­ṭīkā.
n.­1355
I have included this paragraph (between the two asterisks) even though it is omitted from the Degé Tengyur. In K, N, and Golden 293b4–6 it reads de de ltar byas na de bzhin gshegs pa’i bstan pa gnas pa’i dus lo nyis stong lnga brgyar ’gyur te/ TI ka ’di dang gnyis ’gal bar snang ba/ shanta rak+Shi ta’i bsam pa ni/ dgra bcom pa’i le’u dang/ ting nge ’dzin gyi le’u’i bar la dam pa’i chos gnas so zhes bya bar bsam pa yin te/ ’chad pa’i lugs la ji skad ’chad/ la la ji skad du ’chad de/ spyir lo lnga stong mthun no. If this is part of our original text, it is clearly problematic to assert that our author is Vasubandhu.
n.­1356
khri brgyad 39.­62–39.­94.
n.­1357
khri brgyad 40.­2.
n.­1358
’bum ta 64a4, nyi khri 31.­6 (kha 250a7). steg is an old word for sgeg and rol.
n.­1359
The reading is uncertain, as our author makes clear. PSP 4: 35, Aṣṭa (Wogihara p. 500) anyonya­vijñāna­samaṅgino, le’u brgyad ma nga 197b6 phan tshun rnam par shes pa chags shing, “they feel an attraction for each other”; khri brgyad 40.­20 (kha 114a3) phan tshun sems ’thun par byed, “harmonize their thoughts with each other.” Haribhadra’s Illumination of the Abhisamayālaṃkāra, rgyan gyi snang ba, Degé Tengyur (shes phyin, cha), 194a6, cites this with the translation rnam par shes pa phan tshun dang ldan pas, which is to say, they both have the same attractive object in mind. Gilgit 486.12 anya­vyañjanasasaṅgo, ’bum ta 66a5–6 and nyi khri 31.­6 (kha 250b1) yi ge gzhan la chags shing tshig gi don myi /mi shes par, “attached to other readings while not knowing what the meaning is”; ŚsPN3 4518.10 anyo na vyañjana­samāṅganaḥ padārtham ajānā; Bṭ1 pa 87a4–5 explains that it means quibbling over the correct grammatical form in place of looking at the meaning; LSPW p. 316 “with their minds on other kinds of talk.”
n.­1360
The five are yawning, laughing, sneering, being distracted, and being attached to each other’s ideas (“harmonizing their minds”).
n.­1361
khri brgyad 40.­28; cf. ’bum ta 67b1–2, nyi khri 31.­12; LSPW p. 316 “have to take to (Birth-and-death).”
n.­1362
khri brgyad 40.­28.
n.­1363
khri brgyad 40.­44.
n.­1364
khri brgyad 40.­47.
n.­1365
khri brgyad 40.­48.
n.­1366
K, N mnyam du med pa, “without equal.”
n.­1367
The section goes up to khri brgyad 41.­53.
n.­1368
khri brgyad 42.­6; PSP 4: 58 anayā subhūte gambhīrayā prajñā­pāramitayā daśa­tathāgata­balāni janitāni.
n.­1369
khri brgyad 42.­5–43.­28.
n.­1370
khri brgyad 42.­12–?.
n.­1371
Cf. 5.­514 ff., explaining khri brgyad 43.­13. The words kṛtajñatā (byas pa bzo ba, or, alternatively, byas pa shes pa) and kṛtaveditā (byas pa tshor ba) usually mean “appreciation” and “gratitude.”
n.­1372
This is eight to eleven of the ways the perfection of wisdom reveals the world to bodhisattvas.
n.­1373
khri brgyad 42.­7.
n.­1374
khri brgyad kha 130a2–3 omits “ever exist or.”
n.­1375
’bum ta 113a2–3 ff.; cf. khri brgyad 42.­11, nyi khri 32.­73.
n.­1376
khri brgyad 42.­17.
n.­1377
This is responding to the question “how do the tathāgatas, worthy ones, perfectly complete buddhas know a greedy thought?”
n.­1378
Cf. khri brgyad 42.­15.
n.­1379
nyi khri 32.­82. khri brgyad 42.­18 reverses the statement.
n.­1380
Alternatively, “this one’s thought comes, another’s does not come.” In khyab par ’gro ba, the khyab pa may render Skt ā (“from all sides”), or else is alerting a reader to an a+ā sandhi. If so, khyab pa is being used (like rnam pa as a sign for vi-) in a mechanical translation (tshig ’gyur), not a translation conveying what the words mean (don ’gyur). khri brgyad 42.­19 (kha 132a5) sems ’ong ba ma yin / sems ’gro ba ma yin, and similarly, nyi khri 32.­85, ’bum ta 114b3–4 (“that a thought does not come, and that a thought does not go”), supported by ŚsPN3 4538r7, PSP 4: 61–62 nāgacchati na gacchati; Gilgit 506.1 anāgacchati tac cittaṃ na vigacchati.
n.­1381
khri brgyad 42.­20, nyi khri, and ’bum all omit the negation of “coming” and so on, and have mi gzigs.
n.­1382
“Has become” renders gyur pa (-gata). Whitney’s Sanskrit Grammar 1273c, 435: “gata… is used in a loose way… to express relation of various kinds.” The compound mahāgata (chen por gyur pa) just means “great.”
n.­1383
Cf. the slight difference from the translations at ’bum ta 115b2, nyi khri 32.­87, le’u brgyad ma nga 218b7; the forms of sthita at PSP 4: 62, ŚsPN3 4538r10, and Gilgit 506.9 all differ slightly; LSPW p. 330: “He does not review that it is, nor that it is not, nor does He review it as discontinuous, or as not discontinuous.”
n.­1384
“Basic element” renders dbyings (dhātu). Alternatively, “entire cosmos,” “vast expanse.”
n.­1385
This derives citta from root ci, “to gather.” gsags from gsog (K, N brtsags?) (the prefixed g in place of b is not attested in the bod rgya tshig mdzod chen mo) means to get everything together, as in “accumulate the equipment,” tshogs gnyis bsags te rdzogs sangs rgyas, or to accumulate in the sense of possession: “The water drops all together form the ocean,” chu thigs bsogs na rgya mtshor ’gyur. Cf. Laṅkāvatāra­sūtra (Nanjio edition, p. 46) citteṇa cīyate karmam, (Suzuki translation, p. 158) “Karma is accumulated by thought.”
n.­1386
Our author cites the words (probably unmiñjita, nimiñjita, saṃmiñjita, and prasārita) as derived from miñj (“to say, to shine”), a derivation that fits the context well. The translators at khri brgyad kha 133b1 (lhag par g.yo ba, bral bar g.yo ba, bsdus par g.yo ba, rgyas pa), and, less obviously, in part at least, at ’bum ta 116b1, nyi khri kha 275b2, le’u brgyad ma nga 219b3 (’phro ba, ’du pa, bkram pa, bcum pa) understood some of the words as derived from iñj. The four categories are those under which the wrong views (khri brgyad 42.­24–42.­28) are explained. Cf. the sixty-two wrong views set forth in detail in the Brahma­jāla­sūtra (tshangs pa’i dra ba’i mdo).
n.­1387
khri brgyad 42.­24: “When the thoughts of beings that have moved excessively are freed from movement, have moved to abridge, and are expanded, arise, whichever of them arises they all arise based on form, or based on feeling, or based on perception, or based on volitional factors, or based on consciousness.”
n.­1388
This ’phro ba (from iñj) (if derived from miñj the translation is “been beamed out”) is an alternative translation of the first of the four categories (gsal ba, rendered “clear”).
n.­1389
khri brgyad 42.­29.
n.­1390
khri brgyad 43.­2.
n.­1391
These are perhaps the transformations (parāvṛtti) of the ālaya, kliṣṭamanas, and pravṛtti­vijñānas into the three bodies and a fundamental purity. Cf. the transformations in Ratnākaraśānti’s Prajñā­pāramitopadeśa, shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa’i man ngag, Degé Tengyur (sems tsam, hi), 141a7, and Khasamā­nāma­ṭīkā, nam mkha’ dang mnyam pa zhes bya ba’i rgya cher ’grel pa, Degé Tengyur (rgyud, wa), translated and explained by Seton (pp. 97–101).
n.­1392
This means the time of birth, the time of death, and the duration of a life in between.
n.­1393
’bum ta 121a6, nyi khri 33.­3. Gilgit 510.7 vigopayati, cf. Edg, s.v. avikopana, LSPW “alter.” khri brgyad 43.­3 (kha 136b5) ’khrug; le’u brgyad ma nga 223a4 dkrugs; PSP 4: 68 vikopayati, “disturb.”
n.­1394
’bum ta 121a7, nyi khri 33.­3.
n.­1395
Similar to khri brgyad 43.­3; cf. ’bum ta 121b1–2, nyi khri 33.­3, Twenty-Five Thousand translation: “Therefore, as far as defining characteristics, absence of defining characteristics, both presence and absence of defining characteristics, and neither presence nor absence of defining characteristics are concerned, it is impossible for them to be known by anyone, for any of them to be known, or for them to know anything”; le’u brgyad ma nga, 223a5–6 … gang gis shes par bya ba’am/ gang shes par bya ba mi srid do (“to know or to be known”); Gilgit 510.8, ŚsPN3 4540v6 lakṣaṇaṃ cālakṣaṇaṃ ca lakṣaṇālakṣaṇaṃ ca tayor ubhayo[r] nāsti saṃbhavo yena prajānīyād yo vā prajānīyād (“something that might know or someone that might know”).
n.­1396
The perfection of wisdom is the subject.
n.­1397
chos gnas pa’i mtshan nyid is similar to the term chos gnas pa nyid (dharmasthititā): “the establishment of dharmas,” “the abiding of phenomena.”
n.­1398
The sense of tathāgata here, a synonym of the perfection of wisdom, is that all the doctrines have properly been included (tathā āgata) in it, or that it properly understands (tathā gata) all phenomena, or that all the doctrines that might be included in it do not ultimately exist (tathā a-āgata), or that all that might be properly understood is not ultimately understood (tathā a-gata) with the corresponding negative senses.
n.­1399
“Suchness” renders tathatā and “realized” renders gata.
n.­1400
K, N; D yang dag par rab tu mkhyen, “knows.”
n.­1401
khri brgyad 43.­2 ff.
n.­1402
nyi khri 33.­15, Twenty-Five Thousand translation: “Subhūti, if you ask how the tathāgatas appreciate it and are thankful for it, it is, Subhūti, because the tathāgatas serve, respect, honor, worship, and protect that very vehicle by which the tathāgatas, arhats, completely awakened buddhas reach, and that very path by which they attain, consummate buddhahood in unsurpassed, complete enlightenment. In this sense, Subhūti, it should be recognized that the tathāgatas appreciate it and are thankful for it.” Cf. khri brgyad 43.­13. The words kṛtajñatā and kṛtaveditā usually mean “appreciation” or “one who has appreciation,” and “gratitude” or “one who feels gratitude,” but here the Tib literally renders them as “cognizant of what has been done” and “acknowledge what has been done.” ’bum ta 126a6–7, nyi khri kha 281b3 render kṛtajñatā by byas pa mkhyen pa and byas pa shes pa, and kṛtaveditā by byas pa dgongs pa and byas pa dran pa.
n.­1403
D: “Fully awakened as not done (akṛta) and not changed (avikṛta).”
n.­1404
Cf. khri brgyad 43.­14; ’bum ta 126b6–7 sangs rgyas kyi ye shes byas pa med pa/ chos thams cad la ’jug pa med pa’i brdas ’jug ste, “the unmade transcendental knowledge engages with all dharmas through the convention of not engaging;” nyi khri 33.­17, Twenty-Five Thousand translation: “symbolically engage with the uncreated wisdom, which does not engage with anything.”
n.­1405
Alternatively, “the Tathāgata does not have appreciation.”
n.­1406
khri brgyad 43.­16 “not producers and not revealers”; nyi khri 33.­18, ’bum ta 127a1 “not knowers and not seers.”
n.­1407
K, N; here and in the following D has ma mthong, “it is not seen.”
n.­1408
Literally “I.” The Lord is speaking.
n.­1409
khri brgyad 43.­25: “Furthermore, Subhūti, the perfection of wisdom reveals to the tathāgatas that the world is inconceivable.”
n.­1410
In place of “does not appear,” khri brgyad 43.­37 (kha 142a3–4) shes par byar med pa’i phyir ro, “not something to be known”; nyi khri 33.­48 (kha 286b5) mnyam pa dang mi mnyam pa mi dmigs so, Twenty-Five Thousand: “with regard to physical forms, why can that which is inconceivable, inestimable, unappraisable, and equal to the unequaled not be apprehended”; PSP 4: 76 rūpaṃ hi subhūte acintyam atulyam aprameyam asaṃkhyeyam asamasaman na prajñāyate, “…does not make itself known”; le’u brgyad ma nga 230ba2 shes su ma mchis pa lags, “cannot be known.”
n.­1411
khri brgyad 43.­37.
n.­1412
khri brgyad 43.­37.
n.­1413
Earlier nyi khri 33.­35 (kha 285a3), and here 34.­1 (288a7–b1) don chen po slad du (Twenty-Five Thousand: “is established for a great purpose”); khri brgyad 43.­29 (kha 141a3) mdzad pa chen pos, 44.­1 (143b7) bgyid pa chen pos is the corresponding reading (“is made available through the tremendous work”).
n.­1414
khri brgyad 44.­3.
n.­1415
khri brgyad 44.­7: “Subhūti, I too do not see that form which you might hold on to and might settle down on, or which itself holds on and settles down. Subhūti, I too do not see… up to unsurpassed, perfect, complete awakening.”
n.­1416
khri brgyad 44.­10, K, N; D has spros pa, “enthusiasm.” prahāna, “abandonment,” also means pradhāna (=spros pa), “effort.”
n.­1417
khri brgyad 44.­13.
n.­1418
khri brgyad 44.­23.
n.­1419
khri brgyad 45.­1–45.­9.
n.­1420
khri brgyad 45.­10–45.­18. Subhūti asks, “How is it, Lord, that those sons of a good family or daughters of a good family who have set out in the Bodhisattva Vehicle have not been assisted by the perfection of wisdom and have not been assisted by skillful means and even fall to the śrāvaka level and the pratyekabuddha level?” Our author, based on the Lord’s long reply, construes the question from both the conventional and ultimate perspectives.
n.­1421
Cf. khri brgyad 45.­14 (kha 154a3), ’bum ta 255a7, nyi khri 35.­14 (kha 301b2–5), le’u brgyad ma nga 242b5: “The perfection (pāramitā, pha rol tu phyin pa) of giving has gone to the farthest limit (āram itā, pha mthar phyin/ring du song).” Our author, or at least his Tibetan translators, perhaps understood a-āraṃ / apāraṃ.
n.­1422
Cf. le’u brgyad ma nga 242b6–7 de ltar yin yang gang zag byang chub sems dpa’i theg pa pa des tshu rol yang mi shes/ pha rol yang mi shes te; LSPW p. 347: “and he knows neither the not-beyond nor the Beyond.” khri brgyad 45.­17 (kha 154b5), pha mtha’ yang shes/ pha rol yang shes, “knows the farthest limit and knows the farther shore.”
n.­1423
The immediately preceding citation ends the section. It begins at khri brgyad 45.­10 and goes up to 45.­17; nyi khri 35.­13 up to 35.­20.
n.­1424
khri brgyad 46.­1.
n.­1425
PSP 4: 94, ŚsPN3 4594 mā … rūpataḥ parāmrākṣīḥ / parāmṛkṣaḥ. Cf. khri brgyad 46.­3 (kha 155b1), nyi khri 36.­2 (kha 305a2) rtog par ma byed, “should not form an idea.”
n.­1426
khri brgyad 46.­4.
n.­1427
khri brgyad 46.­5.
n.­1428
nyi khri 36.­7 (kha 307a5); khri brgyad 46.­6 (kha 156b5) skyob.
n.­1429
khri brgyad 46.­7–46.­45.
n.­1430
Emend ’dres to ’dren.
n.­1431
khri brgyad 46.­12.
n.­1432
khri brgyad 46.­13. The Sūtra explains parāyana (“finally ally”) with pāra (“farther shore”).
n.­1433
Emend rtog to rtogs.
n.­1434
D rigs pa; K, N rig pa.
n.­1435
khri brgyad kha 159a7 nam mkha’i tshul can (ākāśagatika); ’bum ta 311a1, nyi khri kha 314a4 ngang tshul can; LSPW p. 353 “situated in space”; Ten Thousand, khri pa 22.­23 “have the modality of space.” This explains “support” (rten), that in turn renders gati, the last of the nine words describing the “doers of the difficult.” The author here takes it as the “eighty-five” places (ecosystems), but it is more often understood as a form of life, or as life itself as continual movement.
n.­1436
khri brgyad 46.­30.
n.­1437
nyi khri 36.­29; khri brgyad 46.­30 (kha 160a3) mu med pa.
n.­1438
’bum ta 330b5 ’dod chags rnam par bstal bas dben pa’i rang bzhin du ’gyur ro; khri brgyad, kha 162a2 ’dod chags bsal bas; nyi khri kha 318a6, le’u brgyad ma nga 256a7 rnam par bsal bas; Jäschke, s.v. stsol ba, points out that bstal ba is “sometimes incorr. for bsal-ba (sel-ba).” PSP 4: 106, ŚsPN3 4616r6 rāga­vinaya­vivikta­svabhāvās; LSPW p. 356 “isolated from (the need for the) disciplining of greed.”
n.­1439
khri brgyad 47.­10.
n.­1440
khri brgyad 47.­13.
n.­1441
Cf. n.­720 on bhāvanā and vibhāvanā.
n.­1442
“Irreversible from progress toward awakening” renders phyir mi ldog pa. khri brgyad, 47.­20: “Subhūti, you should look closely at a bodhisattva great being irreversible from this deep perfection of wisdom.” Cp. nyi khri 37.­29, Twenty-Five Thousand translation: “bodhisattva great beings who are irreversible should investigate this profound perfection of wisdom to determine, Subhūti, if bodhisattva great beings are without attachment to this profound perfection of wisdom.”
n.­1443
Golden 307a2, nyi khri 37.­36; khri brgyad 47.­24 (kha 165b1) rnam par spyad is a different spelling of rnam par dpyad.
n.­1444
Golden 307a6, nyi khri 37.­38; khri brgyad 47.­28 (kha 166a1) rnam par dpyod.
n.­1445
Golden 307b3; D rnam pa thams cad mkhyen pa nyid kyang gcig go, “and the knowledge of all aspects are one,” is a mistake.
n.­1446
khri brgyad 48.­1 ff.
n.­1447
khri brgyad 48.­4, PSP 4: 117 dvayasamudācāro.
n.­1448
khri brgyad 48.­10 ff.
n.­1449
Emend rnam par byed to rnam par ’byed, “explain”?
n.­1450
Golden 308a6 and D have, “Construe them all in the same way. That suchness of form has not come and has not gone. Similarly…” The citation here differs considerably from other versions and suggests our author was looking at a scripture even longer than ’bum. Cf. khri brgyad 48.­15; ’bum tha 29b4–5; nyi khri 38.­21; khri pa 23.­32–23.­33.
n.­1451
khri brgyad 48.­16.
n.­1452
khri brgyad 48.­17.
n.­1453
K, N omit this paragraph.
n.­1454
khri brgyad 48.­19.
n.­1455
khri brgyad 48.­19: “Therefore, since [the suchness] is not something else, even though the elder Subhūti takes after the Tathāgata he does not take after him in anything.”
n.­1456
khri brgyad 48.­20; cf. nyi khri 38.­28, ’bum tha 30b.
n.­1457
The “dharma of form” is the ultimate attribute of form. Our author’s version of the Sūtra differs.
n.­1458
khri brgyad 48.­23. Cf. ’bum tha 40a6–7, nyi khri 38.­35, both of which omit yang dag pa (bhūta) (“perfect,” “true”).
n.­1459
See n.­250 to 3.­4 from the Diamond Sūtra (Vajracchedikā). where this same passage was cited in Harrison’s translation: “ ‘Realized one,’ Subhūti, is a term for perfect reality.”
n.­1460
khri brgyad 48.­24.
n.­1462
Here dharmatā means both “the actual way things are” and the doctrine as a teaching articulating the way things actually are.
n.­1463
Cf. Śrījagattalanivāsin’s Āmnayānusāriṇī, man ngag rjes ’brang Degé Tengyur (shes phyin, ba), 212a2–5; Ratnākaraśānti’s Sarotamā (Jaini pp. 204–5).
n.­1464
Emend mugs to mu gas; mugs would mean “fogged up.”
n.­1465
khri brgyad 48.­26 rjes su skyes (“take after”) renders anujan, literally “born after.”
n.­1467
The word dharma here means the ultimate attribute of any dharmin (“attribute-possessor”), its emptiness.
n.­1468
The meaning is the “dharma body” dharmakāya=dharmatākāya, “the body of the true natures of the attributes [of a buddha].” The word dharma here means “attribute” or “good quality.” The “constituent” is a cause in the sense that the elements that constitute a body are the cause of it.
n.­1469
This, in slightly differing forms, is a recurring statement, as at PSP 2-3: 184 utpādād vā tathāgatānām anutpādād vā tathāgatānāṃ sthitaivaiṣā dharmāṇāṃ dharmatā dharmadhātur dharmasthititā dharmaniyāmatā.
n.­1470
nges pa renders niyata (“secure,” “definite,” and here “restriction”), and by extension niyāmatā/nyāmatā, Tib skyon med pa nyid, “flawlessness.” When skyon med pa is together with byang chub sems dpa’ (bodhisattvanyāma), skyon med pa (niyāma/nyāma) is rendered “secure state (of bodhisattvas)”; when together with dharmas (dharma(tā)niyāmatā/nyāmatā), skyon med pa nyid is rendered “certification (of dharmas),” (LSPW “established order of dharmas”). The picture is further complicated by deriving nyāmatā (skyon med pa nyid, “flawlessness”) from ni plus āma (“uncookedness,” “rawness”), rendered skyon (“flaw”) and āmana, (sred pa, “craving,” “affection”).
n.­1471
Literally, “the flawlessness in respect to them.”
n.­1472
khri brgyad 22.­4, explained earlier (Bṭ3 5.­9). Note that here zhugs (from avakram), “entered into,” could have a negative sense: “step down from”; cf. ’bum 14.­3 (nga 284b1), le’u brgyad ma nga 9a6, and nyi khri 14.­3: “Those who have stepped down from the flawlessness that is a perfect state [are incapable of producing the thought of unsurpassed, perfect, complete awakening].”
n.­1474
“Both” are the “form” and “the suchness of form” in the passage just cited.
n.­1475
K, N; D “because ‘suchness of form’ is the term used.”
n.­1476
khri brgyad 48.­33.
n.­1477
khri brgyad 48.­33–48.­40.
n.­1478
khri brgyad 48.­41.
n.­1479
This is the family of bodhisattvas spoken of in the previous paragraph: “Śāriputra, here you should know that when bodhisattva great beings, starting from the production of the first thought, are inseparable from the thought of the knowledge of all aspects…”
n.­1480
khri brgyad 48.­45.
n.­1481
nyi khri 38.­68; khri brgyad 48.­46 (kha 175b2) sla in place of mi dka’.
n.­1482
Golden 314b2.
n.­1483
khri brgyad 48.­47.
n.­1484
khri brgyad 48.­48–48.­61.
n.­1485
khri brgyad 48.­62; LSPW pp. 371–72: “When one adopts the method of considering dharmas in their ultimate reality, which Subhuti the elder uses in his exposition.”
n.­1486
khri brgyad 48.­64.
n.­1488
khri brgyad 48.­74.
n.­1489
khri brgyad 48.­75.
n.­1490
khri brgyad 48.­99, nyi khri 38.­110: “That is how bodhisattva great beings should train in the perfection of wisdom and skillful means. Training like that, standing like that, their form will be without obscuration.”
n.­1491
Bṭ1 pa 160b2–7: “It teaches that they gain the obscuration-free knowledge of all dharmas, form and so on. Why? Because they did not seize form in the past. This teaches the reason why obscuration is absent relative to all dharmas. They have seen that all dharmas were nonexistent things in the past and hence have not seized on an existent thing or a causal sign. That is why obscuration is absent. That is the meaning. What is the reason for that? ‘Even that absence of seizing form is not form,’ up to ‘… knowledge of all aspects.’ That absence of seizing all dharmas, form and so on, is not an absence of seizing something that exists, because ultimately all dharmas are empty of an intrinsic nature, therefore the dharmas, form and so on, are not existent things and hence are not seized.”
n.­1492
At khri brgyad 48.­30 it says, “Sixty bodhisattvas lacking in what is necessary stopped appropriating anything and their minds were freed from contamination.” This leads to an exchange between Śāriputra and the Lord (48.­31–48.­33) and a discussion in which śrāvakas and pratyekabuddhas feature. “Why, Lord, even though they have similarly cultivated just those dharmas‍—emptiness, signlessness, and wishlessness‍—did those separated from skillful means actualize the very limit of reality and become śrāvakas and pratyekabuddhas, while those other bodhisattvas, Lord, will, thanks to skillful means, by cultivating just those dharmas‍—emptiness, signlessness, and wishlessness‍—fully awaken to unsurpassed, perfect, complete awakening?” This leads to Subhūti (48.­46) saying it is not hard to awaken to unsurpassed, perfect, complete awakening. Śāriputra (48.­47) says this leads to an absurdity: “If bodhisattva great beings do not believe that dharmas are like space, but still it is easy to fully awaken to unsurpassed, perfect, complete awakening, full awakening would not be hard, and bodhisattvas, as many of them as there are sand particles in the Gaṅgā River, would not turn back from unsurpassed, perfect, complete awakening.”
n.­1493
The three types are with the śrāvaka, pratyekabuddha, and bodhisattva dispositions.
n.­1494
khri brgyad 49.­1–50.­43.
n.­1495
khri brgyad 49.­11. K, N omit.
n.­1496
The five are desire for sense gratification, malice, drowsiness and dozing, gross mental excitement and uneasiness, and doubt, where the pair drowsiness and dozing are counted as one, as are the pair gross mental excitement and uneasiness.
n.­1497
The seven bad proclivities (anuśaya) according to Abhidharmakośa 5.1–2 are attachment (rāga), of which there are two based on the desire realm and two upper realms, anger (pratigha), pride (māna), ignorance (avidyā), view (dṛṣṭi), and doubt (vicikitsā).
n.­1498
khri brgyad 49.­29.
n.­1499
khri brgyad 49.­30–49.­31.
n.­1500
khri brgyad 49.­32.
n.­1501
khri brgyad 49.­35: They have gained the forbearance because they have entered “into the secure state of a bodhisattva.”
n.­1502
khri brgyad 50.­4: “Lord, do you call an irreversible bodhisattva great being ‘irreversible,’ or do you call a bodhisattva who turns back ‘irreversible’?”
n.­1503
khri brgyad 50.­11. The four are: “They personally practice the perfection of giving, and they inspire others to practice the perfection of giving, speak in praise of practicing the perfection of giving, and speak in praise of others practicing the perfection of giving as well, welcoming it.”
n.­1504
khri brgyad 50.­12: “without oppressing anyone by unleashing the oppression that causes others mental distress.”
n.­1505
This supports the reading at khri brgyad 50.­13. ’bum tha 137a3, nyi khri 40.­12 (kha 366a4–5) have lag na rdo rje’i rigs rnams, “Vajrapāṇi families”; khri pa 31.­47 (nga 361b4) rdo rje’i rigs lnga brgya, “five hundred Vajra families.”
n.­1506
khri brgyad 50.­19–50.­29.
n.­1507
khri brgyad 50.­30–50.­34.
n.­1508
khri brgyad 50.­35.
n.­1509
Our author (or the translator) reads nominative plurals, as at PSP 1: 141 hi tās tathatā yā. Cp. khri brgyad 49.­2 de bzhin nyid las de dag, where the translator reads an ablative (tathatāyā): “have no doubt at all that they are not each separate from suchness”; cp. nyi khri 39.­2, Twenty-Five Thousand translation: “they are not in the slightest consumed by doubt, thinking that the real nature is individual, dual, or neither.”
n.­1510
The different noble persons, from śrāvakas to buddhas, are ultimately “suchness, unchanging, undifferentiated, not two, and not divided.” The sign that the bodhisattvas are irreversible is their understanding that does not reify a “suchness” over and above each of their individual suchnesses. Their suchnesses are both unique to each of them separately and yet make them ultimately the same.
n.­1511
khri brgyad 49.­4.
n.­1512
khri brgyad 49.­7.
n.­1513
khri brgyad 50.­5: “Subhūti, irreversible bodhisattvas are said to ‘turn back,’ and bodhisattvas who turn back are said to be ‘irreversible.’ ”
n.­1514
khri brgyad 51.­3; nyi khri 41.­3, ’bum tha 145b: “please reveal the profound states…”
n.­1515
PSP 4: 193 kathaṃ bhagavan bodhisattvo mahāsattvaḥ śūnyatāyāṃ sthitaḥ śūnyatāṃ na sākṣātkaroti; ’bum tha 199b4, nyi khri ga 7b3 mngon sum du m(y)i bgyid pa lags; ŚsPN4 9817v7 kathaṃ bhagavan bodhisattvo mahāsattvaḥ śūnyatāyāṃ sthitaḥ śūnyatāṃ sākṣātkaroti; LSPW p. 406 “how then does [he] who has stood in emptiness, realize emptiness?”
n.­1516
1. Is it the emptiness of the perfection of wisdom that practices the perfection of wisdom? 2. Can you apprehend any dharma other than the perfection of wisdom that is practicing the perfection of wisdom? 3. Does the perfection of wisdom practice the perfection of wisdom? 4. Does emptiness practice emptiness? 5. Does something other than emptiness practice emptiness? 6. Does form and so on practice the perfection of wisdom? 7. Do the six perfections and so on practice the perfection of wisdom? 8. Is it the emptiness of form and so on that practices the perfection of wisdom? 9. Is it the emptiness of the four fearlessnesses that practices the perfection of wisdom? 10. If those dharmas do not practice the perfection of wisdom, how does a bodhisattva great being practice when one practices the perfection of wisdom?
n.­1517
This is placed later by Haribhadra at PSP 5: 44.
n.­1518
K, N; D adds here, and below, “and by way of being delighted by” (dga’i ba’i tshul gyis), probably an accidental addition by a block-cutter.
n.­1519
In Haribhadra’s version (PSP 5: 50, le’u brgyad ma, ca, 74a7) this is located in a different part of the Sūtra.
n.­1520
K, N yon tan la in place of rje su ’brel ba (anuśaṃsā in place of anubandha); ’bum da 132b3, nyi khri ga 119a7 just sems kyi rgyun ma chad pa dang / ma bral bar spyad par bgyi. PSP 5: 111 kiṃ punar bhagavaṃś cittāntarānām avakāśan dadatā prajñāpāramitāyāṃ caritavyam; le’u brgyad ma ca 133b1 sems gzhan gyi go skabs mi ’byed par, “not giving an occasion for other thoughts.”
n.­1521
The four questions are: “How will (1) suchness, how will (2) the very limit of reality, how will (3) the dharma-constituent, and how will (4) the self element, up to the person element, reach the knowledge of all aspects?” Alternatively, it intends these four questions: “Will they reach the knowledge of all aspects (1) having meditated, (2) without having meditated, (3) having meditated when they meditated and without having meditated when they did not meditate, or (4) without having meditated and without having not meditated?”
n.­1522
Noteworthy here is the omission of the question, “Lord, how will one train in, up to the knowledge of all aspects, without taking anything away and without adding anything?”
n.­1523
khri brgyad, K, N, ’bum da 152a7, nyi khri 53.­128.
n.­1524
This question perhaps includes a second rhetorical question, PSP 5: 120: “Well then, Lord, the tathāgatas stood in miraculous powers in a succession / (GilgitC 142) in error”? Alternatively, the absence of the second question here suggests that the rhetorical question at PSP 5: 120 is an unsupported addition to the Sūtra.
n.­1525
’bum da 175a4, ŚsPN4 9965v10. khri brgyad 63.­193, PSP 5: 126 have “Before reaching the knowledge of all aspects, is there an uncompounded elimination of afflictions?”
n.­1526
This question in four parts is placed in a different order here and below (5.­1148) than in the presently extant versions of the Sūtra. The four questions are: “Do they actualize the very limit of reality (1) having stood on the path, (2) having stood on what is not the path, (3) having stood on both the path and what is not the path, or (4) having stood on neither the path nor what is not the path? And, have they “stopped appropriating anything and become freed in their hearts from outflows having stood on a path?” and so on (four alternatives).
n.­1527
khri brgyad 63.­201: “Lord, how will a later limit be designated?”
n.­1528
don dang tshul gyis (PSP 2-3:149 arthataś ca nayataś), absent from other versions. The translation is from LSPW.
n.­1529
The three questions are: “Does a dual dharma reach a nondual dharma? Does a nondual dharma reach a nondual dharma? Does a nondual dharma reach a dual dharma?”
n.­1530
khri brgyad 65.­12: “Lord, if they do not practice the perfection of giving in a dualistic way, and similarly, up to do not practice the knowledge of all aspects in a dualistic way, how will the bodhisattva great beings, starting from the production of the first thought, grow and flourish on wholesome roots, and how will they grow and flourish on wholesome roots up to the production of the last thought?”
n.­1531
The four questions are: (1) “Can a nonexistent thing fully awaken to an existent thing, (2) can an existent thing fully awaken to a nonexistent thing, (3) can a nonexistent thing fully awaken to a nonexistent thing, and (4) and an existent thing fully awaken to an existent thing?”
n.­1532
K, N. Emend D bdag gi to dag gis? (PSP 5: 154, GilgitC 183, ŚsPN4/2 3r4 jānīyāma). Cf. khri brgyad 69.­23; ’bum da 257a7–b2: “Given that it would be impossible for a bodhisattva great being to enter into the fixed state of a bodhisattva and reach the knowledge of all aspects, how, Lord, am I to understand a bodhisattva great being entering into the fixed state of a bodhisattva having completed all paths, and having entered into the fixed state of a bodhisattva reaching the knowledge of all aspects and eliminating all residual impression connections?” le’u brgyad ma ca 173b4 lam de snyed ma thob par rnam pa thams cad mkhyen pa nyid thob bar ji ltar mi ’gyur lags, “How, if one does not attain all the paths, as many as there are, would one not not attain the knowledge of all aspects?” The psychological dimension of “complete” (a path) includes (1) unbroken bodhicitta, (2) knowing that paths ultimately go nowhere, (3) knowing a path has temporary value for the beings attracted to it, and (4) knowledge of each path after having learned and practiced it.
n.­1533
’bum da 265b3.
n.­1534
Earlier khri brgyad 69.­43, in response to the question, “Lord, how is the disintegration of meditation on all dharmas meditation on the perfection of wisdom?” “The Lord said, ‘The disintegration of meditation on form is meditation on the perfection of wisdom.’ ” Cf. ’bum da 272b7.
n.­1535
’bum da 294a3.
n.­1536
This question is ungrammatical. The order of the questions here is problematic.
n.­1537
’bum da 295a1.
n.­1538
nyi khri 59.­8.
n.­1539
This formulation of the question makes better sense than the version at khri brgyad 71.­5, which begins, “If in the absence of an apprehended object there is no attainment, there is no clear realization, and there is no unsurpassed, perfect, complete awakening…” LSPW p. 508, n. 3, says, “The last clause of this sentence puzzles me, and the translation is only approximately right.”
n.­1540
nyi khri 60.­15.
n.­1541
’bum da 345a4.
n.­1542
nyi khri 61.­1; cf. khri brgyad 72.­1.
n.­1543
The complete question is: “Lord, what is the difference between these two types of patience: the forbearance for dharmas that are not produced of śrāvakas and pratyekabuddhas and the forbearance for dharmas of bodhisattva great beings?”
n.­1544
khri brgyad 72.­27. This derives nyāma (PSP niyāma) (“fixed state”) from āma (“hardheadedness”) (Conze “rawness,” Twenty-Five Thousand “immaturity”). The Tib translators render āma with skyon (“flaw”) and nyāma with skyon med (“flawlessness”).
n.­1545
’bum na 38b7; cf. khri brgyad 73.­23. This question is not in fact asked by Subhūti but is one of a series of rhetorical questions posed by the Lord in response to Subhūti.
n.­1546
’bum na 41b3–4; cf. khri brgyad 73.­35, “Well then, Lord, is there a distinction to be made between a bodhisattva great being and a tathāgata?”
n.­1547
khri brgyad 73.­111: “Lord, when one has become habituated to the path does the result appear and does one attain the result?” ’bum na 86a3, nyi khri 62.­99: “Lord, when one has become habituated to the path does one attain the result or does one not attain the result?” le’u brgyad ma ca 251a3 bcom ldan ’das ci lags/ lam bsgoms pas ’bras bu ’thob pa’am/ ’bras bu ’thob par bgyi pa ma mchis sam: “Lord, when one has become habituated to the path does one attain or does one cause the result to be attained?”
n.­1548
Emend both D rigs su tshar bcad and K, N rigs su bcad to ris su bcad? khri brgyad 73.­113 (ga 87a1) tshar bcad pa’i tshul kyis, “by curbing.” Cf. below Bṭ3 5.­1376 (F.272a7) char bcad pa’i tshul gyis. khri brgyad ga 86a7 gal te ’dus byas kyi khams sam/ ’dus ma byas kyi khams la tshar bcad pas. LSPW pp. 538–39: “without having cut off the share of either the conditioned or the unconditioned element.” Gilgit 628.4–5 na ca bhāgacchedena saṃskṛtadhātau asaṃskṛtadhātau vā vyavasthānam; AAVN 103b6 phala­bhāgacchedābhāva­praśnena; ’bum na 86a5–6, nyi khri 62.­100 (ga 245b1), le’u brgyad ma ca 251a5–6 ’dus byas kyi khams sam/ ’dus ma byas kyi khams ris su bcad cing; khri pa nga 337b ’dus byas kyi khams la’am/ ’dus ma byas kyi khams la tshar bcad pa’i tshul kyis, Twenty-Five Thousand translation: “eradicating (bhāgacchedena, tshar gcad pas).”
n.­1549
’bum na 97a2. Gilgit 631.14 yathā kathaṃ punar. khri brgyad 74.­31, corroborated by PSP 6-8: 80: “Lord, how do bodhisattva great beings practicing the perfection of wisdom train in the five appropriating aggregates?”
n.­1550
’bum a 123b5–7 is: “Lord, if the very limit of reality limit is thus not one thing and the limit of beings is not another, well then, does the very limit of reality rest at the very limit of reality? Lord, if the very limit of reality rests at the very limit of reality, an intrinsic nature will rest in intrinsic nature. Lord, given that an intrinsic nature does not rest in intrinsic nature, how, Lord, is a bodhisattva great being practicing the perfection of wisdom going to establish the limit of beings at the very limit of reality?” At khri brgyad 75.­3, the beginning of the question differs, “Lord, if the very limit of reality is also the limit of beings…?” The remainder of the question is the same.
n.­1551
khri brgyad 75.­5. The part left out is: “establish beings at the very limit of reality without complicating the very limit of reality?”
n.­1552
khri brgyad 75.­18. The part left out is: “and if in the emptiness of a basic nature a being is not apprehended, nor are a dharma and a path apprehended, Lord, how will bodhisattva great beings stand in the knowledge of all aspects?”
n.­1553
’bum na 191a6–7.
n.­1554
K, N.
n.­1555
khri brgyad 75.­40; nyi khri 64.­50, ’bum na 191a4 sems dpa’ chen po’i byang chub, “If a bodhisattva great being’s awakening is not practiced…”
n.­1556
nyi khri 64.­50: “Lord, if a bodhisattva great being’s awakening is not practiced by taking anything up or not taking anything up, is not a practice of form, up to is not a practice of the knowledge of all aspects, well then, Lord, how will a bodhisattva great being practice the six perfections… practice the eighteen distinct attributes of a buddha?” This is followed by the question “how will one complete the ten bodhisattva levels?” khri brgyad 75.­40, does not demarcate the two separate questions, twenty-two and twenty-three.
n.­1557
The five questions are: (1) do they reach awakening on that path that has been produced, (2) on that path that has not been produced, (3) on that path that has not been produced when it is not produced and is produced when it is produced, or (4) on that path that has neither been produced nor not produced, and (5) how do they reach awakening?
n.­1558
Emend D des shes to nges zhes.
n.­1559
’bum na 309a5, nyi khri 67.­6 (ga 305b7), le’u brgyad ma ca 302b2 de ltar nges pa, “a bodhisattva destined like that”; khri brgyad 78.­10, “a bodhisattva great being with such wholesome roots.”
n.­1560
The question is put in the mouth of the Lord at khri brgyad 78.­17, and also at ’bum na 310a2–3 and nyi khri 67.­10.
n.­1561
The question as it is found here is closest to a paraphrase of ’bum na 334b, nyi khri 67.­58 (ga 314a7), le’u brgyad ma ca 309b4–5: bcom ldan ’das byang chub sems dpa’i sems dpa’ chen po lam gyi yan lag yongs su rdzogs par bgyis shing / bla na myed pa yang dag par rdzogs pa’i byang chub tu mngon par rdzogs par ’tshang rgya bar ’gyur ba’i lam de dag gang lags. “Lord, what are the paths, when the branches of those paths have been completed, through which a bodhisattva great being will fully awaken to unsurpassed, perfect, complete awakening?” The question at khri brgyad 78.­51, is: “Lord, what are the branches of the bodhisattva great beings’ awakening, having completed which the bodhisattva great beings will fully awaken to unsurpassed, perfect, complete awakening?”
n.­1562
The question at khri brgyad 81.­23, is: “Lord, if in the sameness of all dharmas ‘this is an ordinary person, this is a stream enterer,’ up to ‘this is a pratyekabuddha, this is a bodhisattva,’ up to ‘this is a tathāgata, worthy one, perfectly complete buddha’ all cannot be apprehended, in that case would foolish ordinary people, faith-followers and dharma-followers, stream enterers, once-returners, non-returners, worthy ones, pratyekabuddhas, bodhisattvas, and even tathāgatas, worthy ones, perfectly complete buddhas not have specific features?”
n.­1563
khri brgyad 82.­3. I have supplied the referent “emptiness” from the context.
n.­1564
khri brgyad 82.­10. The part left out is: “and those other dharmas‍—the result of stream enterer, result of once-returner, result of non-returner, and state of a worthy one‍—also magical creations? And are those other dharmas‍—the Pratyekabuddha level, the Buddha level, and the elimination of all residual impressions, connections, and afflictions‍—are those dharmas…”
n.­1565
nyi khri 41.­5; khri brgyad 51.­7 zab pa.
n.­1566
khri brgyad 51.­12–51.­16.
n.­1567
The wholesome roots of an irreversible bodhisattva are so vast that an immense amount of them would be left over even after using them to fill up that many world systems.
n.­1568
khri brgyad 51.­22.
n.­1569
khri brgyad 51.­23.
n.­1570
khri brgyad 51.­32. This is Subhūti’s fourth question.
n.­1571
khri brgyad 51.­33.
n.­1572
khri brgyad 51.­34. This is Subhūti’s fifth question.
n.­1573
nyi khri 41.­33; Gilgit 575.12–13 asaṃkhyeyam api [emend to iti] subhūte yat saṃkhyām nopeti saṃskṛte vā dhātā ca [delete ca] asaṃskrte vā dhatau.
n.­1574
nyi khri 41.­35; cf. khri brgyad 51.­39. This is the response to Subhūti’s sixth question.
n.­1575
khri brgyad 51.­43. The “great compassion” is part of the extract according to le’u brgyad ma ca 6a2 thugs rje chen po’i rgyu mthun gyis bstan pa; cf. Abhi­samayālaṃkāra 4.55c (Wogihara p. 710) kṛpāniṣyandabhūtās te.
n.­1576
khri brgyad 51.­46. This is Subhūti’s eighth question.
n.­1577
khri brgyad 51.­48.
n.­1578
This is Subhūti’s tenth question.
n.­1579
Literally, “by way of the accumulation of residual impressions left by volitional factors.”
n.­1580
K, N omit.
n.­1581
khri brgyad 51.­61.
n.­1582
This is a paraphrase of khri brgyad 51.­61–51.­65.
n.­1583
Śrījagattalanivāsin’s Āmnayānusāriṇī, man ngag gi rjes su brang ba Degé Tengyur (shes phyin, ba), 231a–b provides helpful glosses for this part of the text.
n.­1584
Perhaps emend chos can ma yin to chos can yin, “that which has been produced is subject to stopping.”
n.­1585
nyi khri 41.­60; khri brgyad 51.­67 omits yang.
n.­1586
Golden 335a3, citing nyi khri 41.­66, khri brgyad 51.­73.
n.­1587
khri brgyad 51.­80.
n.­1588
The two elders, Śāriputra and Subhūti, discussed how a bodhisattva, for the sake of those who benefit from such a model, models the meditations on emptiness, signlessness, and wishlessness that deliver a śrāvaka to nirvāṇa, while employing the skillful means to avoid actually entering nirvāṇa.
n.­1589
Cf. khri brgyad 52.­10: “ordinary beings, having made each separate one into a causal sign”; nyi khri 42.­8, ’bum tha 182b5 omit “ordinary beings” and “each separate one.”
n.­1590
khri brgyad 52.­22–52.­53.
n.­1591
Golden 339b3 thams cad la don yod pa, “are not all fully answered.” The bodhisattvas make the prayers that are vows to complete the six perfections and purify a buddhafield as explained at length at this point in the Sūtra.
n.­1592
Emend lus to lung. khri brgyad 53.­1–53.­11.
n.­1593
Earlier (5.­661), it said “the sixteenth question is, ‘How do bodhisattva great beings fully master emptiness?’ ” The question has not been repeated here.
n.­1594
Cf. khri brgyad 54.­2.
n.­1595
Cf. khri brgyad 54.­2; nyi khri 44.­2.
n.­1596
khri brgyad 54.­2: “Because they are well trained in phenomena that are empty of their own marks, so they see that all those phenomena‍—an actualizer, something to be actualized, and something through which there is actualization‍—are not joined and are not disjoined.”
n.­1597
A “cessation” (nirodha, ’gog pa) is a nirvāṇa.
n.­1598
In the absence of the Skt it is hard to be certain of the meaning of rang bzhin gyi sems (*prakṛtacitta) (“mind in its ordinary state”). Alternatively, “a thought of the intrinsic nature.”
n.­1599
khri brgyad 54.­7–54.­11.
n.­1600
Read bar ma dor in place of par ma dor.
n.­1601
Cf. nyi khri 44.­13, Twenty-Five Thousand translation: “I should release all these sentient beings who maintain inauthentic doctrines”; khri brgyad 54.­13: “these beings who are deceived because they perceive nonexistent phenomena as existing.”
n.­1602
khri brgyad 54.­14–54.­15.
n.­1603
khri brgyad 54.­16.
n.­1604
khri brgyad 54.­17.
n.­1605
khri brgyad 54.­18.
n.­1606
khri brgyad 54.­19.
n.­1607
khri brgyad 54.­22: “Subhūti, you should ask bodhisattva great beings thus practicing mastery of those thirty-seven dharmas on the side of awakening, ‘How do bodhisattva great beings who want to fully awaken to unsurpassed, perfect, complete awakening cultivate the perfection of wisdom?’ ”
n.­1608
This renders rab tu rtogs pa literally, “realized well”; cf. khri brgyad 54.­22 (kha 224b1), nyi khri 44.­24 (ga 13b6) rab tu ’byed, “sort out,” “distinguish.”
n.­1609
This means through the lack of skillful means that leads a bodhisattva to say to another bodhisattva that it is necessary to reject a śrāvaka’s meditation on emptiness, signlessness, and wishlessnes.
n.­1610
Cf. khri brgyad 54.­25; nyi khri 44.­28, ’bum tha 212a1.
n.­1611
I have translated this without emendation even though it is a repetition.
n.­1612
khri brgyad 55.­1–55.­32.
n.­1613
khri brgyad 55.­34. This is the response to Subhūti’s eighteenth question, “Lord, what is the mark of the perfection of wisdom?”
n.­1614
khri brgyad 55.­9 ff. The “and so on” brings in the impediment to the perfection of wisdom posed by the false projection of superiority over other bodhisattvas because of living in physical isolation, engaging in austerities, and mistaking Māra for a spiritual friend.
n.­1615
N, K, Golden 343a2; D: “it is not the nonexistence of an intrinsic nature.”
n.­1616
khri brgyad 55.­44.
n.­1617
khri brgyad 55.­45–55.­52.
n.­1618
khri brgyad 55.­53. This is Subhūti’s twentieth question.
n.­1619
This is Subhūti’s twenty-first question.
n.­1620
This is Subhūti’s twenty-second question.
n.­1621
khri brgyad 55.­70.
n.­1622
khri brgyad 55.­72. This is Subhūti’s twenty-third question.
n.­1623
This statement by “Śatakratu, head of the gods” (khri brgyad 56.­1) brings to an end an exchange between Subhūti and the Buddha that begins (khri brgyad 51.­3) where Subhūti makes the request, “would that you might also well expound those deep places standing in which bodhisattva great beings practicing the six perfections complete… the knowledge of all aspects.”
n.­1624
This is a general characterization of khri brgyad 56.­1–58.­4: glorification (56.­1), good qualities (ends 56.­8), Śatakratu and Ānanda (ends 56.­10), the description of Māra and the work of Māra (56.­11), the description of what happens because of that work (56.­26), how one should behave in the presence of persons in the Bodhisattva Vehicle (56.­31), sameness (57.­1), ending, detachment, and cessation (57.­3), the benefits of training (57.­7), surpassing nonbeings (57.­21), the Śatakratu passage (58.­1), and the immeasurable merit (58.­4).
n.­1625
Here sems can ma yin pa rnams means those for whom life is not the perfect moment for the practice of the perfection of wisdom‍—those without “the perfect human rebirth.”
n.­1626
khri brgyad 58.­5.
n.­1627
khri brgyad 58.­8. I have added the word “awakening” based on the following gloss.
n.­1628
Based on the fact that there has been a transformation of the basis, awakening will not be in that thought, which is to say, awakening will not be the same as the state of mind during the first moment of bodhicitta. Ultimately, they are not different, so it will not be in another moment of bodhicitta, which is to say awakening will not be other than the state of mind during the first moment of bodhicitta.
n.­1629
This is the response to Subhūti’s twenty-eighth question (nyi khri 48.­10), “Lord, in what way will a thought that is like an illusion fully awaken to unsurpassed, perfect, complete awakening?” Its presence here perhaps buttresses the argument that Haribhadra changed the order of his version (PSP 5: 37, le’u brgyad ma ca 63a7).
n.­1630
“Extremely isolated” means totally isolated from the aspirations of śrāvakas or from its own hypothetical intrinsic nature.
n.­1631
Unsurpassed, perfect, complete awakening.
n.­1632
khri brgyad kha 254a2 rnam par gzhig pa; cf. nyi khri ga 48a5 rnam par bsgom pa.
n.­1633
Here “it” means a dharma that is cultivated or eliminated.
n.­1634
Cf. khri brgyad 58.­14; nyi khri 48.­14.
n.­1635
khri brgyad 58.­14. This is Subhūti’s twenty-ninth question.
n.­1636
The section specifically dealing with the absence of vikalpa (“conceptualization,” “thought construction”) is khri brgyad 58.­18–58.­29. Cf. nyi khri 48.­19, PSP 5: 37, le’u brgyad ma ca 63a7 ff.
n.­1637
khri brgyad 58.­31. This is not said by the Lord, but is an exchange between Subhūti and Śāriputra.
n.­1638
I have added “It is right to bow down to those bodhisattva great beings,” which comes at the beginning of the sentence at khri brgyad 59.­3.
n.­1639
khri brgyad 59.­4. The first aspect is just as space is isolated, utterly other than the material objects within it, so too is a being in their inner absolute nature utterly other than the falsely imagined being the person projects. The second aspect is as follows: to buckle on armor to fight the hard fight is to do what is difficult, but seeing the space-like emptiness of all things is the armor that makes the difficult practice of the six perfections, which is done in order to bring about the welfare of infinite beings, doable. Third, just as beings are empty and isolated, like space, so are all the dharmas that locate them.
n.­1640
khri brgyad 59.­4–59.­20.
n.­1641
nyi khri 49.­29, le’u brgyad ma ca 69b4–5, and in a slightly different translation khri brgyad 59.­20. This is Subhūti’s thirty-first question.
n.­1642
This reading, a good one not attested in the present versions of the Sūtra, does not support Conze’s conjecture (GilgitC, 265 n. 10) that GilgitC 66 tathāgata­nirmito (le’u brgyad ma ca 70a2 gang de bzhin gshegs pa’i sprul pa) is a corruption of Aṣṭa (Wogihara p. 858, Mitra p. 453) tathatā­vinirmukto nānyaḥ kaścid dharmam upalabhyate; cf. ŚsPN4 9869v10.
n.­1643
khri brgyad 59.­23–61.­7.
n.­1644
khri brgyad 60.­38.
n.­1645
khri brgyad 61.­4.
n.­1646
This is in response to the question, “Lord, how are bodhisattva great beings to accomplish the perfection of wisdom?” The response is that everything is akṣaya (“inexhaustible,” a word similar in sound to ākāśa, “space”), so all dharmas are indivisible as thoroughly established phenomena, so seeing them as dharmas, and seeing them as the inexhaustible ultimate reality of things, produces wisdom.
n.­1647
I am unsure exactly which part of the Sūtra our author is referring to, whether it includes the section of dependent origination or whether it begins from khri brgyad 61.­9 and goes up to 61.­30. Just below our author will reference “each of the six perfections being connected one with the other,” a section that perhaps begins at 61.­13.
n.­1648
khri brgyad 62.­43.
n.­1649
This omits the analogy of the sun and moon.
n.­1650
The six perfections are khri brgyad 61.­13–62.­56; skillful means and the account of the completion of the accumulations, the illustrations, and the six perfections go up to 63.­25.
n.­1651
khri brgyad 63.­26.
n.­1652
khri brgyad 63.­29.
n.­1653
khri brgyad 63.­38.
n.­1654
khri brgyad 63.­40.
n.­1655
khri brgyad 63.­46.
n.­1656
khri brgyad 63.­51: “All phenomena are without attachment and have not been taken hold of”; nyi khri 53.­41 (ga 104b5) med pa (asattāḥ in place of GilgitC 120, note c asaktāḥ): “All phenomena do not exist and have not been taken hold of.”
n.­1657
khri brgyad 63.­53: “ ‘Subhūti,’ replied the Lord, ‘here bodhisattva great beings practicing the perfection of wisdom do not settle down on form.’ ”
n.­1658
khri brgyad 63.­55.
n.­1659
khri brgyad 63.­60.
n.­1660
khri brgyad 63.­64.
n.­1661
The nine kun tu sbyor ba/ kun sbyor (samyojana) were given earlier at 1.­36. “Conjoin” renders samyuj, “fetter” renders samyojana.
n.­1662
Literally this says, “I will stand in a maturation of charming aggregates and so on.”
n.­1663
khri brgyad 63.­66–63.­72; “the ocean is the door of all rivers.”
n.­1664
khri brgyad 63.­75.
n.­1665
khri brgyad 63.­82.
n.­1666
khri brgyad 63.­85; “limit,” “summit,” “edge” (mtha’) render koṭi.
n.­1667
khri brgyad 63.­97.
n.­1668
lam gyi rgyun bcad pa is probably an archaic translation (based on the original meaning of the root śrambh) that escaped the eye of an editor. Mvy attests rgyun bcad pa as rendering pratiprasrabdha (PSP 5: 110). Cf. GilgitC 134 prasrabdhi­mārga­kuśalo; khri brgyad kha 303a7–b1, le’u brgyad ma ca 132a3 shin tu sbyang ba; ’bum da 125b6, nyi khri ga 118a5 rab tu sbyang ba, “skilled in the path with pliancy,” which is to say, a path that has incorporated calm abiding (śamatha).
n.­1669
khri brgyad 63.­101.
n.­1670
PSP 5: 110 ākāśa­śūnyatā­bhāvanayā prajñāpāramitā bhāvayitavyā. GilgitC 135, nyi khri 53.­96, LSPW pp. 468–69 differ.
n.­1671
“These” are the practice of, the accomplishment of, and the meditation on the perfection of wisdom.
n.­1672
D gal; Golden 357b3, K, N gal te, “because of worrying about whether they have been disturbed by the passage propounding a duality.”
n.­1673
This is in response to the question, “Well then, Lord, how will they reach the knowledge of all aspects?”
n.­1674
Cf. khri brgyad 63.­126 (ga 3b4), which has gzhig pa in place of rnam par gzhig pa; nyi khri ga 121b2 bsgom pa’am rnam par bsgom pa.
n.­1675
The gloss suggests the translators understood gzhig pa (vibhāvana) here, at least, as a future form of ’jig, “to destroy,” not as “investigate.”
n.­1676
khri brgyad 63.­129.
n.­1677
khri brgyad 63.­131. This is Subhūti’s ninety-ninth question.
n.­1678
Bṭ1 pa 245a5: “Even though bodhisattvas beginning the work are not able to complete the ultimate practice of not apprehending all dharmas, they should train to the extent they are able.”
n.­1679
This is the reading at ’bum da 152a7, nyi khri 53.­128, Bṭ1 pa 245b3, GilgitC 139, ŚsPN4 9956r8 and PSP 5: 116. An alternative translation: “Lord, does apprehending not apprehend or does the absence of apprehending not apprehend?” khri brgyad 63.­137 differs.
n.­1680
khri brgyad 63.­138.
n.­1681
khri brgyad 63.­138. Alternative translation: “the sameness of providing a basis for apprehending and not providing a basis for apprehending is the absence of a basis for apprehending.”
n.­1682
To paraphrase Bṭ1 pa 245b3–6: Someone thinks that when bodhisattvas do not apprehend something it means there is something intrinsically real left as an object when not apprehending occurs. With that in mind the person asks if the object is something real that can be apprehended or something real that cannot be apprehended. The Lord responds that it is neither of those two.
n.­1683
khri brgyad 63.­140.
n.­1684
Golden 355b4.
n.­1685
5.­515, explaining khri brgyad 43.­14.
n.­1686
khri brgyad 63.­150.
n.­1687
I have added some words from khri brgyad 63.­152 to make the citation readable in English.
n.­1688
khri brgyad 63.­158.
n.­1689
khri brgyad 63.­163: “Subhūti, the true nature of dharmas on account of which the tathāgata has become worthy of the offerings of the world with its gods and humans is just that true nature of dharmas on account of which the magical creation has become worthy of the offerings of the world with its gods and humans.”
n.­1691
khri brgyad 63.­167.
n.­1692
khri brgyad 63.­170.
n.­1693
khri brgyad 63.­175.
n.­1694
Abhidharmakośa 6.26 ff. (Pruden, vol. 3, p. 945).
n.­1695
The three marks in this context are emptiness, signlessness, and wishlessness, being the present, past, and future form of things.
n.­1696
These are the first two of ten antidotes that counteract obstacles to the ten bodhisattva levels given in the Madhyānta­vibhāga 2.14–16 cited earlier (5.­194). The remaining ones are the outflow’s tip sense, ungraspable sense, undifferentiated continuums sense, being-neither-defiled-nor-pure sense, nondiverse sense, (and the four sovereignties:) sovereignty over nonconceptuality and purification of the buddhafield, sovereignty over knowledge, and sovereignty over action.
n.­1697
khri brgyad 63.­190.
n.­1698
khri brgyad 63.­192.
n.­1699
nyi khri 53.­180, khri brgyad 63.­196 omit “voices.”
n.­1700
This is referring to accounts of a handsome worthy one gazing at himself in a mirror because of the force of habit, Maudgalyāyana’s hopping while walking because of the force of habit from his physical movements as a monkey in earlier lives, and Pilindavatsa’s use of a word for a low caste woman when addressing his apology to the goddess Gaṅgā, because of the force of habit from the language he used as an upper caste person in earlier lives. Mppś English (vol. 1, p. 114). Bailey (p. 199) says Pilindavatsa used the derogatory name for the goddess Gaṅgā when the river had swept away a monastery on its banks.
n.­1701
This is Subhūti’s one hundred and twenty-sixth question (5.­773). At khri brgyad 63.­180–63.­189; PSP 5: 124–26; GilgitC 147–48; ’bum da 173b–174b; nyi khri 53.­165–53.­173; and le’u brgyad ma ca 144a7–145a it comes earlier in the explanation of the differences between the three knowledges.
n.­1702
khri brgyad 63.­197.
n.­1703
Harrison (p. 145, n. 44) says that by rendering asaṃskṛta­prabhāvitā “distinguished by the power they derive from the unconditioned” he has “tried to represent more than one of its possible meanings.”
n.­1704
The order of this and the next three citations does not exactly follow the order in khri brgyad 63.­200.
n.­1706
khri brgyad 63.­205. “Perfection” renders paramita; “perfect” (more literally, “ultimate superiority”) renders paramapārami. Cf. GilgitC 151 parama­pāramiprāptaiṣā subhūte prajñāpāramitā sarvadharmāṇām; ’bum da 176a6, nyi khri ga 132b5, le’u brgyad ma ca 147a1 shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa ’di ni pha rol du phyin pa’i dam pa thob pa; ŚsPN4 9966r9 paramapāramitās teṣām subhūte prajñāpāramitā sarvadharmāṇām; PSP 5: 127 parama­pāramitaiṣā subhūte sarvadharmāṇām agamanārthena prajñāpāramitety ucyate.
n.­1707
The point here is that pāramitā, for an Indian writer, is first understood as derived from parama (“ultimate,” “supreme”), in a secondary form pārama (“ultimacy,” “supremacy”) in the feminine gender (pārami). The -tā ending works as a suffix turning the word (in this case somewhat redundantly) into an abstract noun. For their own reasons, while aware of this more obvious derivation, translators into Tibetan rendered pāramitā as pha rol tu phyin pa, following a creative explanation (nirukti) deriving the word from pāram (neuter gender) (“the other side”), a word related to para (“better,” “beyond,” “other,” etc.) and i (“to go”) with the same -tā ending as a suffix, turning the word into an abstract noun. I have not translated the Tibetan words literally here because it would not convey what the author intended. Readers should also be aware that creative explanations are also derived from pāraya, from pṛ, “to cause to pass”; and from pṝ, “to cause to fill.” I do not think the Sūtra or our author has these roots in mind here, but I am not certain.
n.­1708
I have not identified the work on grammar our author is citing here. “A suffix that makes an abstract noun” renders bhāvapratyaya. “Water-element fluidity” (abdhātu­dravatva) is in reference to the defining characteristic of the water element. “Received tradition” renders Tib lung (āgama).
n.­1709
Cf. khri brgyad 63.­208. “Gone into” (chud) renders antargata, explaining pāram ita.
n.­1710
The “knowledges” here are the knowledges of śrāvakas, bodhisattvas, and buddhas.
n.­1711
Golden 362a3–5, citing khri brgyad 63.­210, with slight differences. D (F.257.b2–4) has the three forms of the homophone spyod (“a practitioner” and so on) both in the citation from the Sūtra and in the gloss.
n.­1712
“Māra and the Māra class of gods” and so on.
n.­1713
khri brgyad 63.­211. “Reality” and “good” both render the same word don (artha).
n.­1714
nyi khri 53.­188. khri brgyad 63.­211 adds “the meaning of knowledge of things as they really are” for a total of twelve.
n.­1715
K, N, Golden 362b2; D adds “that has been taught before.”
n.­1716
khri brgyad 63.­215.
n.­1717
This translation is based on Golden 363a1 na in place of D no, and D don dam in place of Golden ston tam.
n.­1718
“Nondual intrinsic nature” means an intrinsic nature that precludes two different things; “dual intrinsic nature” means an intrinsic nature that allows two different things.
n.­1719
khri brgyad 64.­1.
n.­1720
The tathāgatas are those who have gone (gata) to suchness (tathatā) (understand “go” as in a phrase like “go to pieces” not in a phrase like “go to another country”); de bzhin nyid (tathatā) (“the state of being the way things are”).
n.­1721
’bum da 187b1–2, nyi khri 54.­6, le’u brgyad ma ca 151b2–3. The tathāgatas here are “realized ones” (the root gam, “go,” is understood in its secondary meaning of “understand”). khri brgyad 64.­9: “Standing in this suchness, bodhisattva great beings gain the knowledge of all aspects, therefore it is called suchness.”
n.­1722
khri brgyad 64.­10–64.­19.
n.­1723
byang chub sems dpa’ zhugs par gyur pa. I have not emended this reading because there is a very old idea that “a bodhisattva” is a single buddha, like Śākyamuni, in his life before awakening, but unless it is emended to byang chub zhugs par gyur pa it contextually does not make sense. The mistake, if it is one, goes back a long way, leading to the need for our author’s gloss here. PSP 5: 135, and GilgitC 161 sacet subhūte ye trisāhasra­mahā­sāhasre lokadhātau sattvās te sarve bodhi­sattva­pratipannakā bhaveyus, teṣāṃ yat puṇyaṃ tat tathāgata­syārhataḥ samyaksaṃbuddhasya śatatamīm api kalān nopaiti. Conze translates the mistake (LSPW p. 481: “if they had all entered on a Bodhisattva’s special way of salvation, then their merit would be infinitesimal compared with that of a Bodhisattva great being”) and says in note 10, “I do not understand this sentence.” The correct reading is ’bum da 191b6, nyi khri 54.­23, khri brgyad 64.­19: “Subhūti, even if all the beings included in the great billion world systems were to have entered into the secure state of a bodhisattva their merit would not approach even, up to a hundred thousand one hundred millionth part of the merit of bodhisattva great beings who are candidates for awakening.” A “candidate for awakening” is in the last birth before awakening.
n.­1724
khri brgyad 64.­23.
n.­1725
khri brgyad 64.­26.
n.­1726
Cf. khri brgyad 64.­26: “Subhūti, in this way all phenomena are the nonexistence of an intrinsic nature.” Our author is breaking the compound abhāvasvabhāva (rendered “the nonexistence of an intrinsic nature”) to mean “the intrinsic nature of a nonexistent thing.”
n.­1727
khri brgyad 64.­31. This is Subhūti’s one hundred and forty-third question.
n.­1728
Cf. khri brgyad 64.­32, nyi khri 54.­37.
n.­1729
khri brgyad 65.­6. The word bhūtārtha (“true reality”) sounds like the word buddha. This is the response to Subhūti’s one hundred and forty-sixth question.
n.­1730
Based on our author’s own comment below I have emended D yang dag pa’i don to yang dang pa’i chos (khri brgyad 65.­6, ga 21a3).
n.­1731
Cf. khri brgyad 65.­7 (ga 21a6) byang chub kyi don ni yang dag pa’i don no, “awakening means true reality.” The compounds bodhyartha and bhūtārtha have a similar sound. PSP 5: 140 and GilgitC 169 have abheda (“the undivided reality”) in place of bhūta, as at ’bum da 213b5 and nyi khri 55.­5 (ga 145b4) dbyer med pa.
n.­1732
khri brgyad 65.­12. This citation is part of an introduction to the following section that explains skillful means as not apprehending anything.
n.­1733
khri brgyad 66.­2.
n.­1734
khri brgyad 65.­10 This is Subhūti’s one hundred and forty-ninth question.
n.­1735
Emend rnam par ’phel bar ’gyur to rnam par’phel bar mi ’gyur (khri brgyad 65.­13, ga 22b2). Golden folio 367 is missing.
n.­1736
khri brgyad 69.­6.
n.­1737
khri brgyad 66.­1–69.­7.
n.­1738
nyi khri 58.­11, khri brgyad 69.­8–69.­11 present the alternatives in a different order. Alternatively, “nothing that makes them known.”
n.­1739
khri brgyad 69.­14.
n.­1740
khri brgyad 69.­18.
n.­1741
Cf. khri brgyad 69.­24.
n.­1743
khri brgyad 69.­27.
n.­1744
khri brgyad 69.­30. This is Subhūti’s one hundred and sixty-second question, “Lord, if those dharmas‍—the dharmas on the side of awakening and the awakening‍—are not conjoined and not disjoined… how, Lord, will the dharmas on the side of awakening be those that bring about awakening?”
n.­1745
Here “this” stands for the passage (khri brgyad 69.­27–69.­29) explaining that the dharmas on the side of awakening and so on are the perfection of wisdom.
n.­1746
Cf. khri brgyad 69.­32.
n.­1747
Tib ’dul ba, “tamed, taming.” Alternatively, based on Skt vi-nī (“separate”), “in its nature it is separate from attachment and so on, and, when practiced, is marked by remaining separated.”
n.­1748
Cf. khri brgyad 69.­34, nyi khri 58.­42, ’bum da 261b3.
n.­1749
khri brgyad 69.­42. Cf. Bṭ3 n.­720; also 5.­566.
n.­1750
khri brgyad 69.­46.
n.­1751
khri brgyad 69.­47.
n.­1752
khri brgyad 69.­50.
n.­1753
If this is a citation from our author’s version of the Sūtra I have not been able to locate it in the versions I have consulted. “A maturation” (rnam par smin pa) renders vipāka, specifically the new form of life from conception to death as a result of earlier karma. In this context I take it to mean a life taken for the sake of others.
n.­1754
nyi khri 59.­8.
n.­1755
khri brgyad 70.­9. This is Subhūti’s one hundred and seventy-fourth question, “Lord, if all phenomena are the nonexistence of an intrinsic nature, how did the Tathāgata fully awaken to all the phenomena that are the nonexistence of an intrinsic nature, and, having fully awakened to them, gain control over the range of all phenomena?”
n.­1756
These are listed below (5.­1259–5.­1269); also Edg, s.v. vaśitā 2, citing the Mvy, gives the ten controls (dbang, vaśita) (Edg calls them “masteries”) as control over life (āyus), thought (citta), human requirements (pariṣkāra), dharma, miraculous power (ṛddhi), birth (janma/utpatti), belief (adhimukti), prayer (praṇidhāna), action (karma), and knowledge (jñāna).
n.­1757
khri brgyad 70.­11. This is Subhūti’s one hundred and seventy-fifth question.
n.­1758
khri brgyad 70.­12.
n.­1759
khri brgyad 70.­19 and khri brgyad 70.­18. Generally speaking, “the first production of the thought” marks the beginning of a bodhisattva’s path, or else it marks the path when the bodhisattva first awakens (the so-called “path of seeing”). Here our author is talking about bodhisattvas when they have become irreversible from progress toward full awakening. Alternatively, these two are statements in general, and are not meant as citations from the Sūtra.
n.­1760
khri brgyad 70.­44–70.­45. This is the question in response to Subhūti’s one hundred and seventy-seventh rhetorical question, “Lord, if all phenomena are the nonexistence of an intrinsic nature, well then, there is no form, up to there is no consciousness; there are no aggregates, there are no constituents, and there are no sense fields; there are no applications of mindfulness, and similarly, up to there is no knowledge of all aspects; there is no Buddha, there is no Dharma, and there is no Saṅgha; there is no path, there is no result, there is no defilement, there is no purification, there is no attainment, and there is no clear realization; and similarly, up to there are no phenomena, any of them?”
n.­1761
Cf. khri brgyad 70.­17–70.­43 for the addition of this gloss to “all phenomena” in this context.
n.­1762
Our author is explaining the two parts, abhāva and svabhāva in the Skt compound “nonexistence of an intrinsic nature” (abhāvasvabhāva, dngos po med pa’i ngo bo nyid). See 4.­158–4.­161 and notes, and 4.­809–4.­812 and notes. Our author is saying that if you take the entire compound as meaning “nonexistent” then you annihilate phenomena completely. If you take it as a dvandva meaning phenomena are nonexistent things and are intrinsic natures, then the former would be nonexistent and the latter existent (at the extremes of “there-is-not” and “there-is”); therefore, the compound means phenomena are not at the two extremes.
n.­1763
khri brgyad 71.­4. This is the response to Subhūti’s one hundred and seventy-ninth question.
n.­1764
This is the reading in K, N, and Golden 369b5. D differs. It says, “If it had said ‘attainment is without an apprehended object, and clear realization does not apprehend an object’ there would be something to be attained and a clear realization to be had, so there is an apprehended object. Therefore it teaches that just the apprehended object is spoken of as ‘attainment… clear realization,’ and ‘unsurpassed, perfect, complete awakening.’ ”
n.­1765
nyi khri 60.­5; khri brgyad 71.­5 has five clairvoyances.
n.­1766
khri brgyad 70.­14–71.­10.
n.­1767
khri brgyad 71.­11 (ga 47b4–5) with yongs su ’dzin pa, “incorporate,” in place of “complete.” At 5.­833 Subhūti’s one hundred and eighty-third question is the same as at nyi khri 60.­11. Twenty-Five Thousand renders yongs su ’dzin pa “acquire.”
n.­1768
khri brgyad 71.­12: “they are informed by nothing other than the perfection of wisdom.”
n.­1769
khri brgyad 71.­13: “Lord, how, informed by the perfection of wisdom, does a bodhisattva great being incorporate the six perfections in a single thought?”
n.­1770
Cf. khri brgyad 71.­17 ff., ’bum da 349b1–5 ff., nyi khri 60.­26 ff., and le’u brgyad ma ca 204b4 ff. This may be a summary of the section rather than an actual citation from a version of the Sūtra no longer available to us.
n.­1771
khri brgyad 71.­21.
n.­1772
khri brgyad 71.­21–71.­43 is the perfections arisen from maturation; 72.­1–72.­39 is the teaching about the knowledge of the mark of all dharmas, answering the question of how dharmas that have no mark can be different.
n.­1773
khri brgyad 73.­1 is Subhūti’s one hundred and ninety-fourth question, “Lord, how, when all dharmas are like a dream, are the nonexistence of an intrinsic nature, and are empty of their own marks can you present these as wholesome and these as unwholesome, these as ordinary and these as extraordinary… and these for making manifest unsurpassed, perfect, complete awakening?” khri brgyad 73.­2–73.­4 is the response; 73.­5 ff. is the amazing and marvelous teaching; 73.­24: “How, Subhūti, do bodhisattva great beings gather a retinue with gifts? … by a twofold way of giving material gifts and the gift of Dharma”; 73.­27 “the gift of Dharma is these two: the ordinary and extraordinary”; 73.­28–73.­37 the ordinary gift of Dharma, the qualities of śrāvakas and so on, as well as the qualities of bodhisattvas not fully informed by a buddha’s wisdom and compassion; and 73.­38–73.­94 extraordinary qualities “shared in common with foolish ordinary people.” These are all the list of qualities looked at from the side of conventional reality. Abhi­samayālaṃkāra 8.7–40 connects them with the two form bodies of a buddha. They overlap with the activities of the emanation bodies.
n.­1774
khri brgyad 73.­61.
n.­1775
PSP 6-8: 59, AAVN 102b2–3 (Sparham 2006–11, vol. 4, p. 79).
n.­1776
khri brgyad 73.­80.
n.­1777
khri brgyad 73.­89 has “tathāgata” in place of “great being;” nyi khri 62.­76 has both “tathāgata” and “great being.”
n.­1778
Cf. khri brgyad 73.­91 (ga 78b1). g.yog ’khor (“being in the circle of servants”) for parivāra conveys more clearly the intended meaning.
n.­1779
MW, s.v. śaṅka, also gives the name śaṅkana.
n.­1780
In general, these are all symbols of royalty, but exactly what the symbols are is contested, or at least they change over time and in different geographical locations or religious traditions. “Lakṣmī’s calf,” the śrīvatsa (dpal be’u), is perhaps the endless knot; the svastika (bkra shis ), “may it be well,” is of course not the Nazi version of the symbol but the one placed flat. Mvy sdong ris [’khyil ba] (= g.yung drung ’khyil ba?) renders vardhamāna. I have understood it provisionally to be the same as the nandyāvarta symbol, probably a w-shaped symbol, cf. Bhattacarya 2000 and Johnston 1932 who say A.K. Coomaraswamy says vardhamāna is “a lidded jar… to hold powder”; Johnston himself says “its primary sense is the name of a particular lucky pattern.” Johnston thinks the vardhamāna pattern is what Coomaraswamy says is an early śrīvasta pattern.
n.­1781
The reading is uncertain. K, N mtshan gyi ’khor bsgyur de dag nyid. D mtshan gyis ’khor lo de dag nyid. If the reading is mtshan gyis ’khor de dag nyid, it means, “Because the accompanying ones are included with the major sign.”
n.­1782
Emend ste to lte.
n.­1783
This is a conjectural translation. Cf. Mvy skabs phyin pa as a translation of mṛṣṭa, “touched.” The idea is perhaps that a buddha glides along just above the surface while lesser beings have to “touch down,” as it were.
n.­1784
jālaka (“connecting webbing”).
n.­1785
This suggests something like a force-field, so stuff cannot fall through, even though it does not constitute a block. The idea is that nobody falls through the safety net. Cf. Abhayākaragupta’s Muni­matālaṃkāra (thub pa’i dgons rgyan Degé Tengyur [dbu ma, ’a], 286a4–5) sor mo’i tshigs dang po nas brtsams pa’i sor mo’i bar la seng seng po med na yang sor gdub la sogs pa’i rgyan gzhug tu rung ba’i sor mo can no.
n.­1786
The eight retinues (four human and four divine) “known in the Pāli suttas as the aṭṭha parisā” (Bucknell 20) are kṣatriya (army), brāhmaṇa (priest), gṛhapati (business), śramaṇa (mendicant), Cāturmahārājakāyika gods, Trayastriṃśa gods, Māras, and Brahmās.
n.­1787
Banerjea (1930), citing Rhys Davids (1910, p. 14, n. 5) “there is no ‘webbing’ between fingers and toes, but that these are set in right lines, like the meshes of a net,” gives the Pāli commentary: jalahatthapado ti na cammena patibaddha angulantaro. Ediso hi phanahatthako purisadosena upahato pabbajjam pi na labhati. Mahapurisassa pana catasso hatthanguliyo panca pi padanguliyo ekappamana honti, tasam pana ekappamanatta jalalakkhanam annamannam pativijjhitva titthanti, ath’assa hatthapada sukusalena vaddhakina yojitajalavata-panasadisa honti, tena vuttam jalahatthapado ti. He says the hands are certainly not shaped like the hood of a cobra because a person with such hands would not even be accepted into the order. The four fingers and five toes are aligned. They are like a lattice-work window put together (yojitajalavatapanasadisa) by a skilled carpenter.
n.­1788
Mvy says gzhon sha chags renders taruṇa. I am unsure what word our author is glossing.
n.­1789
The khams bdun are probably, of the eighteen constituents (dhātu, khams), the six consciousnesses (from eye consciousness constituent to thinking-mind consciousness constituent) and the thinking-mind constituent.
n.­1790
Rhys Davids (1910, p. 14, n. 3) “If the foot of a ‘Great Man’ be measured in four parts, two are taken up by the sole and toes, one is under the leg, and one is the heel projecting rearward.”
n.­1791
D adds “[to] the front and back and any side.”
n.­1792
This translation is based on tshig mdzod chen mo, s.v. rkyen ’bab, explained as skabs dang ’tsham par ’byung ba.
n.­1793
In place of ci bder *yathāsūkham (the translation “freely” is from Valby, s.v. ci bder), K, N have ci bden, “whatever is true.”
n.­1794
This is a conjectural translation of zhabs kyi gong bas mtho ba. If gong ba means gong bu, read “higher up relative to the mass of the foot.”
n.­1795
tshig mdzod chen mo says rlo ba is an archaism for ’phyang ba, “hang down.”
n.­1796
MW, s.v. vitasti, says 12 aṅgulas equal about nine inches.
n.­1797
Rhys Davids: “Hence the Buddhas only wash as an example to their followers.”
n.­1798
D slar btang na is supported by Abhayākaragupta’s Muni­matālaṃkāra (thub pa’i dgongs rgyan, Degé Tengyur [dbu ma, ’a], 286b3).
n.­1799
skyu ru ra (ābalaka), emblic myrobalan.
n.­1800
K, N gus par ma byas pa; khri brgyad 73.­91 (ga 79a3) mgu bar byas pa.
n.­1801
K, N shas rgyas pas yangs shing; D sha rgyas pas spangs; Abhayākaragupta’s Muni­matālaṃkāra (thub pa’i dgongs rgyan, Degé Tengyur [dbu ma, ’a], 286b5) rgyas pa yangs pa sha rgyas pa’i brang can nyid kyi phyir dang.
n.­1802
This explanation certainly makes excellent sense, but it is not found elsewhere. PSP 6-8: 62 kāñcana­paṭṭasuvimṛṣṭo. MW, s.v paṭṭa, “a slab”; khri brgyad 73.­90 (ga 78a2) gser gyi glegs ma, “a highly polished golden door panel.”
n.­1803
These are sweet, salty, sour (like a lemon), bitter like the bitter gourd (Hindi karela), astringent (like an unripe banana), and pungent (like chili).
n.­1804
Szántō (18.iv.2017), ms. 5r5–5v1: mahā­puruṣāṇāṃ hi sapta rasāharaṇī sahasrāṇi grīvāyām ūrdhvamukhāni pravarttante sarve pi rasā mukhai prakṣiptā amṛtarasatulyā bhavati.
n.­1805
Here karman means the way the habit formed by doing an earlier action again and again. It translates out as an experience experienced at the highest stage of physical development. The pūrvakarma (“earlier karma”) is forming the habit by doing the action again and again earlier.
n.­1806
This derives the nya gro in nyagrodha (“an Indian fig tree”) from ny-añc, “bend down,” in the sense of beneath something, here the lower part of the body; and the ro dha from ruh (“grow up”), here the upper part of the body. The parimaṇḍala (“a build,” an encompassing measurement) means that they are equal in size. Abhayākaragupta’s Muni­matālaṃkāra (thub pa’i dgongs rgyan, Degé Tengyur [dbu ma, ’a], 287a1) n+yag ni dma’ ba ste sku smad do, ro dha ni sku stod do is better. Thus, nya gro intends just the ny-ag from ny-añc (“to bend down”); ro dha is like a past passive participle from ruh (“to grow up”). It is referencing the fact that the Indian fig tree (a banyan tree) sends out secondary roots from its branches that then take root and grow.
n.­1807
dbu ze’u ka bcings pa. This is a conjectural translation of ze’u ka as “turban.” ze is a word for rngog ma (a “mane”) and a ze’u ka is perhaps a diminutive. Jäschke, s.v. ze, cites ze ka from Czoma di Korosi’s Dictionary as meaning a “hump.” Rhys Davids (1910, p. 16, n. 4): “This expression, says the Cy., refers to the fullness either of the forehead or of the cranium. In either case the rounded highly-developed appearance is meant, giving to the unadorned head the decorative dignified effect of a crested turban, and the smooth symmetry of a water-bubble.” Edg, s.v. uṣṇīṣa, “having a head the size and shape of which makes it seem turbanned.”
n.­1808
K, N omit sha mkhregs shing, “muscled.”
n.­1809
Abhayākaragupta’s Muni­matālaṃkāra (thub pa’i dgongs rgyan, Degé Tengyur [dbu ma, ’a], 287a5–6).
n.­1810
khri brgyad 73.­93 ff.
n.­1811
This is explaining “minor sign” by breaking up the parts of anuvyañjana into anu (“subsequent”) plus vi and añj (“to beautify”) or añc (“to make clear”) vi añc (“to expand on”). Muni­matālaṃkāra (thub pa’i dgongs rgyan, Degé Tengyur [dbu ma, ’a], 287a6–7) mtshan ’di rnams rjes su gsal par byed pa’am mtshan dang rjes su mthun par gsal bar byed pa’am/ skyes bu chen por rab tu gsal bar byed ces pa’am/ rjes su mthun par mdzes par byed ces pa dpe byad bzang po brgyad cu rnams te.
n.­1812
’bum na 52a5, nyi khri 62.­79 (ga 237a3), le’u brgyad ma ca 244a2. khri brgyad 73.­93 (ga 79b7) ma chags pa’i thugs mnga’ bas, “have minds free from attachment to all conditioned things.”
n.­1813
khri brgyad 73.­95. See also n.­1814..
n.­1814
“Kind words” is the second of the four ways of gathering an assembly‍—giving gifts, kind words, beneficial actions, and consistency between words and deeds. This harkens back to the statement at 73.­22: “Subhūti, here, looking down with my buddha eye on as many world systems as there are sand particles in the Gaṅgā River in the eastern direction I have seen bodhisattva great beings gathering humans with the four ways of gathering a retinue. What are the four? The ways of gathering are by giving gifts, kind words, beneficial actions, and consistency between words and deeds.” The first, “giving gifts,” comprises all the practices (dharmas) down to the minor signs ending at 73.­94.
n.­1815
Cf. khri brgyad 73.­96, nyi khri 62.­82.
n.­1816
Cf. nyi khri 62.­83. “With those same six perfections, by consistency between words and deeds, they gather beings into a retinue.” Here it says “later ones” (plural) because “with those same six perfections” goes with “skill in letters” (dhāraṇī) as well.
n.­1817
Cf. khri brgyad 73.­97 (ga 82b5). “Syllable accomplishment” (yi ge mngon par sgrub pa, akṣarābhinirhāra) is explained earlier (4.­554 explaining khri brgyad 8.­22).
n.­1818
At khri brgyad 16.­99 the 42 letters (“the arapacana syllabary”) are each given a meaning.
n.­1819
K, N, Golden 378b6.
n.­1820
ldan pa renders -gata, cf. Whitney’s Sanskrit Grammar 1273c, p. 435.
n.­1821
khri brgyad 73.­97. However, PSP 6-8: 68, ŚsPN4/2 0087r1, Gilgit 625.5 dvācatvāriṃśad; ’bum na 56a1, nyi khri 62.­84, le’u brgyad ma ca 247a4 bzhi bcu rtsa gnyis, have the “forty-two” letters in the arapacana alphabet.
n.­1822
khri brgyad 73.­97 (reading chos de, “that Dharma” or “that doctrine,” in place of “all dharmas”). Cp. ŚsPN4/2 87r4, Gilgit 625.8 na cākśarākāra­nirmuktaḥ subhūte sarvadharmaḥ; ’bum na 56a6, nyi khri ga 241a, le’u brgyad ma ca 248b1 chos ston kyang / chos de yi ge’i rnam pa dang bral ba yang ma yin te; LSPW pp. 536–37: “And yet that Dharma is not quite free from the mode of letters!”; khri pa 29.­61 (nga 333b5) yi ge dang yi ge med pa la ma g/rtogs pa’i chos gang yang med do, Ten Thousand translation: “There is no doctrine at all that is not included in the syllables and the absence of syllables.”
n.­1823
khri brgyad 73.­98 ff. This is Subhūti’s one hundred and ninety-ninth question, “Lord, if, because of the emptinesses of what transcends limits and no beginning and no end, a being absolutely cannot be apprehended, a dharma also cannot be apprehended, and a dharma’s intrinsic nature cannot be apprehended, well then, Lord, how do bodhisattva great beings practicing the perfection of wisdom arisen from maturation… teach the Dharma to beings?”
n.­1824
khri brgyad 73.­100.
n.­1826
khri brgyad 73.­102.
n.­1827
Alternatively, taking the construction as a bahuvrīhi, “it does not have the form that is a falsely imagined thing as its intrinsic nature.” Brunnhölzl (2011, pp. 42–43) renders this: “ ‘the lack of bondage and the lack of liberation’ refer to the state of the perfect [nature], which is not the nature of imaginary form.”
n.­1828
khri brgyad 73.­104. PSP 6-8: 70, ŚsPN4/2 93r5, ’bum na 71a2, nyi khri ga 243b4, le’u brgyad ma ca 249b5, khri pa nga 336a1–2 all have a reading similar to LSPW pp. 537–38: “Because one cannot apprehend of them an own-being in which they could be established. For the nonexistent does not stand in the nonexistent, own-being does not stand in own-being, other-being does not stand in other-being.”
n.­1829
Here gzhan dag (“others”) means the rest in the list, starting from “form” given at khri brgyad 73.­103: “ ‘form is empty,’ up to by way of not apprehending ‘consciousness is empty,’ up to by way of not apprehending ‘compounded and uncompounded dharmas are empty.’ ”
n.­1830
khri brgyad 73.­104, ’bum na 71a5; PSP 6-8: 70 has anubaddha in place of anubuddha.
n.­1831
khri brgyad 73.­111. This is Subhūti’s two hundred and first question.
n.­1832
’bum na 86a4–5.
n.­1833
char bcad pa’i tshul gyis, bhāgacchedena. This is the reply to Subhūti’s two hundred and second question that reads “by curbing”; cf. 5.­853.
n.­1834
I have added the last part of khri brgyad 73.­114 to make the citation readable in English.
n.­1835
’bum na 88b4.
n.­1836
khri brgyad 74.­9.
n.­1837
This is summarizing khri brgyad 74.­10–74.­13. “They”‍—the bodhisattvas‍—do see “beings to be liberated from hell, or the animal world” and so on as like a dream and an illusion, but the beings do not know “they,” the hells and so on, do not ultimately exist, so “their”‍—the bodhisattvas’‍—power is causing “them”‍—the beings‍—to understand.
n.­1838
khri brgyad 74.­13. This is the response to Subhūti’s two hundred and seventh question.
n.­1839
khri brgyad 74.­16. This relates nāman (“name”) with the root nam (“to bow”) and the derivative nimna (“incline to”). The idea is that they get up onto the roof of the ultimate on the ladder of the conventional. The context is as follows: Subhūti asks who exactly are the nonexistent beings that bodhisattvas heroically work to liberate. The Lord says (74.­16) a “name” and says, “Subhūti, these‍—namely ‘name’ and ‘causal sign’‍—are names plucked out of thin air,” and so with all dharmas “they are made-up name designations,” followed by this statement. nyi khri 63.­14, ’bum na 92b3–4 differ.
n.­1840
This is a conjectural translation. I have not understood this line.
n.­1841
khri brgyad 74.­25. This is the response to Subhūti’s two hundred and eleventh question.
n.­1842
khri brgyad 74.­46. This is Subhūti’s two hundred and thirteenth question, “Lord, if bodhisattva great beings practicing the perfection of wisdom are aware in that way of those dharmas that are different from each other, well then, Lord, does that not complicate the dharma-constituent?”
n.­1843
I have not been able to identify the version of the Sūtra from which this and the following are extracted. Cf. ’bum na 100a2–3, khri brgyad 74.­49: “All dharmas are the dharma-constituent”; and Subhūti’s two hundred and fifteenth question (khri brgyad 74.­51), “How should bodhisattva great beings train in the perfection of wisdom?” and so on.
n.­1844
khri brgyad 74.­52. This is part of the long response at khri brgyad 74.­52–74.­55.
n.­1845
khri brgyad 74.­55.
n.­1846
khri brgyad 75.­2. If the ultimate nature that is pure from the beginning and nirvāṇa, and the ultimate nature of beings caught in saṃsāra based on falsely imagined things conjured out of thin air, is the same ultimate nature, how can you talk about beings in saṃsāra getting to nirvāṇa?
n.­1847
khri brgyad 75.­5.
n.­1848
khri brgyad 75.­6–75.­17.
n.­1849
khri brgyad 75.­18.
n.­1850
khri brgyad 75.­20.
n.­1851
khri brgyad 75.­21.
n.­1852
khri brgyad 75.­21.
n.­1853
D and Golden 385b6 both read yul na ni gnas (alternative translation: “it is there as an object”). If emended to ni mi based on the reading at khri brgyad 75.­21 (ga 104a6), it would mean “it does not occupy a location,” which is certainly easier to understand.
n.­1855
Cf. khri brgyad 75.­21: “In regard to all dharmas, there is no establishment and there is no destruction.” Our author’s gloss supports the better reading at khri brgyad K ’jug (“and not established after having set out”). The Tib renderings of Skt sthā (gnas) and prasthā (’jug) should be understood having in mind Tib forms of prior-state and resultant nonvolitional verbs (Tournadre 2010).
n.­1856
Cf. khri brgyad 75.­21 (reading K, etc., ’jug in place of D ’jig, “destroyed”). “Having stood there, bodhisattva great beings stand in unsurpassed, perfect, complete awakening, but do not see any dharma established at all after having set out.”
n.­1857
khri brgyad 75.­23.
n.­1858
Cf. khri brgyad 75.­23 (ga 105a4) ma yin pa, “not having thought construction as cause.”
n.­1859
This is connecting paramārtha (“ultimate”) with pāramitā (“perfection”). Just below (khri brgyad 75.­24): “Therefore, bodhisattva great beings, having stood in the perfection that is the emptiness of a basic nature…”
n.­1860
khri brgyad 75.­24.
n.­1861
Cf. ’bum na 146a4, nyi khri 64.­35, khri brgyad 75.­25.
n.­1862
khri brgyad 75.­27.
n.­1863
khri brgyad 75.­28.
n.­1864
khri brgyad 75.­31.
n.­1865
Cf. khri brgyad 75.­33. This part is an explanation of khri brgyad 75.­32–75.­48, although our author’s version of the Sūtra differs. He is saying, in essence, that the Sūtra is saying that bodhisattvas treat the constituents of themselves as bodhisattvas, their form aggregate and so on, the same as the constituents of themselves in an awakened state. Both are the same from the perspective of the emptiness of a basic nature that is not different from the different dharmas.
n.­1866
khri brgyad 75.­34.
n.­1867
khri brgyad 75.­42.
n.­1868
khri brgyad 75.­43.
n.­1869
khri brgyad 76.­2.
n.­1870
nyi khri 65.­9; cf. khri brgyad 76.­3.
n.­1871
khri brgyad 76.­5.
n.­1872
khri brgyad 76.­7–76.­10.
n.­1873
khri brgyad 76.­9.
n.­1874
khri brgyad 76.­19; cf. nyi khri 65.­29.
n.­1875
“The fault is that a bodhisattva and tathāgata ‘would have been there before and would not be there later.’ There would also be the fault that the five forms of life in the stream of cyclic existence would have been something that really existed before and would be something that really does not exist later,” and so on.
n.­1876
khri brgyad 76.­23. This is Subhūti’s two hundred and twenty-fourth question.
n.­1877
khri brgyad 76.­24–76.­51 is the explanation of the six perfections; 77.­1–77.­2 is the explanation of the path; 77.­3–77.­8 is the explanation of the training in all dharmas; and 77.­9–77.­12 is the explanation of no location. “Close reading” renders rjes su bsnyags pa (Jäschke says it is a colloquial form of snyeg; Mvy samanubandh), literally “to hasten after.”
n.­1878
khri brgyad 77.­13. This is Subhūti’s two hundred and twenty-ninth question.
n.­1879
“Do not occasion anything” means that they have not accumulated the karma that would give rise to the production, or they have removed the accompanying conditions that would make the karma ripen.
n.­1880
khri brgyad 77.­15. This is Subhūti’s two hundred and thirtieth question.
n.­1881
khri brgyad 77.­25–77.­42.
n.­1882
khri brgyad 78.­1. This is Subhūti’s two hundred and thirty-fifth question.
n.­1883
khri brgyad 78.­11.
n.­1884
Cf. khri brgyad 78.­16, ’bum na 310a2.
n.­1885
Golden 389b6. D omits zag pa.
n.­1886
khri brgyad 78.­27. The full response to Subhūti’s two hundred and forty-third question, “Lord, standing in those bright dharmas, do bodhisattva great beings utilize such skillful means but still are not affected by those actions?” is, “Endowed with those skillful means, they work for the welfare of beings… but they have no contact with them at all.”
n.­1887
The “contact of existence” (srid pa’i reg pa) is one of the twelve links of dependent origination. It is the basis for the link of feeling (tshor ba) of pleasure and so on that gives rise to the three levels of craving‍—the links of craving, appropriation, and existence (sred pa, len pa, and srid pa) where the last “existence” (srid pa) is the strongest craving for the future form of life.
n.­1888
khri brgyad 78.­29.
n.­1889
khri brgyad 78.­34.
n.­1890
khri brgyad 78.­51.
n.­1891
khri brgyad 78.­35–78.­50 clairvoyances; 78.­51–78.­55 branches; 79.­1–79.­11 persons. Then the question is at 79.­12: “Lord, if all phenomena are empty of their own marks, well then, how do bodhisattva great beings… free beings from the five forms of life in saṃsāra?” The response is 79.­13. That “security is close by” (bde ba bsten, *kṣemāsannībhūtam) is in the sense of the Three Jewels being present as a refuge.
n.­1892
khri brgyad 79.­14. This is Subhūti’s two hundred and fifty-third question.
n.­1893
khri brgyad 79.­15.
n.­1894
’bum na 348b3 gtogs, PSP 6-8: 144–45 paryāpannāṃ (cf. Edg, s.v. paryāpanna); nyi khri ga 319b1, khri brgyad D ga 138a7–b1 rtogs, but K, N gtogs.
n.­1895
Alternatively, “One’s own aggregates are ‘included in the truths’ and [those] of others ‘are not included in the truths’ ”; or, alternatively, a person’s personal makeup (the aggregates) are relevant to a discussion of the four noble truths, the outer world, but the usual world out there a person understands him or herself to be living in is not.
n.­1896
Our author’s version of the Sūtra differs from le’u brgyad ma ca 313b4–5, ’bum na 349b2–3, nyi khri 68.­19, Twenty-Five Thousand translation: “they see these phenomena without apprehending anything at all”; from khri brgyad 79.­20: “Subhūti, there is no dharma the limit of which bodhisattva great beings do not see. When they do not see any dharma they then do not apprehend it”; and from PSP 6-8: 144 na so dharmo yasyāntaṃ paśyati, tathā ca paśyati yathā na kañcid dharmam upalabhate: “They do not see that dharma of which there is a limit. They see in a way that they do not apprehend any dharma at all.”
n.­1897
khri brgyad 79.­20.
n.­1898
khri brgyad 79.­21.
n.­1899
khri brgyad 54.­2–54.­25, explained at Bṭ3 5.­1002-5.­1027.
n.­1900
khri brgyad 79.­24.
n.­1901
khri brgyad 80.­2, LSPW p. 632, “untutored.” PSP 6-8: 158, le’u brgyad ma ca 313b7–314a1, nyi khri 69.­3, ’bum na 351a3 omit.
n.­1902
This is the response to Subhūti’s two hundred and fifty-sixth question (khri brgyad 80.­1): “Lord, if all dharmas are in their nature not real things, if they have not been made by buddhas… why in these dharmas is there a distinction made between them,” and so on, where it says (80.­2 ff.), “Subhūti, whereas in a dharma that is not real there is no karma, there is no action, and there is no result, unlettered, foolish, ordinary people uneducated about the noble dharmas do not know that dharmas are in their nature unreal things and because of a thought that has arisen on account of error, accumulate a variety of karma.”
n.­1903
khri brgyad 80.­2.
n.­1904
nyi khri 69.­5; cf. khri brgyad 80.­3.
n.­1905
D thos pa; K, N, Golden 391a5 thog pa?=thogs pa, “impediment?”
n.­1906
Cf. nyi khri 69.­10; khri brgyad 80.­7. This is Subhūti’s two hundred and fifty-seventh question. Bṭ3 5.­909 omits “that was or is” (byung ba’am/ ’byung).
n.­1907
khri brgyad 80.­8–80.­36.
n.­1908
khri brgyad 81.­5. This rhetorical question is referencing the immediately preceding paragraph (khri brgyad 81.­4).
n.­1909
Golden 391b3, citing khri brgyad 81.­8.
n.­1910
D rgyun; K, N, Golden 391b5 rgyur: “and when they cause a purification of the foundation they become the cause of the path.”
n.­1911
khri brgyad 81.­10.
n.­1912
khri brgyad 81.­17. I have not adjusted the slightly problematic order in which our author deals with the statements in the Sūtra but have translated them in the order they are found. The exchange at khri brgyad 81.­13 ff. and ’bum na 375a ff. begins with the Lord saying: “Subhūti, bodhisattva great beings practicing the perfection of wisdom with skillful means do not personally settle down on any dharma at all, and also establish all beings in nonsettling as well, but as an ordinary convention, not ultimately.” Then Subhūti asks, “Lord, is the dharma a tathāgata has fully awakened to, fully awakened to as an ordinary convention or as an ultimate?” After this the Lord says that one dharma cannot awaken to another; it would be happening within a dualism that the awakened state excludes. Subhūti then asks if it happens nondualistically, and the Lord says it is within “sameness” (the absence of both). Subhūti then asks what sameness is and the Lord says it is inexpressible, and then says it is not even within the range of tathāgatas.
n.­1913
nyi khri 70.­17; cf. khri brgyad 81.­19.
n.­1914
Cf. khri brgyad 81.­19. This may be an extract from a different version of the Sūtra. I have taken it as a summary of the passage.
n.­1915
khri brgyad 81.­14: “Is the dharma a tathāgata has fully awakened to, fully awakened to as an ordinary convention or as an ultimate?”
n.­1916
khri brgyad 81.­18.
n.­1917
“Just that” renders de nyid (eva). Alternatively, “true reality” (tattva). Closest is khri brgyad 81.­19 (ga 146b7) de ni ’dir but it omits nyid as do ’bum na 375b4, nyi khri ga 333b3, Gilgit 671.11, ŚsPN4/2 0213r10, and PSP 6-8: 169.
n.­1918
Alternatively, “The sameness of dharmas that are nonexistent things in their intrinsic nature is in its intrinsic nature a nonexistent thing, because even the conceptualization of it as an existent thing has been eliminated.”
n.­1919
khri brgyad 81.­29, ’bum na 379b5, nyi khri 70.­27.
n.­1920
khri brgyad 81.­36, ’bum na 389b5. This is Subhūti’s two hundred and sixty-ninth question.
n.­1921
Cf. PSP 6-8: 176, khri brgyad 82.­2. This is the response to Subhūti’s two hundred and seventieth question. nyi khri 71.­2, le’u brgyad ma ca 340a1–2, ’bum na 390a6–7: “That which is emptiness does not do and does not not do anything at all to anything.” ŚsPN4/2 219r2 ya śūnyatā na sā kasyacit kiṃcit karoti.
n.­1922
Lhasa Kangyur (shes phyin, bum, na), 470a3 de bzhin gshegs pa’i khyu mchog gi mthur mi ’gyur ro. Degé Kangyur (shes phyin, bum, a), 395a, ends abruptly. According to LC, khyu mchog gi mthu is the translation of vṛṣabha in the Daśa­bhūmika­sūtra; cf Edg, s.v. vṛṣabhitā. PSP 6-8: 176 neyaṃ tathāgatasya vṛṣabhitā bhavet.
n.­1923
rnam par rig par bya ba tsam. Alternatively, “just something one becomes aware of.”
n.­1924
K, N, Golden 393b4 mi dgos; D mi dmigs, “they would not apprehend.”
n.­1925
Cf. khri brgyad 82.­3, nyi khri 71.­3, Lhasa ’bum na 470a4.
n.­1926
K, N, Golden 393b5 ’du shes pa, supported by ŚsPN4/2 22r10 sarvasaṃjñābhiḥ śūnyaḥ. D ’du byed pa, “it is empty of any volitional factor.”
n.­1927
Golden 393b6, citing nyi khri 71.­3.
n.­1928
Lhasa ’bum na 470a7 rnam par bcab par mdzad, nyi khri 71.­4, Twenty-Five Thousand translation: “why is this point concealed when it is said, ‘This is emptiness. That is a phantom emanation’?”; PSP 6-8: 178, Gilgit 674.12 vinigūhita. khri brgyad 82.­5 (ga 151a5) rnam par sprul pa zhig (Mvy vikurvita) yod snyam’am, “Is there a contortion into ‘this is a magical creation; this is an emptiness’?” Conze (LSPW p.593: “is the difference… mysteriously concealed?”) observes that the reading is hard to determine with confidence.
n.­1929
The four (khri brgyad 82.­9) are “some are magically created by śrāvakas, … pratyekabuddhas, … bodhisattvas, … tathāgatas.”
n.­1930
khri brgyad 82.­10.
n.­1931
khri brgyad 82.­13. This is Subhūti’s two hundred and seventy-sixth rhetorical question: “according to what you have said, Lord, that ‘not moving from emptiness and not stained by duality either there is no dharma at all that is not emptiness,’ then even that which has the dharma of not coaxing you into believing it is true, nirvāṇa, is magically created?”
n.­1932
khri brgyad 82.­15. This is Subhūti’s two hundred and seventy-seventh and last question.
n.­1933
As this statement makes clear, the Maitreya Chapter was not included in the version of the Hundred Thousand that our author was following. In fact, among the long Perfection of Wisdom sūtras as they were brought to Tibet, it may only have been included in the Twenty-Five Thousand (in which it is chapter 72) and the Eighteen Thousand (in which it is chapter 83). In both sūtras its title, as given in the chapter colophon, is “Categorization of a Bodhisattva’s Training.” The traditional explanation is that this particular chapter, along with the three other final chapters recounting the narrative of Sadāprarudita, were held back by the nāgas when Nāgārjuna brought the text of the Hundred Thousand from their realm to the human world. While the versions of the Hundred Thousand in the Degé Kangyur and in most Kangyurs of both Tshalpa and Themphangma lineages thus do not include it, it is present in the versions in the Narthang and Lhasa Kangyurs, following a tradition (mentioned in the Degé Kangyur dkar chag F.117.a) of completing the text by adding these chapters from the other long sūtras.
n.­1934
The difference between ming (nāman) and ming du brjod pa (nāmadheya) is a variable of context: ming is used as the freestanding word for something (the ontological status of which is to be determined), ming du brjod pa when you are saying that word is being used for, or designating, something. Neither prejudges the status of the “content,” although, as our author says at the outset, saying things are nāmamātra is a way of teaching emptiness.
n.­1935
What this means is that it is not exactly the same as the name.
n.­1936
This translation is based on parts of two readings: D ming med pa’i dngos po tsam ’ba’ zhig ma mthong bas ’di ni gzugs yin no zhes mi rig par mi ’gyur ro, and K, N ming med par dngos po tsam ’ba’ zhig mthong bas ’di ni gzugs yin no zhes ming rig par mi ’gyur ro.
n.­1937
This renders de’i ngo bo nyid ma yin du zin na, in the sense of “if the word does not have some intrinsic connection with what it refers to.”
n.­1938
Either you would know what the word means from just saying a name without being told what it refers to, or else just from seeing what it is for you would know what it is called even without being told the name.
n.­1939
K, N ngo bo nyi du mar ’gyur; D ngo bo nyid du de las gzhan par ’gyur, “as an entity become something other than that.”
n.­1940
Our author takes a word for a generality (for example, “aggregate”) to be related to a basis that is the causal sign of a compounded phenomenon in the same way that a particular (for example, “form” aggregate) is.
n.­1941
LSPW p. 645, folios 578–79: “Is then form, etc. actually apprehended by way of an own-being (as a result of taking hold of) that entity which is the sign of something conditioned and on account of which there takes place the name, notion, concept and conventional expression, ‘this is form’, etc.”
n.­1942
The subject here is form, feeling, and so on.
n.­1943
“Is the basis that is the causal sign of a compounded phenomenon when form is… working as a subsequent conventional designation for form, form, the form entity, or is it simply merely designated?”
n.­1944
The subject here is Maitreya.
n.­1945
Our author is saying that the name does not actually articulate exactly what the thing is, like calling a soldier “lion heart.” It does not get to the actual heart of what something is‍—the true dharmic nature of something.
n.­1946
D ming dang; K, N ming las logs shig na.
n.­1947
khri brgyad 83.­26.
n.­1948
dngos po can render either vastu (“basis”) or bhāva (“real thing”).
n.­1949
He means “serves as the foundation of the name.”
n.­1950
khri brgyad 83.­27, Lhasa ’bum na 478a6 brjod du med pa’i dbyings dang ’brel pa’i shes rab kyi spyod pa la gnas pa, “abiding in the practice of wisdom connected with the inexpressible element”; MQ (236) yathā te nirabhilapyadhātau prajñāpracāro bhavati. upalabhase tvaṃ tasmin samaye saṃskāranimittaṃ vastu yatra idam āgantukaṃ nāmadheyaṃ prakṣiptam; LSPW p. 646, folio 579: “when your wisdom becomes united with the inexpressible realm.”
n.­1951
D; K, N: “when thoroughly purified wisdom takes up the inexpressible element.”
n.­1952
To teach the flaws in the position that it‍—the basis‍—is just that‍—the inexpressible element.
n.­1953
To teach the flaws in the position that it‍—the inexpressible element‍—is other than the basis.
n.­1954
The ultimate is not just the basis, and is not quite other than the basis.
n.­1955
This reading is corroborated by khri brgyad 83.­31 and Lhasa ’bum na 479a6–7. The rang dbang in rang dbang nyid dam yod pa nyid is perhaps incorporating a gloss from an oral tradition. The explanation below explains the reading at nyi khri 72.­31 (ga 347b5), rang dbang du yod pa nyid dam/ med pa nyid du ’gyur pa, “has no independent existence or nonexistence”; MQ (p. 237), PSP 6-8: 150 na… tasya saṃskāranimittasya vastunaḥ kācid vidyamānatā vāvidyamānatā vā.
n.­1956
khri brgyad 83.­31.
n.­1957
khri brgyad 83.­32. The “it” is “that basis that is a causal sign of a compounded phenomenon that has been thus designated by these‍—namely, the names form, feeling, perception, volitional factors, consciousness, up to buddhadharmas plucked out of thin air.”
n.­1958
MQ (39, 238) yā Maitreya tasmin samskāranimitte vastuni rūpam iti nāma­samjna­samketa­prajnapti­vyavahāran niśritya rūpasvabhāvatayā parikalpanā-idam parikalpitam rūpam; cf. Brunnhöltzl (2011, p. 11).
n.­1959
Brunnhöltzl (2011, p. 26) renders this passage: “The notion and designation ‘form’ with regard to the cause of that convention‍—a conditioned entity that, based on a convention, is designated as having the nature of form‍—is the meaning of ‘this is falsely imagined form.’ ”
n.­1960
Griffiths (1990, p. 93): “Every mental event has (or, perhaps better, is) a particular way of appearing to its subject. This is its ākāra, its ‘mode of appearance’.” Griffith’s “phenomenological content of a mental event” nicely conveys what is meant by the three natures or entities that are “aspects” or “modes of appearance” of a phenomenon.
n.­1961
D. K, N read rnam par shes pa chos rnams su phyin ci log tu snang, “the mode of consciousness erroneously appearing as the dharmas.”
n.­1962
“Real thing” renders dngos (bhāva). If it renders vastu the translation should be “in the form of a basis.” Brunnhöltz (2011, p. 27): “what arises and appears in the mind as the aspect of an entity.”
n.­1963
D. K, N blo rnam par brtags pa’i rnam pa ma gtogs, “except for the intellectually active state of mind that is the conceptualized mode of appearance.”
n.­1964
Golden 403a3 kun tu g.yengs ba’i; D kun tu g.yongs ba’i?
n.­1965
Cf. Brunnhöltzl: “Through apprehending it based on this conception (being grounded in the nature of the mere aspect of what is mentally conceived), the aspect of being distracted about what is connected with [mental] expressivity [by mistaking it] as having the character of an entity is called ‘expression.’ What appears to the mind as having the character of an entity based on this aspect of ‘being grounded in the nature of the aspect of what is mentally conceived’ is the meaning of ‘conceived form.’ ”
n.­1966
This renders D rnam par mi rtog pa’i, “nonconceptual.” Golden 403b1 (rnam par brtags pa) says, “When it has become separated from that conceptualized phenomenon, just that mode of appearance in an intellectually active state of mind‍—a falsely imagined phenomenon described before, a mode of appearance suited, as the expressed and expression mode of appearance, to name and designation‍—then that mode of appearance established, in itself, in an inexpressible form as an absence of conceptualization is “the true dharmic nature of form.” ”
n.­1967
This renders rūpaṇā, the definition of rūpa (“form”).
n.­1968
Our author is glossing the pra of prabhāvita (“category”; LSPW p. 581 “derived from”) with the sva of svabhāva (“intrinsic nature”).
n.­1969
khri brgyad 83.­41.
n.­1970
Cf. khri brgyad 21.­21 (Śāriputra then asked, “Venerable Subhūti, why do you say, ‘Anything called form is counted as not two’?”); ’bum 12.­654 (nga 169b4), nyi khri ka 353b7 gang yang gzugs zhes bgyi pa ’di ni gnyis su ma mchis shing nyam pa ma mchis pa’i chos kyi grangs su bgyis ba’o.
n.­1971
Earlier (2.­14, 4.­677) and here it says there are twenty-eight questions, but the list adds up to twenty-nine and 4.­1247 says there is a list of twenty-nine questions. Take nyi shu rtsa brgyad to mean nyi shu rtsa brgyad pa.
n.­1972
khri brgyad 83.­43.
n.­1973
khri brgyad 83.­45.
n.­1974
The form that is materially real.
n.­1975
khri brgyad 83.­49 has “Is that true dharmic nature of form that is just that true dharmic nature of form, form?”
n.­1976
khri brgyad 83.­52.
n.­1978
The order of these statements is reversed in khri brgyad 83.­57–83.­58, which makes more sense.
n.­1979
Emend da to nga.
n.­1980
khri brgyad 83.­62, MQ 241 avikalpanāyā; nyi khri ga 352a7–b1 mi rtog pa la mtshan nyid thams cad (avikalpanāyāṃ?), a locative, is easier to understand than a genitive absolute.
n.­1981
khri brgyad ga 162a6 gcig tu nges par gtan du, *ekāntātyantikī in place of MQ (p. 241) ekāṃśeṇaikāṃśikī, “partially in part”; cf. nyi khri ga 352b3 phyogs gcig pa’am/ shin tu, “in part or absolutely” (*ekāṃśeṇaikāntikī); LSPW “absolute assurance.”
n.­1982
This is cited earlier (1.­229). The reading sprul pa dang yongs su bsngos pa is corroborated by khri brgyad ga 162b4 sprul pa dang yongs su bsngos pa and le’u brgyad ma ca 322b3 sprul pa dang yongs su bsgyur pa. The Tib translators read nirmāṇa or nirmita and pariṇāmita in place of MQ p. 241 nirvāṇa and pāragāminīm; nyi khri ga 353a2 bsam gyis mi khyab pa mya ngan las ’das par ’gyur pa, “becomes an inconceivable nirvāṇa.” PSP 6-8: 157 api tv acintyān nirvāṇa­pāragāminīm arhato ’py upapattiṃ prajñāpayām, “the birth of a worthy one that gives passage to an inconceivable nirvāṇa is taught too”; LSPW: “an unthinkable rebirth which allows him to advance to the beyond of Nirvana.”
n.­1983
This is from The Questions of Sāgaramati (Sāgara­mati­paripṛcchā), Toh 152, 10.­7–10.­8 (Dharmachakra 2020) cited earlier at Bṭ3 1.­213–1.­216.
n.­1984
Earlier 1.­213 nyon mongs pa (saṁkliṣyante), “afflicted by.”
n.­1985
Earlier 1.­214 nyon mongs pa (saṁkliṣyante), “afflicted by.”
n.­1986
Earlier 1.­214 nyon mongs pa (saṁkliṣyante), “afflicted by.”
n.­1987
D reads phyogs in place of tshogs, “not complete the [dharmas on] the side of awakening.”
n.­1988
This is the Daśa­dharmaka­sūtra cited earlier 1.­223–1.­226.
b.

Bibliography

Primary Sources‍—Tibetan

’phags pa shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa ’bum dang / nyi khri lnga sgong pa dang / khri brgyad stong pa rgya cher bshad pa (Ārya­śata­sāhasrikā­pañca­viṃśati­sāhasrikāṣṭādaśa-sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitābṭhaṭṭīkā) [The Long Explanation of the Noble Perfection of Wisdom in One Hundred Thousand, Twenty-Five Thousand, and Eighteen Thousand Lines]. Vasubandhu/Daṃṣṭrāsena. Toh 3808, Degé Tengyur vol. 93 (shes phyin, pha), folios 1b–292b.

shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa brgyad stong pa (Aṣṭa­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā) [The Perfection of Wisdom in Eight Thousand Lines]. Toh 12, Degé Kangyur vol. 33 (shes phyin, brgyad stong pa, ka), folios 1b–286a.

shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa khri brgyad stong pa (Aṣṭā­daśa­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā) [The Perfection of Wisdom in Eighteen Thousand Lines]. Toh 10, Degé Kangyur (shes phyin, khri brgyad, ka, kha, ga), folios (ga) 1b–206a. English translation in Sparham 2022.

shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa khri pa (Daśa­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā) [The Perfection of Wisdom in Ten Thousand Lines]. Toh 11, Degé Kangyur (shes phyin, khri pa, ga, nga), folios 1b–91a, 1b–397a. English translation in Dorje 2018.

shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa rdo rje bcod pa (Vajracchedikā) [The Diamond Sūtra]. Toh 16, Degé Kangyur (shes phyin, rna tshogs, ka), folios 121a–132b.

shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa stong phrag brgya pa (Śata­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā) [The Perfection of Wisdom in One Hundred Thousand Lines]. Toh 8, Degé Kangyur (shes phyin, ’bum, ka–a), 12 vols. English translation in Sparham 2024.

shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa stong phrag nyi shu lnga pa (Pañca­viṃśati­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā) [The Perfection of Wisdom in Twenty-Five Thousand Lines]. Toh 9, Degé Kangyur (shes phyin, nyi khri, ka–a), 3 vols. English translation in Padmakara 2023.

shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa sdud pa tshigs su bcad pa (Prajñā­pāramitā­ratna­guṇa­saṃcaya­gāthā) [“Verse Summary of the Jewel Qualities”]. In shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa khri brgyad stong pa (Aṣṭā­daśa­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā) Toh 10, Degé Kangyur (shes phyin, khri brgyad, ga), folios 163a–181.b. Also Toh 13, Degé Kangyur vol. 34 (shes rab sna tshogs pa, ka), folios 1b–19b. English translation in Sparham 2022.

Primary Sources‍—Sanskrit

Abhi­samayālaṃkāra-nāma-prajñā­pāramitopadeśa­śāstra [Ornament for the Clear Realizations]. Edited by Unrai Wogihara (1973).

Aṣṭa­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā [The Perfection of Wisdom in Eight Thousand Lines]. Edited by Unrai Wogihara (1973) incorporating Mitra (1888).

Pañcaviṃśati-sāhasrikā Prajñā-pāramitā [“The Perfection of Wisdom in Twenty-Five Thousand Lines”]. Edited by Nalinaksha Dutt with critical notes and introduction (Calcutta Oriental Series, 28. London: Luzac, 1934.) Reprint edition, Sri Satguru Publications, 1986.

Pañca­viṃśati­sāhasrikā Prajñāpāramitā [The Perfection of Wisdom in Twenty-Five Thousand Lines]. Edited by Takayasu Kimura. Tokyo: Sankibo Busshorin 2007–9 (1-1, 1-2), 1986 (2-3), 1990 (4), 1992 (5), 2006 (6-8). Available online (input by Klaus Wille, Göttingen) at GRETIL.

Secondary References

Sūtras

’phags pa chos bcu pa zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Ārya­daśa­dharmaka-nāma-mahāyāna­sūtra) [The Ten Dharmas Sūtra]. Toh 53, Degé Kangyur vol. 40 (dkon brtsegs, kha), folios 164a6–184b6.

’phags pa de bzhin gshegs pa’i snying po zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Ārya­tathāgata­garbha-nāma-mahā­yāna­sūtra) [The Tathāgatagarbha Sūtra]. Toh 258, Dege Kangyur vol. 66 (mdo sde, za), folios 245b2–259b4.

’phags pa lang kar gshegs pa’i theg pa chen po’i mdo (Ārya­laṅkāvatāra­mahā­yāna­sūtra) [Descent into Laṅkā Sūtra]. Toh 107, Degé Kangyur vol. 49 (mdo sde, ca), folios 56a1–191b7.

’phags pa lha mo dpal ’phreng gi seng ge’i sgra (Śrī­mālā­devī­siṃha­nāda­sūtra) [Lion’s Roar of the Goddess Śrīmālā]. Toh 92, Degé Kangyur vol. 44 (dkon brtsegs, cha), folios 255a1–277b7.

blo gros mi zad pas bstan pa (Akṣaya­mati­nirdeśa) [The Teaching of Akṣayamati]. Toh 175, Degé Kangyur vol. 60 (mdo sde, ma), folios 79a1–174b7. English translation in Braarvig and Welsh 2020.

blo gros rgya mtshos zhus pa’i mdo (Sāgara­mati­paripṛcchā) [The Questions of Sāgaramati]. Toh 152, Degé Kangyur vol. 58 (mdo sde, pha), folios 1b1–115b7. English translation in Dharmachakra 2020.

byang chub sems dpa’i sde snod kyi mdo (Bodhi­sattva­piṭaka­sūtra) [The Bodhisattva’s Scriptural Collection]. Toh 56, Degé Kangyur vols. 40–41 (dkon brtsegs, kha, ga), folios 255b1–294a7, 1b1–205b1. English translation in Norwegian Institute of Palaeography and Historical Philology 2023.

dam pa’i chos padma dkar po (Saddharma­puṇḍarika) [The White Lotus of the Good Dharma]. Toh 113, Degé Kangyur vol. 51 (mdo sde, ja), folios 1b1–180b7. English translation in Roberts 2018.

de bshin gshegs pa’i gsang ba bsam gyis mi khyab pa’i bstan pa (Tathāgatācintya­guhyaka­nirdeśa) [Explanation of the Inconceivable Secrets of the Tathāgatas]. Toh 47, Degé Kangyur vol. 39 (dkon brtsegs, ka), folios 100a7–203a. English translation in Fiordalis, David. and Dharmachakra Translation Committee 2023.

de bzhin gshegs pa’i snying rje chen po nges par bstan pa (Tathāgata­mahā­karuṇā­nirdeśa) [The Teaching on the Great Compassion of the Tathāgata]. Toh 147, Degé Kangyur vol. 57 (mdo sde, pa), folios 142a1–242b7. English translation in Burchardi 2020.

Dhāraṇīśvara­rāja. See de bzhin gshegs pa’i snying rje chen po nges par bstan pa.

dri ma med par grags pas bstan pa (Vimala­kīrti­nirdeśa) [The Teaching of Vimalakīrti]. Toh 176, Degé Kangyur vol. 60 (mdo sde, ma), folios 175a1–239b7. English translation in Thurman 2017.

mdo chen po stong pa nyid ces bya ba (Śūnyatā-nāma-mahāśūtra) [Great Sūtra called Emptiness]. Toh 290, Degé Kangyur vol. 71 (mdo sde, sha), folios 250a1–253b2.

rgya cher rol pa (Lalitavistara) [The Play in Full]. Toh 95, Degé Kangyur vol. 46 (mdo sde, kha), folios 1b1–216b7. English translation in Dharmachakra 2013.

sa bcu pa’i mdo (Daśa­bhūmika­sūtra) [The Ten Bhūmis]. See sangs rgyas phal po che zhes bya ba las, sa bcu’i le’u ste, sum cu rtsa gcig pa’o.

sangs rgyas phal po che zhes bya ba las, sa bcu’i le’u ste, sum cu rtsa gcig pa’o (sa bcu pa’i mdo, Daśa­bhūmika­sūtra) [The Ten Bhūmis]. Degé Kangyur vol. 36 (phal chen, kha), folios 166.a5–283.a7. English translation in Roberts 2021.

sangs rgyas phal po che zhes bya ba shin tu rgyas pa chen po’i mdo (Buddhāvataṃsaka-nāma-mahā­vaipūlya­sūtra) [Avataṃsaka Sūtra]. Toh 44, Degé Kangyur vols. 35–36 (phal chen, ka–a).

tshangs pa’i dra ba’i mdo (Brahmajālasūtra) [The Sūtra of Brahma’s Net]. Toh 352, Degé Kangyur vol. 76 (mdo sde, aḥ), folios 70b2–86a2.

Indic Commentaries

Abhayākaragupta. shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa brgyad stong pa’i ’grel pa gnad kyi zla ’od (Āṣṭa­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā­vṛtti-marmakaumudī) [“Moonlight”]. Toh 3805, Degé Tengyur vol. 90 (shes phyin, da), folios 1b–228a.

Abhayākaragupta. thub pa’i dgongs pai rgyan (Muni­matālaṃkāra) [“Intention of the Sage”]. Toh 3903, Degé Tengyur vol. 211 (dbu ma, a), folios 73b–293a.

Anonymous/Daṃṣṭrāsena. shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa ’bum gyi rgya cher ’grel (Śata­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā­bṛhaṭṭīkā) [The Long Commentary on the One Hundred Thousand]. Toh 3807, Degé Tengyur vols. 91–92 (shes phyin, na, pa).

Āryavimuktisena. ’phags pa shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa stong phrag nyi shu lnga pa’i man ngag gi bstan bcos mngon par rtogs pa’i rgyan gyi tshig le’ur byas pa’i rnam par ’grel pa (Ārya­pañca­viṃśati­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitopadeśa­śāstrābhisamayālaṃkāra­kārikā­vārttika) [“Āryavimuktisena’s Commentary”]. Toh 3787, Degé Tengyur vol. 80 (shes phyin, ka), folios 14b–212a.

Asaṅga. theg pa chen po rgyud bla ma’i bstan bcos rnam par bshad pa (Mahā­yānottara­tantra­śāstra­vyākhyā) [The Explanation of The Treatise on the Ultimate Continuum of the Mahāyāna]. Toh 4025, Degé Tengyur vol. 225 (sems tsam, phi), folios 74b1–129a7.

Asaṅga. rnal ’byor spyod pa’i sa (Yogācārabhūmi) [The Levels of Spiritual Practice]. Toh 4035, Degé Tengyur vol. 229 (sems tsam, tshi), folios 1b–283a.

Asaṅga. rnal ’byor spyod pa’i sa las byang chub sems dpa’i sa (Bodhi­sattva­bhūmi) [The Level of a Bodhisattva]. Toh 4037, Degé Tengyur vol. 231 (sems tsam, wi), folios 1b–213a.

Asaṅga. theg pa chen po bsdus pa (Mahā­yāna­saṃgraha) [A Summary of the Great Vehicle]. Toh 4048, Degé Tengyur vol. 236 (sems tsam, ri), folios 1b–43a.

Asvabhāva. theg pa chen po bsdus pa’i bshad sbyar (Mahā­yāna­saṃgrahopanibandhana) [Explanations Connected to A Summary of the Great Vehicle]. Toh 4051, Degé Tengyur vol. 236 (sems tsam, ri), folios 190b–296a.

Bhadanta Vimuktisena (btsun pa grol sde). ’phags pa shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa stong phrag nyi shu lnga pa’i man ngag gi bstan bcos mngon par rtogs pa’i rgyan gyi tshig le’ur byas pa’i rnam par ’grel pa (*Ārya­pañca­viṃśati­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitopadeśa-śāstrābhisamayālaṃkāra­kārikā­vārttika) [A General Commentary on “The Ornament for Clear Realizations,” A Treatise of Personal Instructions on the Perfection of Wisdom in Twenty-Five Thousand Lines]. Toh 3788, Degé Tengyur vol. 81 (shes phyin, kha), folios 1b–181a.

Buddhaśrī. shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa sdud pa’i tshig su byas pa’i dka’ ’grel (Prajñā­pāramitā­saṃcaya­gāthā­pañjikā) [A Commentary on the Difficult Points of the “Verses [that Summarize the Perfection of Wisdom]. Toh 3798, Degé Tengyur (shes phyin, nya), folios 116a–189b.

Daśabalaśrīmitra. ’dus byas ’dus ma byas rnam par nges pa (Saṃskṛtāsaṃskṛta­viniścaya) [Differentiating Between the Compounded and Uncompounded]. Toh 3897, Degé Tengyur (dbu ma, ha), folios 109a–317a.

Dharmatrāta. ched du brjod pa’i tshoms (Udānavarga) [Chapters of Utterances on Specific Topics]. Toh 4099, Degé Tengyur vol. 250 (mngon pa, tu), folios 1b–45a; Toh 326, Degé Kangyur vol. 72 (mdo sde, sa), folios 209a1–253a7.

Haribhadra. shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa brgyad stong pa’i bshad pa mngon par rtogs pa’i rgyan gyi snang ba, (Aṣṭa­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā-vyākhyānābhisamayālaṃkārālokā) [“Illumination of the Abhisamayālaṃkāra”]. Toh 3791, Degé Tengyur vol. 85 (shes phyin, cha), folios 1b–341a.

Haribhadra. bcom ldan ’das yon tan rin po che sdud pa’i tshig su byas pa’i dka’ ’grel shes bya ba (Bhagavadratna­guṇa­saṃcaya­gāthā-pañjikānāma/Subodhinī) [A Commentary on the Difficult Points of the “Verses that Summarize the Perfection of Wisdom”]. Toh 3792, Degé Tengyur vol. 86 (shes phyin, ja), folios 1b–78a.

Haribhadra. shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa’i man ngag gi bstan bcos mngon par rtogs pa’i rgyan zhes bya ba’i ’grel pa (Abhi­samayālaṃkāra-nāma-prajñā­pāramitopadeśa­śāstra­vṛtti) [A Running Commentary on “The Ornament for Clear Realizations, A Treatise of Personal Instructions on the Perfection of Wisdom”]. Toh 3793, Degé Tengyur vol. 86 (shes phyin, ja), folios 78b–140a.

Haribhadra. shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa stong phrag nyi shu lnga pa (Pañcaviṃśati­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā) [“Eight Chapters”]. Toh 3790, vols. 82–84 (shes phyin, ga, nga, ca).

Jñānavarja. ’phags pa lang kar gshegs pa zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo’i ’grel pa de bzhin gshegs pa’i snying po’i rgyan zhes bya ba (Ārya­laṅkāvatāra-nāma-mahā­yāna­sūtra­vṛtti­tathāgata-hṛdayālaṃkāra-nāma) [A Commentary on The Descent into Laṅkā called “The Ornament of the Heart of the Tathāgata”]. Toh 4019, Degé Tengyur (mdo ’grel, pi), folios 1b1–310a7.

Maitreya. shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa’i man ngag gi bstan bcos mngon par rtogs pa’i rgyan zhes bya ba tshig le’ur byas pa (Abhi­samayālaṃkāra-nāma-prajñā­pāramitopadeśa­śāstra­kārikā) [“Ornament for the Clear Realizations”]. Toh 3786, Degé Tengyur (shes phyin, ka), folios 1b–13a.

Maitreya. dbus dang mtha’ rnam par ’byed pa’i tshig le’ur byas pa (Madhyānta­vibhāga) [“Distinguishing the Middle from the Extremes”]. Toh 4021, Degé Tengyur vol. 225 (sems tsam, phi), folios 40b–45a.

Maitreya. theg pa chen po mdo sde’i rgyan zhes bya ba’i tshig le’ur byas pa (Mahā­yāna­sūtrālaṃkāra­kārikā) [Ornament for the Mahāyāna Sūtras]. Toh 4020, Degé Tengyur vol. 225 (sems tsam, phi), folios 1b1–39a4.

Maitreya. theg pa chen po rgyud bla ma’i bstan bcos (Mahāyānottara­tantra­śāstra-ratnagotra-vibhāga) [The Treatise on the Ultimate Continuum of the Mahāyāna]. Toh 4024, Degé Tengyur vol. 225 (sems tsam, phi), folios 54b1–73a7.

Mañjuśrīkīrti. ’phags pa chos thams cad kyi rang bzhin mnyam pa nyid rnam par spros pa’i ting nge ’dzin kyi rgyal po zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo’i ’grel pa grags pa’i phreng ba (Sarva­dharma­svabhāva­samatāvi­pañcita­samādhi­rāja-nāma-mahā­yāna­sūtra­ṭīkā­kīrti­mālā) [A Commentary on the Mahāyāna Sūtra “The King of Samādhis, the Revealed Equality of the Nature of All Phenomena,” called “The Garland of Renown”] Toh 4010, Degé Tengyur (mdo ’grel, nyi), folios 1b–163b.

Nāgārjuna. dbu ma rtsa ba’i tshig le’ur byas pa shes rab ces bya ba (Prajñā-nāma-mūla­madhyamaka­kārikā) [Fundamental Treatise on the Middle Way called “Wisdom”]. Toh 3824, Degé Tengyur vol. 198 (dbu ma, tsa), folios 1b1–19a6.

Prajñāvarman. ched du brjod pa’i tshoms kyi rnam par ’grel pa (Udāna­varga­vivaraṇa) [An Exposition of “The Categorical Sayings”]. Toh 4100, Degé Tengyur vol. 148–49 (mngon pa, tu, thu), folios 45b–thu 222a.

Pūrṇavardana. chos mngon par chos kyi ’grel bshad mtshan nyid kyi rjes su ’brang ba (Abhi­dharma­kośa­ṭīkā­lakṣaṇānusāriṇī) [An Explanatory Commentary on “The Treasury of Abhidharma” called “Following the Defining Characteristics”]. Toh 4093, Degé Tengyur vols. 144–45 (mngon pa, cu, chu), chu folios 1b–322a.

Ratnākaraśānti. ’phags pa shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa brgyad stong pa’i dka’ ’grel snying po mchog (Āryāṣṭa­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā­pañjikāsārottamā) [“Sāratamā”]. Toh 3803, Degé Tengyur vol. 89 (shes phyin, tha), folios 1b–230a.

Ratnākaraśānti. nam mkha’ dang mnyam pa zhes bya ba’i rgya cher ’grel pa (Khasamā-nāma-ṭīkā) [An Extensive Explanation of the Extant Khasama Tantra]. Toh 1424, Degé Tengyur vol. 21 (rgyud, wa), folios 153a3–171a7.

Ratnākaraśānti. mngon par rtogs pa’i rgyan gyi ’grel pa’i tshig le’ur byas pa’i ’grel pa dag ldan (Abhi­samayālaṃkāra­kārikā­vṛitti­śuddha­matī) [A Running Commentary on “The Ornament for Clear Realizations” called “Pristine Intelligence”]. Toh 3801, Degé Tengyur vol. 88 (shes phyin, ta), folios 76a–204a.

Sāgaramegha (rgya mtsho sprin). rnal ’byor spyod pa’i sa las byang chub sems dpa’i sa’i rnam par bshad pa (Bodhi­sattva­bhūmi­vyākhyā) [“An Explanation of The Level of a Bodhisattva”]. Toh 4047, Degé Tengyur vol. 235 (sems tsam, yi), folios 1b–338a.

Śrījagattalanivāsin. bcom ldan ’das ma’i man ngag gi rjes su brang ba zhes bya ba’i rnam par bshad pa (Bhagavatyāmnāyānusāriṇī-nāma-vyākhyā) [An Explanation of “The Perfection of Wisdom in Eight Thousand Lines” called “Following the Personal Instructions of the Bhagavatī”]. Toh 3811, Degé Tengyur vol. 94 (shes phyin), folios 1b–320a.

Sthiramati. mdo sde rgyan gyi ’grel bshad (Sūtrālaṃkāra­vṛtti­bhāṣya) [An Explanatory Commentary on the Ornament for the Mahāyāna Sūtras]. Toh 4034, Degé Tengyur vols. 227, 228 (sems tsam, ma, tsi).

Vasubandhu. ’phags pa bcom ldan ’das ma shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa rdo rje gcod pa’i don bdun gyi rgya cher ’grel pa (Ārya­bhagavatī­prajñā­pāramitā­vajracchedikā­saptārtha­ṭīkā) [An Extensive Commentary on the Seven Subjects of “The Perfection of Wisdom, ‘The Diamond Sūtra”]. Toh 3816, Degé Tengyur vol. 95 (shes phyin, ma), folios 178a5–203b7.

Vasubandhu. ’phags pa blo gros mi zad pas bstan pa rgya cher ’grel pa (Akṣaya­mati­nirdeśa­ṭīkā) [An Extensive Commentary on The Teaching of Ākṣayamati]. Toh 3994, Degé Tengyur (mdo ’grel, ci), 1b1–269a7.

Vasubandhu. ’phags pa sa bcu pa’i rnam par bshad pa (Ārya­daśa­bhūmi­vyākhyāna) [Explanation of The Ten Bhūmis]. Toh 3993, Degé Tengyur vol. 215 (mdo sde, ngi), folios 103b–266a.

Vasubandhu. chos mngon pa’i mdzod kyi bshad pa (Abhidharmakośabhāṣya) [Explanation of “The Treasury of Abhidharma”]. Toh 4090, Degé Tengyur, vols. 242, 243 (mngon pa, ku, khu), folios ku 26a1–258a7, khu 1b1–95a7.

Vasubandhu. chos mngon pa’i mdzod kyi tshig le’ur byas pa (Abhi­dharma­kośa­kārikā) [The Treasury of Abhidharma]. Toh 4089, Degé Tengyur, vol. 242 (mngon pa, ku), folios 1b1–25a7.

Vasubandhu. dbus dang mtha’ rnam par ’byed pa’i ’grel pa (Madhyānta­vibhāga­bhāṣya) [An Extensive Commentary on Distinguishing the Middle from the Extremes]. Toh 4027, Degé Tengyur vol. 226 (sems tsam, bi), folios 1b1–27a7.

Vasubandhu. shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa rdo rje gcod pa bshad pa’i bshad sbyar gyi tshig le’ur byas pa (Vajracchedikāyāḥ prajñāpāramitāyā vyākhyānopanibandhana­kārikā) [“Verse Explanation of the Diamond Sūtra”]. Peking Tengyur 5864, vol. 146 (ngo mtshar bstan bcos, nyo), folios 1b1–5b1.

Vasubandhu. mdo sde’i rgyan gyi bshad pa (Sūtrālaṃkāra­vyākhyā) [An Explanation of The Ornament for the Mahāyāna Sūtras]. Toh 4026, Degé Tengyur vol. 225 (sems tsam, phi), folios 129b–260a.

Vasubandhu. ’phags pa blo gros mi zad pas bstan pa rgya cher ’grel pa (Akṣaya­mati­nirdeśaṭīkā) [An Extensive Commentary on The Teaching of Ākṣayamati]. Toh 3994, Degé Tengyur (mdo ’grel, ci), folios 1b–269a.

Indigenous Tibetan Works

Ar Changchup Yeshé (ar byang chub ye shes). mngon rtogs rgyan gyi ’grel pa rnam ’byed [Disentanglement of Haribhadra’s “Exposition of Maitreya’s ‘Ornament for the Clear Realizations’ ”]. Ar byang chub ye shes kyi gsung chos skor, Bka’ gdams dpe dkon gches btus, 2. Edited by Dpal brtsegs bod yig dpe rnying zhib ’jug khang. Pe cin: krung go’i bod rig pa’i dpe skrun khang, 2006.

Bodong Tsöntru Dorjé (bo dong brtson ’grus rdo rje). shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa’i man ngag gi bstan bcos mngon par rtogs pa’i rgyan gyi ’grel bshad shes rab mchog gi rgyan (stod cha) [Ornament for the Supreme Wisdom]. ’Phags yul rgyan drug mchog gnyis kyi zhal lung, vol. 11, pp. 22–565.

Butön (bu ston rin chen grub). bde bar gshegs pa’i bstan pa’i gsal byed chos kyi ’byung gnas gsung rab rin po che’i mdzod / chos ’byung chen mo [History of Buddhism]. Zhol phar khang gsung ’bum, vol. ya (26), folios 1b–212a.

Chim Namkha Drak (mchims nam mkha’ grags). shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa’i stong phrag brgya pa gzhung gi don rnam par ’byed pa’i bshad pa [Summary Explanation of the One Hundred Thousand]. ’Phags yul rgyan drug mchog gnyis kyi zhal lung, vol. 8, pp. 217–468.

Chomden Rikpé Reltri (bcom ldan rigs pa’i ral gri). shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa’i ’grel bshad mngon par rtogs pa rgyan gyi me tog [Flower Ornament for the Clear Realizations]. gsung ’bum, Kamtrul Sonam Dondrub typeset edition, ga, folios 1-389b [3-780].

Chomden Rikpé Reltri (bcom ldan rigs pa’i ral gri). sha ta sa ha sRi ka pRadznyA pA ra mi ta a laM ka ra pushpe nA ma bi dza ha raM / shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa stong phra brgya pa rgyan gyi me tog [Flower Ornament for the One Hundred Thousand]. gsung ’bum, Kamtrul Sonam Dondrub typeset edition, ca, folios 1-26b [565-617].

Chomden Rikpé Reltri (bcom ldan rigs pa’i ral gri). bstan pa rgyas pa rgyan gyi nyi ’od [An Early Survey of Buddhist Literature]. gsung ’bum, Kamtrul Sonam Dondrub typeset edition, ca, 1-81b [99-260].

Chomden Rikpé Reltri (bcom ldan rigs pa’i ral gri). byams pa dang ’brel ba’i chos kyi byung tshul [Historical Evolution of the Works of Maitreya]. gsung ’bum, Kamtrul Sonam Dondrub typeset edition, ca, 1-6a [43-56].

Denkarma (pho brang stod thang ldan dkar gyi chos kyi ’gyur ro cog gi dkar chag). Toh 4364, Degé Tengyur vol. 206 (sna tshogs, jo), folios 294.b–310.a.

Dolpopa (dol po pa shes rab rgyal mtshan). shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa khri brgyad stong pa’i mchan bu zur du bkod pa (stod cha) [“Notes to the Eight Thousand”]. ’dzam thang gsum ’bum, ma, pp. 5.3–134. Available online at BDRC.

Dolpopa (dol po pa shes rab rgyal mtshan). ’phags pa shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa stong phrag nyi su lnga pa’i bshad pa [Explanation of the Twenty-Five Thousand Perfection of Wisdom]. Jo nang kun mkhyen dol po pa shes rab rgyal mtshan gyi gsung ’bum (glog klad ma gsungs ’bum), vol. 6, 1–279. Edited by dpal brtsegs bod yig dpe rnying zhib ’jug khang. Pe cin: krung go’i bod rig pa’i dpe skrun khang, 2011.

Jamsar Shérap Wozer (’jam gsar ba shes rab ’od zer). mngon rtogs rgyan gyi ’grel bshad ’thad pa’i ’od ’bar [Blaze of What is Tenable]. ’Phags yul rgyan drug mchog gnyis kyi zhal lung, vol. 9, pp. 22–458.

Luyi Gyeltsen (Degé Tengyur: klu’i rgyal mtshan; Toh: byang chub rdzu ’phrul). phags pa dgongs pa nges par ’grel pa’i mdo’i rnam par bshad pa (Ārya­saṃdhi­nirmocana­sūtra­vyākhyāna) [Explanation of the Saṃdhinirmocana Sūtra]. Toh 4358, Degé Tengyur vol. 205 (sna tshogs, cho, jo), folios 1b1–293a7; 1b1–183b7.

Pema Karpo (kun mkhyen pad ma dkar po). mngon par rtogs pa rgyan gyi ’grel pa rje btsun byams pa’i zhal lung [“Words of Maitreya”]. Collected Works (gsuṅ-’bum) of Kun-Mkhyen Padma-Dkar-Po. Darjeeling: Kargyud Sungrab Nyamso Khang, 1973–1974. Vol. 8, pp. 1–340.

Phangthangma (dkar chag ’phang thang ma). Beijing: mi rigs dpe skrun khang, 2003.

Rongtön (rong ston shes bya kun rig). sher phyin stong phrag brgya pa’i rnam ’grel. In gsung ’bum, 4:380–678. khren tu’u: si khron dpe skrun tshogs pa. si khron mi rigs dpe skrun khang, 2008.

Serdok Shakya Chokden (gser mdog paṇ chen shākya mchog ldan). shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa’i man ngag gi bstan bcos mngon par rtogs pa’i rgyan ’grel pa dang bcas pa’i snga phyi’i ’brel rnam par btsal zhing / dngos bstan kyi dka’ ba’i gnas la legs par bshad pa’i dpung tshogs rnam par bkod pa/ bzhed tshul rba rlabs kyi phreng ba [“Garland of Waves”]. Complete Works, vol. 11. Thimphu, 1975.

Tsongkhapa (tsong kha pa blo bzang grags pa). shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa’i man ngag gi bstan bcos mngon par rtogs pa’i rgyan ’grel pa dang bcas pa’i rgya cher bshad pa legs bshad gser gyi phreng ba [Golden Garland of Eloquence: Long Explanation of the Perfection of Wisdom]. Zi ling: tsho sngon mi rigs dpe skrun khang, 1986. The page numbers are the same as vols. tsa and tsha in the mtsho sngon mi rigs dpe skrun khang gsung ’bum, 11: 11–519. zi ling: mtsho sngon mi rigs dpe skrun khang, 1999.

Upa Losal Sangyé Bum (dbus pa blo gsal sangs rgyas ’bum). pa). bstan ’gyur dkar chag [Catalog of the Early Narthang Tengyur]. Scans from gnas bcu lha khang, on BDRC (MW2CZ7507).

Secondary Literature

Amano, Koei H. Abhisamayālaṃkāra-kārikā-śāstra-vivṛti: Haribhadra’s Commentary on the Abhisamayālaṃkāra-kārikā-śāstra edited for the first time from a Sanskrit Manuscript. Kyoto: Heirakuji Shoten, 2000.

Ānandajyoti Bhikkhu. Maps of Ancient Buddhist India.

Bailey, D. R. Shackleton. The Śatapañcāśatka of Mātṛceṭa. Cambridge University Press, 1951.

Banerjea, Jitendra Nath. “The ‘Webbed Fingers’ of Buddha.” The Indian Historical Quarterly 6: no. 4 (December 1930): 717–27.

Bernhard, Franz, ed. Udānavarga. Abhandlungen Der Akadamie Der Wissenschaften. Vandenhoek & Ruprecht, 1965.

Bhattacarya, Gouriswar. “Nandipada or Nandyāvarta‍—The ‘ω -motif,’ ” Berliner Indologische Studien 13/14 (2000): 265–72.

Braarvig, Jens, ed. and trans. Akṣaya­mati­nirdeśa­sūtra. Oslo: Solum Forlag, 1993.

Braarvig, Jens, and David Welsh, trans. The Teaching of Akṣayamati (Akṣaya­mati­nirdeśa, Toh 175). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2020.

Brough, John. “The Arapacana Syllabary in the Old Lalitavistara.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 40 (1977): 85–95.

Brunnhöltzl, Karl (2011a). Prajñāpāramitā, Indian “gzhan stong pas,” and the beginning of Tibetan gzhan stong. Wien: Arbeitskreis für Tibetische und Buddhistische Studien.

Brunnhöltzl, Karl (2011b). Gone Beyond. Ithaca, N.Y.: Snow Lion Publications, 2011.

Bucknell, Roderick S. “The Structure of the Sagātha-Vagga of the Saṃyutta-Nikāya.” Buddhist Studies Review 24, no. 1 (2007): 7–34.

Burchardi, Anne, trans. The Teaching on the Great Compassion of the Tathāgata (Tathāgata­mahā­karuṇā­nirdeśa, Toh 147). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2020.

Candra, Lokesh. Tibetan Sanskrit Dictionary. Śata-piṭaka Series Indo-Asian Literature, Vol. 3. International Academy of Indian Culture (1959–61), third reprint edition 2001.

Chimpa, Lama and Alaka Chattopadhyaya. Tāranātha’s History of Buddhism in India. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1997.

Chodron, Gelongma Karma Migme. The Treatise on the Great Virtue of Wisdom of Nāgārjuna. Gampo Abbey Nova Scotia, 2001. English translation of Étienne Lamotte (1949–80).

Conze, Edward (No date). Ed. Ms. Cambridge Add. 1628 (abhi­samayālaṃkāra, pañca­viṃśati­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā) with various additions. Photocopy of typed manuscript. No date, no place.

Conze, Edward (1973a). Materials for a Dictionary of the Prajñāpāramitā Literature. Tokyo: Suzuki Research Foundation, 1973.

Conze, Edward (1973b). The Perfection of Wisdom in Eight Thousand Lines & Its Verse Summary. Bolinas, Calif.: Four Seasons Foundation, 1973.

Conze, Edward (1962). Ed. and trans. The Gilgit Manuscript of the Aṣṭādaśa-sāhasrikāprajñāpāramitā: Chapters 55 to 70 Corresponding to the 5th Abhisamaya. Roma: Istituto Italiano per il Medio ed Estremo Oriente, 1962.

Conze, Edward (1954). Ed. Abhi­samayālaṅkāra. Serie Orientale Roma, 6. Roma: Is.M.E.O., 1954.

Conze, Edward and Shotaro Iida. “Maitreya’s Questions” in the Prajñāpāramitā.” In Mélanges d’India a la Mémoire de Louis Renou, pp. 229–42. Paris: Éditions E. de Boccard, 1968.

Critical Pāli Dictionary Online.

de Jong, J. W. Nāgārjuna, Mūlamadhyamakakārikāḥ. Madras, India: Adyar Library and Research Centre, 1977.

Das, Sarat Candra. Tibetan-English Dictionary. Calcutta, 1902; reprint ed., New Delhi 1985.

Dharmachakra Translation Committee, (2013). Trans. The Play in Full (Lalita­vistara, Toh 95). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha.

Dharmachakra Translation Committee, (2020). Trans. The Questions of Sāgaramati (Sāgaramati­paripṛcchā, Toh 152). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha.

Dorje, Gyurme, trans. The Transcendent Perfection of Wisdom in Ten Thousand Lines (Daśa­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā, Toh 11). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2018.

Dutt, Nalinaksha. Pañcaviṃśati-sāhasrikā Prajñā-pāramitā. Edited with critical notes and introduction. (Calcutta Oriental Series, 28. London: Luzac, 1934.) Reprint edition, Sri Satguru Publications, 1986.

Edgerton, Franklin. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Grammar and Dictionary. 2 vols. New Haven: Yale University Press,1953. Vol. 1, Dictionary.

Encyclopaedia Iranica.

Goldstein, Melvyn. A New Tibetan English Dictionary of Modern Tibetan. University of California Press, 2001.

Fiordalis, David. and Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans. The Secrets of the Realized Ones (Toh 47). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2023.

Ghoṣa, Pratāpachandra, ed. Śatasāhasrikā Prajñāpāramitā. Calcutta: Asiatic Society of Bengal, 1902–14.

Griffiths, Paul J. “Omniscience in the Mahā­yāna­sūtrālaṃkāra and its Commentaries.” Indo-Iranian Journal 33 (1990): 85–120.

Harrison, Paul. “Vajracchedikā Prajñāpāramitā: A New English Translation of the Sanskrit Text Based on Two Manuscripts from Greater Gandhāra.” In Buddhist Manuscripts Volume III, edited by Jens Braavig et al., 133–59. Manuscripts in the Schøyen Collection. Oslo: Hermes, 2006.

Harvey, Peter. “The Dynamics of Paritta Chanting in Southern Buddhism.” In Love Divine: Studies in Bhakti and Devotional Mysticism, edited by Karel Werner, 53–84. London: Curzon Press, 1993.

Herrmann-Pfandt, Adelheid. Die lHan kar ma: ein früher Katalog der ins Tibetische übersetzten buddhistischen Texte. Vienna: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 2008.

Honda, Megumu. “Annotated Translation of the Daśabhūmika-sūtra.” Studies in South, East, and Central Asia, Satapitaka Series 74 (1968): 115–276.

Hong, Luo. “Is Ratnākaraśānti a gZhan stong pa?” Journal of Indian Philosophy 46 (2018): 577–619.

Hookham, Susan K. The Buddha Within. Tathagatagarbha Doctrine According to the Shentong Interpretation of the Ratnagotravibhaga. Albany, NY: State University of New York Press, 1991.

Hopkins, Jeffrey (1999). Emptiness in the Mind-Only School of Buddhism. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press, 1999.

Hopkins, Jeffrey (2013). “The Hidden Teaching of the Perfection of Wisdom Sūtras: Jam-yang-shay-pa’s Seventy Topics and Kon-chog-jig-may-wang-po’s Supplement.” Available online from UMA Institute for Tibetan Studies, 2013.

Ishihama, Yumiko and Yoichi Fukuda, eds. A New Critical Edition of the Mahāvyutpatti. Tokyo: The Toyo Bunko, 1989.

Jaini, P. S. Sāratamā: A Pañjikā on the Abhisamayālaṃkāra by Ācārya Ratnākaraśānti. Tibetan Sanskrit Works Series 18. Patna: Kashi Prasad Jayaswal Research Institute, 1972.

Jäschke, H. A. A Tibetan-English Dictionary. London: Routledge, Kegan and Paul, 1881; reprint edition Dover Publications, 2003.

Johnston, E. H., ed. (1950). The Ratnagotravibhāga Mahāyānottaratantraśāstra. Patna, India: Bihar Research Society.

Johnston, E. H., ed. (1932). “Vardhamāna and Śrīvasta.” Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society 64, no. 2 (April 1932): 393–98.

Kano, Kazuo and Xuezhu Li (2014). “Critical Edition and Japanese Translation and Critical Edition of the Saṃskrit text of the Muni­matālaṃkāra Chapter 1. Ekayāna Portion (fol. 67v2–70r4): Parallel Passages in the Madhyamakāloka,” The Mikkyo Bunka [Journal of Esoteric Buddhism] 232 (March 2014): 138–03 [7–42]. The Association of Esoteric Buddhist Studies, Koyasan University, Koyasan, Wakayama, Japan.

Kano, Kazuo and Xuezhu Li (2012). “Annotated Japanese Translation and Critical Edition of the Saṃskrit text of the Muni­matālaṃkāra Chapter 1‍—Opening Portion.” The Mikkyo Bunka [Journal of Esoteric Buddhism] 229 (December 2012): 64–37 [59–86]. The Association of Esoteric Buddhist Studies, Koyasan University, Koyasan, Wakayama, Japan.

Karashima, Seishi. Introduction to Manuscripts in the National Archives of India Facsimile Edition Volume II.1 Mahāyāna Texts: Prajñāpāramitā Texts (1). Edited by Karashima, Seishi et al. Published by the National Archives of India (New Delhi) and the International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology (Tokyo), 2016.

Kern, H., trans. The Saddharma-puṇḍarīka, or Lotus of the True Law. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1884.

Kimura, Takayasu, ed. Pañcaviṃśatisāhasrikā Prajñāpāramitā. GRETIL edition input by Klaus Wille. Tokyo: Sankibo Busshorin 2007–9 (1-1, 1-2), 1986 (2-3), 1990 (4), 1992 (5), 2006 (6-8).

Lamotte, Étienne. Le Traité de la Grande Vertu de Sagesse de Nāgārjuna (Mahāprajñā-pāramitā-śāstra). Vol. I and II: Bibliothèque du Muséon, 18. Louvain: Institut Orientaliste, 1949; reprinted 1967. Vol III, IV, and V: Publications de l’Institut Orientaliste de Louvain, 2, 12, and 24. Louvain: Institut Orientaliste, 1970, 1976, and 1980.

la Vallée Poussin, Louis de. L’Abhidharmakośa de Vasubandhu. 6 vols. Brussels: Institut Belge des Hautes Études Chinoises, 1971.

Law, B. C. Historical Geography of Ancient India. Paris: Société Asiatique de Paris, 1954.

Lévi, Sylvain. Mahāyānasūtrālaṃkāra, exposé de la doctrine du grand véhicule selon le système Yogācāra. 2 vols. Paris: Bibliothèque de l’École des Hautes Études, 1907; reprint, vol. 1, Shanghai, China, 1940.

Jaini, P. S. Sāratamā: A Pañjikā on the Abhisamayālaṃkāra by Ācārya Ratnākaraśānti, Tibetan Sanskrit Works Series 18. Patna: Kashi Prasad Jayaswal Research Institute, 1972.

Malalasekera. G. P. Dictionary of Pāli Proper Names. Vols. i and ii. London: John Murray, 1937–38.

Martin, Dan. Dan Martin Dictionary. Part of The Tibetan to English Translation Tool, version 3.3.0 compiled by Andrés Montano Pellegrini. Available from https://www.bdrc.io/blog/2020/12/21/dan-martins-tibetan-histories/.

McKay, Alex. Kailasa histories: renunciate traditions and the construction of Himalayan sacred geography. Brill’s Tibetan Studies Library 38. Leiden: Brill, 2015.

McKlintock, Sarah. “Omniscience and the Rhetoric of Reason in the Tattvasaṃgraha and the Tattva­saṃgraha­pañjikā.” Unpublished PhD diss. Harvard University, 2002.

Mitra, Rājendralāla. Ashṭasāhasrikā. Calcutta: Baptist Mission Press, 1888.

Monier-Williams, Monier. A Sanskrit-English Dictionary: Etymologically and Philologically Arranged with Special Reference to Cognate Indo-European Languages. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1899.

Nattier, Jan. Once Upon a Future Time: Studies in a Buddhist Prophecy of Decline. Berkeley, CA: Asian Humanities Press, 1999.

Norwegian Institute of Palaeography and Historical Philology, trans. The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva (Toh 56). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2023.

Padmakara Translation Group, trans. The Perfection of Wisdom in Twenty-Five Thousand Lines (Pañca­viṃśati­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā, Toh 9). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha.

Pensa, Corrado. L’Abhisamayālamkāravrtti di Ārya-Vimuktisena: primo Abhisamaya / testo e note critiche [a cura di] Corrado Pensa. Roma, Italy: Istituto Italiano per il Medio ed Estremo Oriente, 1967.

Pruden, Leo M. Abhidharma­kośa­bhāṣyam. 4 vols. Berkeley, CA: Asian Humanities Press, 1988. English translation of la Vallée Poussin 1971.

Nagao, Gadjin M., ed. Madhyānta­vibhāga­bhāṣya. Tokyo: Suzuki Research Foundation, 1964.

Ñāṇamoli, Bhikkhu, trans. Visuddhimagga: The Path of Purification. Columbo, Ceylon: R. Semage, 1956; Berkeley, CA: Shambhala Publications 1976.

Nanjio, Bunyiu, ed. Laṅkāvatāra Sūtra. Bibliotheca Otaniensis, vol. 1. Kyoto: Otani University Press, 1923.

Obermiller, E. (1932–33). “The Doctrine of Prajñāpāramitā as Exposed in the Abhi­samayālaṃkāra of Maitreya.” Acta Orientalia 9 (1932–33): 1–33; additional indices pp. 334–54.

Obermiller, E. (1960). Ed. Prajñā-pāramitā-ratna-guṇa-saṃcaya-gāthā. Bibliotheca Buddhica XXIX, Leningrad: Akademii Nauk, 1937. Reprint edition, Indo-Iranian Reprints, ’S-Gravenhage: Mouton and Co.

Rahder, Johannes. Dasabhumikasutra et Bodhisattvabhumi. Chapitres Vihāra et Bhūmi. Publiés avec une introduction et des notes. Paris and Louvain: Paul Guethner/J.-B. Istas, 1926.

Régamey, Konstanty. Philosophy in the Samadhirajasutra. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1990.

Rhys Davids, T. W. and C. A. F. Dialogues of the Buddha Part II. London: Oxford University Press, 1910.

Roberts, Peter Alan, (2018). Trans. The White Lotus of the Good Dharma (Saddharma­puṇḍarīka, Toh 113). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha.

Roberts, Peter Alan, (2021a). Trans. The Stem Array (Gaṇḍavyūha, Toh 44-45). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2021.

Roberts, Peter Alan, (2021b). Trans. The Ten Bhūmis (Daśabhūmika, Toh 44-31). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha.

Saloman, Richard. “New Evidence for a Gāndhārī Original of the Arapacana Syllabary.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 110 (April–June 1990): 255–73.

Sánchez, Pedro Manuel Castro. “The Indian Buddhist Dāraṇī: An Introduction to its History, Meanings and Functions.” MA diss., University of Sunderland, 2011.

Schopen, Gregory. “The Manuscript of the Vajracchedikā Found at Gilgit.” In Studies in the Literature of the Great Vehicle, Three Mahāyāna Buddhist Texts, edited by L. O. Gomez and J. A. Silk, 89–141. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan, 1989.

Seton, Gregory Max. “Defining Wisdom: Ratnākaraśānti’s Sāratamā.” PhD diss., Oxford, 2015.

Shastri, Swami Dwarikadas, ed., Abhidharmakośa & Bhāṣya of Ācārya Vasubandhu with Sphuṭārtha Commentary of Ācārya Yaśomitra. Bauddha Bharati Series 5. Banaras: Bauddha Bharati, 1970.

Skilling, Peter, “Vasubandhu and the Vyakhyayukti Literature,” in Journal of the International Association of Buddhist Studies vol. 23, no. 2, 2000.

Sparham, Gareth (2006–11). Abhisamayālaṃkāra with Vṛtti and Ālokā. 4 vols. Fremont, CA: Jain Publication Company Inc.

Sparham, Gareth (2008–13). Golden Garland of Eloquence: legs bshad gser phreng, 4 vols. Fremont, CA: Jain Publishing Company.

Sparham, Gareth (2022). Trans. The Perfection of Wisdom in Eighteen Thousand Lines (Aṣṭādaśa­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā, Toh 10). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2022.

Sparham, Gareth (2024). Trans. The Perfection of Wisdom in One Hundred Thousand Lines (Śata­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā, Toh 8). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2024.

Stein, R.A. La civilization tibétaine. Paris: Dunod, 1962. English translation by J. E. S. Driver, Tibetan Civilization. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, 1972.

Suzuki, D. T. The Lankavatara Sutra. London: George Routledge and Sons, 1932.

Szántō, Péter-Dániel. “A Sanskrit Fragment of Daśabalaśrīmitra’s Saṃskṛtāsaṃskṛtaviniścaya (Ch. 29 & 30)” version 18.iv.2017.

Thurman, Robert A. F., trans. The Teaching of Vimalakīrti (Vimala­kīrti­nirdeśa, Toh 176). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2017.

Thurman, Robert et al. The Universal Vehicle Discourse Literature. New York: American Institute of Buddhist Studies, 2004.

Tournadre, N. “The Classical Tibetan Cases.” Himalayan Linguistics 9, no. 2 (2010): 87–125.

Tucci, Giuseppe. Minor Buddhist Texts, Part 1. Serie Orientale Roma IX. Roma: IsMeo, 1956.

Ui, Hakuju et al, eds. A Complete Catalogue of the Tibetan Buddhist Canons: Bkaḥ-ḥgyur and Bstan-ḥgyur. Sendai: Tōhoku Imperial University, 1934.

Vaidya, P. L., ed. Lalitavistara. Darbhanga: Mithila Institute, 1958.

van der Kuijp, Leonard W. J. “Some Remarks on the Textual Transmission and Text of Bu ston rin chen grub’s Chos ’byung, a Chronicle of Buddhism in India and Tibet.” Revue d’Etudes Tibétaines 25 (April 2013): 115–93.

Vetter, Tilmann. “Compounds in the Prologue of the Pañcaviṃśatisāhasrikā.” Wiener Zeitschrift für die Kunde Südasiens, Band XXXVII, pp. 45–92, 1993.

Vira, Raghu and Lokesh Chandra. Gilgit Buddhist Manuscripts (revised and enlarged compact facsimile edition) Vol. 1. Bibliotheca Indo-Buddhica Series no. 150. Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications, a division of Indian Books Center, 1995.

Vogel, J. Indian Serpent Lore: Or, The Nāgas in Hindu Legend and Art. London: Arthur Probsthain, 1926.

Whitney, William Dwight. A Sanskrit Grammar. Leipzig: Breitkopf and Härtel; London: Trübner and Co., 1879.

Wogihara, Unrai, ed. Abhisamayālaṃkārālokā Prajñāpāramitā Vyākhyā: The Work of Haribhadra. Tokyo: The Toyo Bunko, 1932–5; reprint ed., Tokyo: Sankibo Buddhist Book Store, 1973.

Yuyama, Akira (1992). “Pañcāśati-, “500” or “50”? With special reference to the Lotus Sutra,” The Dating of the Historical Buddha/Die Datierung des Historischen Buddha, Part 2, 208–33. Edited by Heinz Bechert. Göttingen: Vandenhoek & Ruprecht.

Yuyama, Akira (1976). Prajñā-pāramitā-ratna-guṇa-saṃcaya-gāthā (Sanskrit Recension A). London: Cambridge University Press.

Zacchetti, Stefano (2005). In Praise of the Light. Bibliotheca Philologica et Philosophica Buddhica, Vol. 8. The International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology. Tokyo: Soka University, 2005.

Zacchetti, Stefano (2014). “Mind the Hermeneutical Gap.” Chinese Buddhism: Past, Present and Future, 157–94.

Zimmermann, Michael. A Buddha within: The Tathāgatagarbhasūtra; the earliest exposition of the Buddha-nature teaching in India. Tokyo: Soka University, 2002.

Zhang, Yisun, ed. Bod rgya tshig mdzod chen mo. Pe-cing: Mi rigs dpe skrun khaṅ, 2000.

Table of Contents

Search this text

Spotted a mistake?

Please use the contact form provided to suggest a correction.

How to cite this text

The following are examples of how to correctly cite this publication. Links to specific passages can be derived by right-clicking on the milestones markers in the left-hand margin (e.g. s.1). The copied link address can replace the url below.

84000. The Long Explanation of the Noble Perfection of Wisdom in One Hundred Thousand, Twenty-Five Thousand, and Eighteen Thousand Lines (Ārya­śata­sāhasrikā­pañca­viṃśati­sāhasrikāṣṭā­daśa­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā­bṛhaṭṭīkā, ’phags pa shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa ’bum pa dang / nyi khri lnga stong pa dang / khri brgyad stong pa rgya cher bshad pa, Toh 3808). Translated by Gareth Sparham. Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2025. https://84000.co/translation/toh3808/UT23703-093-001-end-notes.Copy
84000. The Long Explanation of the Noble Perfection of Wisdom in One Hundred Thousand, Twenty-Five Thousand, and Eighteen Thousand Lines (Ārya­śata­sāhasrikā­pañca­viṃśati­sāhasrikāṣṭā­daśa­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā­bṛhaṭṭīkā, ’phags pa shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa ’bum pa dang / nyi khri lnga stong pa dang / khri brgyad stong pa rgya cher bshad pa, Toh 3808). Translated by Gareth Sparham, online publication, 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2025, 84000.co/translation/toh3808/UT23703-093-001-end-notes.Copy
84000. (2025) The Long Explanation of the Noble Perfection of Wisdom in One Hundred Thousand, Twenty-Five Thousand, and Eighteen Thousand Lines (Ārya­śata­sāhasrikā­pañca­viṃśati­sāhasrikāṣṭā­daśa­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā­bṛhaṭṭīkā, ’phags pa shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa ’bum pa dang / nyi khri lnga stong pa dang / khri brgyad stong pa rgya cher bshad pa, Toh 3808). (Gareth Sparham, Trans.). Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha. https://84000.co/translation/toh3808/UT23703-093-001-end-notes.Copy
Sponsor Translation